diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 312668 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/32057-h.htm | 7532 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43347 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/images/illus1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24211 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/images/illus2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41351 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/images/illus3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43866 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057-h/images/illus4.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48115 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057.txt | 7335 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 32057.zip | bin | 0 -> 108378 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
12 files changed, 14883 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/32057-h.zip b/32057-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..985497d --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h.zip diff --git a/32057-h/32057-h.htm b/32057-h/32057-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..25b92e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/32057-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7532 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<!-- $Id: header.txt 236 2009-12-07 18:57:00Z vlsimpson $ --> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Boys Of The Fort, by Captain Ralph Bonehill. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + +p { + margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; +} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} /* page numbers */ + +.linenum { + position: absolute; + top: auto; + left: 4%; +} /* poetry number */ + +.blockquot { + margin-left: 5%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +.sidenote { + width: 20%; + padding-bottom: .5em; + padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; + padding-right: .5em; + margin-left: 1em; + float: right; + clear: right; + margin-top: 1em; + font-size: smaller; + color: black; + background: #eeeeee; + border: dashed 1px; +} + +.bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + +.bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + +.bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + +.br {border-right: solid 2px;} + +.bbox {border: solid 2px;} + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.u {text-decoration: underline;} + +.caption {font-weight: bold;} + +/* Images */ +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + +.figleft { + float: left; + clear: left; + margin-left: 0; + margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-right: 1em; + padding: 0; + text-align: center; +} + +.figright { + float: right; + clear: right; + margin-left: 1em; + margin-bottom: + 1em; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-right: 0; + padding: 0; + text-align: center; +} + +/* Footnotes */ +.footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + +.footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + +.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: + none; +} + +/* Poetry */ +.poem { + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align: left; +} + +.poem br {display: none;} + +.poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + +.poem span.i0 { + display: block; + margin-left: 0em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.poem span.i2 { + display: block; + margin-left: 2em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.poem span.i4 { + display: block; + margin-left: 4em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of The Fort, by Ralph Bonehill + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Boys of The Fort + Or, A Young Captain's Pluck + +Author: Ralph Bonehill + +Release Date: April 19, 2010 [EBook #32057] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE FORT *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<h1>BOYS OF THE FORT</h1> + +<h3><i>Or, A Young Captain's Pluck</i></h3> + +<h4>FLAG OF FREEDOM SERIES</h4> + +<h2>By CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL</h2> + +<h4>AUTHOR OF "THE YOUNG BANDMASTER," "WHEN SANTIAGO FELL," "A SAILOR BOY +WITH DEWEY," "OFF FOR HAWAII," ETC.</h4> + + +<h4>GROSSET & DUNLAP<br /> +PUBLISHERS NEW YORK</h4> + +<h4><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1901, by</span><br /> +THE MERSHON COMPANY</h4> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus1" id="illus1"></a> +<img src="images/illus1.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3>DEFENDING THE FORT.</h3> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>CONTENTS.</h2> + +<!-- Autogenerated TOC. Modify or delete as required. --> +<p> +<a href="#PREFACE">PREFACE.</a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I. <span class="smcap">Bound for the Fort</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II. <span class="smcap">Caves in the Mountain</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III. <span class="smcap">An Important Conversation</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV. <span class="smcap">Lost in the Forest</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V. <span class="smcap">The Big Black Bear</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI. <span class="smcap">Darry Makes a Discovery</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII. <span class="smcap">At Hank Leeson's Cabin</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII. <span class="smcap">The Stealing of the Horses</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX. <span class="smcap">Arrival at the Fort</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X. <span class="smcap">The Result of a Swim</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI. <span class="smcap">Something about Drilling</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII. <span class="smcap">Deer Hunting</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII. <span class="smcap">A Fish and a Snake</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV. <span class="smcap">Over the Mountain Top</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV. <span class="smcap">The Result of a Hurricane</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI. <span class="smcap">Captain Moore's Adventure</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII. <span class="smcap">Three Prisoners</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII. <span class="smcap">Benson Puts Some Men in a Hole</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX. <span class="smcap">Escaping in the Darkness</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX. <span class="smcap">Something about White Ox</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI. <span class="smcap">A Trick of the Enemy</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII. <span class="smcap">In the Hands of the Enemy</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII. <span class="smcap">A Panther in Camp</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV">CHAPTER XXIV. <span class="smcap">The Skirmish in the Brush</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXV">CHAPTER XXV. <span class="smcap">A Lucky Meeting</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI">CHAPTER XXVI. <span class="smcap">The Enemies within the Fort</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII">CHAPTER XXVII. <span class="smcap">Signals and what Followed</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII">CHAPTER XXVIII. <span class="smcap">The Demands of the Enemy</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX">CHAPTER XXIX. <span class="smcap">Opening of the Battle</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXX">CHAPTER XXX. <span class="smcap">Signals in the Dark</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI">CHAPTER XXXI. <span class="smcap">Burning of the Stockade</span></a><br /> +<a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII">CHAPTER XXXII. <span class="smcap">Relief at Last—Conclusion</span></a><br /><br /> +<a href="#BY_THE_SAME_AUTHOR">BY THE SAME AUTHOR</a><br /> +</p> +<!-- End Autogenerated TOC. --> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>List of Illustrations</h2> + + +<p><a href="#illus1">DEFENDING THE FORT.</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus2">"NOW DARRY'S RIFLE SPOKE UP, AND THE BEAR WAS HIT AGAIN"</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus3">"AT LAST HE PUT THE GUNS IN THEIR HANDS AND LET THEM MARCH WITH THE +PIECES."</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus4">"HE LEAPED BETWEEN THEM AND CAUGHT THEIR RIFLES."</a></p> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="PREFACE" id="PREFACE"></a>PREFACE.</h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Boys of the Fort</span>" is a complete story in itself, but forms the fifth +volume of a line of works issued under the general title of "Flag of +Freedom Series."</p> + +<p>In penning this tale I had it in mind to acquaint my young readers with +the ins and outs of military life at one of our Western forts of to-day, +showing what both officers and privates are called upon to do, and what +troubles the Indians and the bad men of that locality are still in the +habit of making. The field is one about which little has been written, +although abounding in interest, and one which is worthy the attention of +all who have the proper development of our country at heart.</p> + +<p>To some, certain scenes in this book may appear overdrawn, yet such is +far from being the case. In this wild territory there are those who have +lived all their lives beyond the pale of civilization, men who grow up +dwarfed and crooked in mind, and who resent every effort made to better +their condition.</p> + +<p>The young captain is a fine specimen of the wide-awake American army +officer, yet he is no more brave and dashing than are thousands of +others, officers and privates, who serve under our Flag of Freedom. He +is trained to do his duty, and he simply does it, regardless of possible +consequences.</p> + +<p>Once more I take this opportunity to thank my young friends for the +kindness with which they have received my former stories, and I +earnestly hope this present tale merits equal commendation.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Captain Ralph Bonehill.</span></p> + +<p><i>July 1, 1901.</i></p> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>BOYS OF THE FORT.</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<h3>BOUND FOR THE FORT.</h3> + + +<p>"How many miles have we still to ride, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"About fifty, Joe. But the last half is pretty much uphill, lad."</p> + +<p>"Can we make the fort by to-morrow night?"</p> + +<p>"Well, we can try," answered the old scout, who sat astride of a +coal-black horse and rode slightly in advance of his two youthful +companions. "It will depend somewhat on what the weather does."</p> + +<p>"Why, do you think it is going to rain?" put in Darry Germain. "I'm sure +it looks clear enough."</p> + +<p>"Aint no telling what the weather will do in this valley," answered Sam +Benson. "It may stay clear for a week, but to me the signs don't exactly +p'int that way," and he shook his head gravely.</p> + +<p>"A little rain wouldn't hurt," said Joe Moore. "A couple of miles back +the road was fearfully dusty."</p> + +<p>"The trouble is, when it rains out here it rains," answered the old +scout. "The clouds come a-tumbling over yonder mountains, and inside of +half an hour you'd fancy the water was going to drown out everything."</p> + +<p>"Then if it rains we'll have to put up somewhere," said Darry Germain.</p> + +<p>"Aint no cabin on this trail short of Hank Leeson's place, twenty miles +this side of the fort. If we can get that far I reckon we can make the +fort."</p> + +<p>"Then where will we stop to-night?" asked Darry with interest.</p> + +<p>"At the Star Hotel—if the sky is clear," said Sam Benson, with a laugh +at what he considered his little joke.</p> + +<p>"You mean in the open, under the stars!" cried the boy; and, as the old +scout nodded, he went on: "That will be nice. I've been wanting to camp +out in regular trapper style ever since we left Riverton."</p> + +<p>"So have I," put in Joe Moore. "But I don't know as I care to camp out +and get soaked."</p> + +<p>"If it rains we'll find some kind of shelter," answered Benson. "But +come, let us make the most of the daylight while it lasts," and he +urged his steed forward, and the two boys did the same.</p> + +<p>The three were pursuing their way along a gap in the Rocky Mountains, +where the so-called valley was broken up by tiny water-courses, walls of +rock, and dense patches of forest and underbrush. It was midsummer, and +the hot air was filled with the scent of green growing things. Deep in +the forest the song-birds sang gayly and the wild animals had full play +to come and go as they pleased, for to get at them in those vast +fastnesses was next to impossible.</p> + +<p>The party of three had left the town of Riverton four days before. They +were bound for Fort Carson,—so named after Kit Carson, the celebrated +scout and Indian fighter,—and Sam Benson carried messages of importance +to Colonel Fairfield, the commandant at the fort.</p> + +<p>Joe Moore and Darry Germain were cousins, and both were boys of sixteen, +well built and well trained in outdoor athletic sports. Joe came from +Chicago and Darry from St. Louis, and each had graduated from his local +high school but a few weeks before.</p> + +<p>It was while Darry was spending a brief vacation with his cousin Joe +that a plan for visiting the fort was formed. Joe's older brother, +William, was a West Point graduate and a captain at the fort, and he +wrote on stating that he had received permission to have Joe visit him, +and Darry could come too if he desired. Colonel Fairfield was an old +friend of both families, and promised to treat the lads well should they +make the trip.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah! just the thing!" Joe had cried. "Of course you'll go, Darry. We +couldn't have a grander outing."</p> + +<p>"I'll go if father and mother will let me," had been Darry's answer, and +he had at once written home concerning the affair. Two weeks later the +boys were off, the parents of each cautioning them to be careful, and +wishing them the best of luck.</p> + +<p>The journey westward as far as the mining-town of Riverton had occurred +without special incident. They had been told to hire a guide at this +point, and while looking for a man had fallen in with Sam Benson. Benson +knew Captain William Moore well, and he at once promised to take the +boys along with him and do the best he could by them.</p> + +<p>"You'll want good hosses," Benson had said, and had aided them in +selecting their animals and in getting together the necessary outfit. +The start was made one fine morning in August, and all three of the +party were in the best of spirits.</p> + +<p>The four days in the mountains had opened the eyes of both lads. The +traveling had been rather hard, yet they had enjoyed every minute of the +journey. They had stopped once to do some fishing, and Benson had +brought down a small mountain deer. At night they had put up at the +cabins of hunters and trappers, and before retiring had listened to +thrilling tales of adventures with wild beasts and with the Indians.</p> + +<p>But now Joe was anxious to get to the fort and see his brother, from +whom he had been separated for nearly two years. Darry was also anxious +to reach the outpost, to meet not only his cousin William, but likewise +Colonel Fairfield, who was an old friend not easily forgotten. Once at +the fort the two boys felt that a vacation full of fun and pleasure +would follow. Never once did they dream of the perils which awaited them +in that wild region, which was not as civilized as it was to become a +handful of years later.</p> + +<p>"It seems to me it is growing hotter," remarked Darry, after riding a +quarter of a mile in silence.</p> + +<p>"It is growing hotter," answered the old scout. "And that makes me more +certain than ever that a storm's at hand."</p> + +<p>"We'll have to take what comes," said Joe. "But I did hope we'd reach +the fort by to-morrow."</p> + +<p>On they went, around a bend of the trail and over some rough rocks, +where the horses had to step with care, for fear of slipping into a +gully on the left. Then they reached a patch of timber and plunged +beneath the low-drooping trees. Here it was both dark and cool, and +Darry breathed a long sigh of relief.</p> + +<p>"How delicious!" he murmured. "It's almost like going into a cave. +Benson, there must be lots of caves in these mountains," he went on +reflectively.</p> + +<p>"There are," answered the old scout. "I've been in a score or more."</p> + +<p>"I should like to explore a big cave," came from Joe. "It would be a +novelty to me."</p> + +<p>"You may get the chance, lad," said Benson; "and get it soon."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean? Are we going to ride by a cave?"</p> + +<p>"There are a dozen or more ahead, and we may have to seek one of 'em for +shelter. Do you hear that?"</p> + +<p>Benson threw back his head to listen, and the two boys did likewise. +From a great distance came the rumble of thunder, echoing and re-echoing +throughout the mountains. To the westward the sun was hidden by a dense +mass of black clouds which grew more ominous each instant.</p> + +<p>"The storm is coming, sure enough," muttered Joe. "What do you propose?"</p> + +<p>"We'll ride on a bit, lad. It won't hit us right away. Come!"</p> + +<p>The horses were urged forward at an increased speed, and soon they +passed the patch of timber and came out to where a thick fringe of brush +skirted a long, high cliff. The sky was now dark on every side, and the +wind was rising with a dull, humming sound.</p> + +<p>"We'll catch it in a few minutes!" cried Benson; and hardly had he +spoken when the big drops came splashing down, hitting the broad leaves +in the underbrush with resounding smacks.</p> + +<p>The old scout continued to lead, and presently he turned to the left, +where the cliff parted. Here was an opening, lined on either side with +rocks and dirt, and a short distance further was the entrance to a cave +of unknown depths.</p> + +<p>"We'll stop here," said the old scout, leaping to the ground, followed +by the boys. "This aint the best place in the world, but it's better +than the open, in such a blow as is coming."</p> + +<p>He was right about the blow—already the wind was rising, and hardly had +the three led their horses into the cave, the entrance to which was over +a dozen feet high, when there came a crashing through the timber left +behind, which sent many a frail limb and sapling to the ground and +carried the leaves and twigs in all directions.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad we didn't stay in the woods!" cried Darry. "We'd be in danger +of falling trees."</p> + +<p>"And lightning too," added Joe. "Oh, my! look at that!" he continued, as +a blinding flash lit up the heavens. "That must have struck somewhere."</p> + +<p>"We'll go back a little," said old Benson. "The lightning is just as bad +here as it is in the woods. Wait till I get a torch."</p> + +<p>Pine was plentiful in that locality, and soon he had a knot which was +full of pitch and which burned well when a match was applied to it. With +the torch in hand, he led the way further into the cave, and the boys +followed with their animals.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<h3>CAVES IN THE MOUNTAIN.</h3> + + +<p>The two boys had expected to find the large cave damp and unwholesome, +and they were surprised when they learned how dry the flooring and the +sides were, and how pure the air was. There was no breeze in the place, +but a gentle draught kept the air stirring. Of course the atmosphere was +much cooler than it had been outside.</p> + +<p>Hardly had the travelers gained the center of the first chamber of the +cave, when the storm outside burst in all its fury. The lightning and +thunder were almost incessant, and the rain came down in broad sheets +which completely obliterated the landscape.</p> + +<p>"It's little short of a flood," said Darry, after having gone to the +mouth of the cave to investigate. "The water is already two or three +inches deep on the trail."</p> + +<p>"Well, such a downpour can't last long," returned Joe. "It's only a +shower, or a cloud-burst."</p> + +<p>"No, it's a regular rain, and it's good for all night," answered the old +scout.</p> + +<p>"All night!"</p> + +<p>"Yes, lad, and we'll be lucky if it don't last through the morning, too. +It don't rain very often out here, you see, but when it does it tries to +make up for lost time."</p> + +<p>"Then we'll have to camp right here, won't we?"</p> + +<p>"To be sure. Even if it did let up, you wouldn't want to camp in the wet +timber."</p> + +<p>"Then we might as well start up a fire," came from Darry, in something +of a disappointed tone. "I was hoping we'd be able to camp under the +stars just once before we got to the fort."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps you'll get a chance to go out after you're at the fort," said +the old scout, by way of comfort. "Yes, we'll start a fire, if we can +find any dry wood."</p> + +<p>The horses were tied up between some rocks, and then the three searched +around. At the entrance to the cave was a mass of brush and tree limbs +which previous storms had sent in that direction, and from this they +gathered enough for a good-sized fire. It did not take long for the +brush to blaze up, sending the sparks to the roof of the cave and +throwing fantastic shadows all about them.</p> + +<p>"I declare, the fire makes the cave look quite home-like!" was Joe's +comment, as he threw himself down on a flat rock with his blanket under +him. "Staying here won't be so humdrum as I anticipated."</p> + +<p>"I'm going to explore the cave, now I am here," returned Darry. "Who +knows but what I might locate a gold mine!"</p> + +<p>"You be careful of where you go," cautioned old Benson. "These caves are +full of pitfalls, and now you two boys are with me I don't want anything +to happen to you. If something did happen, neither Captain Moore nor +Colonel Fairfield would forgive me."</p> + +<p>"To be sure we'll be careful, Benson," answered Darry. "There'd be no +fun in getting hurt—even if we did locate a gold mine."</p> + +<p>"You won't find any gold mine here. This ground was prospected years +ago—before even the fort was located. I came out here once myself, with +a miner named Hooker Brown. Hooker was dead certain there was gold here, +but although we stayed here about two weeks nosing around we never got +even a smell of the yellow metal."</p> + +<p>"Well, we'll have a look around, anyway," said Joe. "But we must get +good torches first."</p> + +<p>Pine knots were procured and lit; and, with another caution from the +scout to be careful, they set off, leaving Benson to care for the horses +and prepare such an evening meal as their stores afforded. Luckily the +scout had brought down half a dozen good-sized birds, and these he now +prepared to broil in true hunter style.</p> + +<p>The front chamber of the cave was somewhat semi-circular, and behind +this were several other irregular apartments, running down to a +passageway which wound in and out between jagged rocks almost impossible +to climb or explore in any manner. At a distance could be heard the +trickling of water, but where this came from, or where it went to, +nobody in the cave could imagine.</p> + +<p>The boys advanced from one opening to another with care, one with his +torch held high, that they might see ahead, and the other with the light +close to the ground, to warn them of a possible pitfall.</p> + +<p>"A regiment of soldiers could quarter in here," observed Darry, as they +pushed on. "What a defense it would make!"</p> + +<p>"An enemy could fire right into the entrance. And, besides, supposing +the enemy started to smoke you out? I can smell the smoke from the +camp-fire away back here."</p> + +<p>At last the two boys reached the passageway back of the rear chamber, +and here came to a halt. The dropping water could be plainly heard, and +Joe flashed his torch in several directions in the hope of catching +sight of the stream.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to climb the rocks," he said, after a pause. "Perhaps there +is another opening behind them."</p> + +<p>"Remember what Benson said, and be careful," cautioned his cousin. +"There is no use in taking a risk for nothing."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I'll be careful," answered Joe, and crawled forward with care. +Darry held his torch as high up as possible, to light the way.</p> + +<p>The youth had advanced a distance of fifty feet when he came to a turn +in the passageway. Here the side walls were not over two yards apart, +while the roof could be touched with ease.</p> + +<p>Thinking the walking better at this point, Joe struck out once more. The +flare from his torch showed him something of a chamber ahead, and the +water sounded closer than ever.</p> + +<p>But hardly had the lad taken a dozen steps when the smooth rock upon +which he was advancing tilted up, sending him headlong. As he went down +the torch was knocked from his hand. Then he slid forward into the +darkness.</p> + +<p>"Help!" he managed to cry. "Help!"</p> + +<p>"What's up?" came from Darry, but the words were drowned out in the +crashing of one stone against another. In the meantime Joe had fallen, +he knew not whither. He landed on some soft ground, turned over and slid +along, and then took a second drop. A stone fell beside him and pinned +his jacket to the ground.</p> + +<p>For the moment the lad was too dazed and bewildered to do anything but +try to get back his breath. Then, as it gradually dawned upon him that +he was not hurt in the least, he endeavored to arise.</p> + +<p>"Fast!" he muttered, and tore his jacket away from under the rock. Then +he turned about, trying to locate his torch. But that was missing, and +all was dark around him.</p> + +<p>"I'm in a pickle now," he thought. "I wish I had taken old Benson's +advice and remained around the camp-fire. But who would have imagined +that big rock would play a fellow such a trick? How in the world am I to +get back again?"</p> + +<p>From a great distance he could hear Darry shouting to him. He tried to +answer his cousin, but whether or not his voice was heard he could not +tell.</p> + +<p>With his hands before him, he moved around, and scarcely had he taken a +dozen steps when he slid down a rocky incline. Here there was water; and +he shivered, thinking he might be dropping into an underground stream +from which there would be no escape. But when a pool was gained it +proved to be but several inches deep.</p> + +<p>As Joe stood in the pool there came a sudden rumble of thunder to his +ears. He listened, and by the sounds became convinced that an opening +into the outer air could not be a great way off. Then came an unexpected +flash of reflected light on the rocks by his side.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah, that light came from outside!" he cried. "I'm not buried alive, +after all. But I may be a good way from daylight yet."</p> + +<p>He had some matches in his box, and lighting one of these he discovered +a passageway below him, running off to his left. Further on he picked up +a bit of dry wood and lit this. It made rather a poor torch, but proved +better than nothing.</p> + +<p>"Now to get out, and then to find my way back to where I left old +Benson," was his mental resolve.</p> + +<p>With extreme caution he stole forward to where the lightning revealed a +distant opening. He did not leave one foothold until he was sure of the +next, for he had no desire to experiment with another moving rock.</p> + +<p>The thunder now reached his ears plainly, and the lightning at times +made the front of the cave as bright as day.</p> + +<p>"It's quite another place," was his thought. "That dangerous passage +connects the two."</p> + +<p>Suddenly, as Joe was advancing, he heard a clatter of horses' hoofs, and +into the cave ahead rode three rough-looking men, all armed with rifles +and pistols and each carrying small saddle-bags across his steed.</p> + +<p>At first Joe thought to call out to the newcomers, but he checked +himself, for their appearance was decidedly against them.</p> + +<p>"I'll try to find out something about them first," he muttered. "Perhaps +they belong to that gang of bad men Benson was telling us about +yesterday." And then, as the three came to a halt in the center of the +outer cave and dismounted, he crept closer, in the shadow of some sharp +rocks, to overhear what they might have to say.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<h3>AN IMPORTANT CONVERSATION.</h3> + + +<p>"Who ever saw such a downpour before?" growled one of the three men, as +he switched the water from his soft felt hat. "I'm wet to the skin."</p> + +<p>"I'm no better off," replied one of the others. "I think we were fools +to leave Macklin's place, Gilroy."</p> + +<p>"Just what I think, Fetter," said the third man. "We could have waited +as well as not."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we could have waited, Potts," answered Matt Gilroy; "but, to tell +the truth, I don't want to trust Macklin too far. He might play us +foul."</p> + +<p>"He wouldn't dare to do that," returned Gus Fetter.</p> + +<p>"Why not—if he thought he would get a reward?" came from Nat Potts, the +youngest of the trio. "One thing is certain, Macklin is crazy to make +money."</p> + +<p>"I know a thing or two of Macklin's past—that's why," went on Gus +Fetter. "If he got us into trouble I wouldn't keep silent about him, and +he knows it."</p> + +<p>"Macklin is slippery, no two ways about it," said Matt Gilroy, as he +took off his jacket and wrung the water out. "I am not inclined to trust +him, and that is all there is to it."</p> + +<p>"Did he ever belong to the old gang?" questioned Nat Potts. "Some say he +did, and some say he didn't."</p> + +<p>"He was a hanger-on, that's all," came from Matt Gilroy. "He was always +afraid to take the chances of being shot, but was on hand when the +spoils were divided. They used him as a messenger and a spy, but I don't +believe he ever really helped to hold up a coach."</p> + +<p>"Humph, then it's a wonder the old crowd had anything to do with him!"</p> + +<p>"Oh, they had to have messengers and spies, and they never gave Macklin +more than was coming to him, you can bet on that! I understand that when +the Riverton coach was held up six years ago, and the gang got +twenty-two thousand dollars, they gave Macklin five hundred, and he was +glad to get that."</p> + +<p>"That was a big haul!" cried Nat Potts enthusiastically. "I wish I had +been in it."</p> + +<p>"The gang was followed for two days—by the soldiers under Colonel +Fairfield," went on Matt Gilroy, as he threw himself on the rocks, +leaving his companions to start up a fire. "They had a hot time of it +over to Bear Pass, I can tell you. Two men were shot, and one of them, +Dan Hickey, my old chum, died from his wounds. They say Colonel +Fairfield himself fired the shot that took poor Hickey in the head, and +if that's so—well, I've got an account to square with the colonel, +that's all."</p> + +<p>"You can square that after we've had our little interview with the +quartermaster," returned Gus Fetter with a hard laugh.</p> + +<p>"That's right—we'll be sure to have the soldiers after us," put in Nat +Potts. "They'll be doubly mad when they learn that the hold-up resulted +in the emptying of the box with their wages."</p> + +<p>"It will be a good haul if it goes through, boys. The quartermaster will +be carrying not less than twelve thousand dollars of the government's +money besides his other stuff," returned Matt Gilroy.</p> + +<p>Here the conversation came to a temporary end, for Nat Potts had +produced a black flask, from which each of the men took a deep draught. +Then Potts and Fetter started in to build a roaring fire at which all +might dry their clothing, leaving Gilroy, the leader of the crowd, to do +as he pleased.</p> + +<p>Joe had listened to the talk with mingled interest and horror. It did +not take him long to realize the truth—that these men were thoroughly +bad, and that they had been mixed up in road robberies of the past and +were contemplating another robbery some time in the future.</p> + +<p>"They mean to rob the quartermaster of the fort, when he is bringing in +the soldiers' wages from Rockspur," he thought. "And that leader is +going to shoot down the colonel if he can. Who would imagine men could +be so bad! And that leader seems to be educated, too!"</p> + +<p>Joe would have been very much surprised had he known the truth, which +was that Matt Gilroy, often called The Shadow, was a college-bred man, +having passed through one of the leading institutes of learning of the +Pacific coast. But, following this college career, Gilroy had forged +checks and committed a burglary, in company with an old chum named +Hickey, and then the two had left Sacramento "between two days." Hickey +had immediately joined the "knights of the road" and been shot down, as +previously mentioned. Gilroy had drifted first to the Mississippi and +then to Denver, and had not gone into the mountains until later. Now he +was at the head of a desperate gang, numbering ten or a dozen, who had +already committed several "hold-ups" of importance.</p> + +<p>Soon the fire was burning brightly, and the three men took off part of +their wearing apparel, that the articles might dry. They had brought +some food with them, and as they sat eating and drinking they continued +to discuss their plans. Nat Potts, who was not over nineteen or twenty, +was evidently something of a new member, and asked many questions +regarding the organization, and as he took in what was told him, so did +Joe, listening with "all ears," as the saying goes.</p> + +<p>"They must be as bad a crowd as can be found anywhere," thought the +youth. "I wonder what they would do with me, if they found out I had +been listening to their talk? Perhaps they'd kill me on the spot." And +he gave a shiver.</p> + +<p>The thunder and lightning had gradually abated, but with the coming of +night the rain continued as steadily as ever. Fortunately for the +desperadoes, however, the rocks sloped away from the entrance to the +cave, so that no water came inside, while the fire made everybody quite +comfortable.</p> + +<p>Hardly knowing what to do, Joe continued behind the rocks, taking care +to remain in the shadow. More than once he was afraid one or another of +the men would start to investigate the surroundings and that he would be +discovered.</p> + +<p>"I wish they would go to sleep," he said to himself. "Then I might get a +chance to slip past them and their horses."</p> + +<p>With great impatience he watched the men finish up their supper, get out +their pipes, and fall to smoking. In the meantime the horses had been +led to the opposite side of the cave and fastened to the rocks.</p> + +<p>As Joe waited for a chance to get away he wondered what Darry and old +Benson were doing. More than likely they were looking for him. But were +they in that other cave, at the narrow passageway, or did the old scout +know of this second cave and the secret entrance to it?</p> + +<p>"If Benson leads the way around to here there may be trouble," he mused. +"It would be better if I could get out and head him off. But if I do get +out, how shall I turn to find the trail we were pursuing? In this +darkness a fellow couldn't see his hand before his face."</p> + +<p>At last Fetter threw himself down on a blanket to rest, leaving Gilroy +and Potts still conversing earnestly by the fire. The two desperadoes +talked in a low tone, so that Joe now caught but little of what was +said.</p> + +<p>The backs of both men were turned toward the side of the cave where Joe +was in hiding; and, plucking up courage, the youth started forward on +tiptoe, bent upon getting out of the cave before the men should make +some move which would expose him.</p> + +<p>Step by step he advanced, until he reached a point where he was within a +dozen feet of Gilroy and almost as close to Potts. He hardly dared to +breathe, and his heart thumped madly beneath his jacket. But the men +continued to smoke and talk, unconscious of his proximity.</p> + +<p>At the entrance to the cave the rocks were somewhat rough and the mist +had made them slippery. Joe was crawling forward rapidly, when one foot +slipped, and he pitched headlong, making considerable noise.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" cried Matt Gilroy, and leaped to his feet. He had been +gazing into the fire, and for the moment could make out little in the +darkness.</p> + +<p>"I don't know," returned Nat Potts. "Something moving around out there, +I think." And the younger man reached for his pistol, which still +remained in his belt.</p> + +<p>As rapidly as he could Joe sprang to his feet. A good bit of his wind +had been knocked out of him, but he felt that he must not delay, and he +ran for the outer air gasping for breath.</p> + +<p>"Hi! stop!" roared Matt Gilroy, catching sight of him at last. "Stop, I +tell you!"</p> + +<p>"A boy!" ejaculated Nat Potts. "He must have been hiding in here!"</p> + +<p>"If he was he overheard too much," growled Gilroy. "Come, we must catch +him by all means," and he ran after Joe, with Potts following.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<h3>LOST IN THE FOREST.</h3> + + +<p>"I must get away from them!"</p> + +<p>This was the one thought which surged through Joe Moore's brain as he +dashed from the cave in the mountain. He felt that if he was captured it +would go hard with him. Did the desperadoes learn that he had overheard +their conversation, they might make his very life pay the forfeit.</p> + +<p>Forward he pitched, into the rain and the inky darkness, not knowing in +what direction and just then caring but little. His one idea was to put +distance between himself and his pursuers.</p> + +<p>"Stop!" he heard the men call, and heard the clicking of a pistol +hammer. Then he reached some brushwood, and, crouching low, continued to +move on. No shot came, for the reason that the desperadoes could not +locate him with certainty.</p> + +<p>At length Joe reached a clump of trees. Had he not had his hands before +him he might have run into them head first. He glided around them, and +then continued onward, down a slope leading into a broad belt of timber. +Still with his hands before him, he advanced through the undergrowth and +between the stately trees for a distance of several hundred feet.</p> + +<p>He was now exhausted with running and with fighting the entangling +vines, and had to halt to catch his breath. As he came to a stop he +listened attentively, to learn if the men were following, but the +downpour of rain drowned out every other sound.</p> + +<p>Soaked to the skin, hatless, and still short of breath, he went on once +more, feeling that he was not yet far enough from the cave for safety. +He tried to steer a course in the direction of the cave where he had +left Darry and the old scout, but whether he was successful or not he +could not tell.</p> + +<p>A hundred yards further and Joe came to another slope, covered with +prairie grass. Down this he rolled in the darkness, to bring up in more +brush below. Then he climbed out of the hollow at the opposite side, +and, reaching a large fallen tree, sat down to rest and think over his +situation. The tree lay partly under one with wide-spreading branches, +so the boy was somewhat sheltered from the storm.</p> + +<p>It must be confessed that Joe's heart sank within him as he reviewed the +situation. Where he was he could not tell, nor could he form any +definite plan for rejoining his cousin and old Benson. More than this, +he was afraid that the desperadoes might come up at any minute and +pounce upon him.</p> + +<p>But as the minutes slipped by, and he neither saw nor heard anything of +those in pursuit, he grew easier. Evidently they had given up the chase.</p> + +<p>"I hope they have," was what he thought. "I never want to get so close +to them again. They are a hard crowd, if ever there was one. If I can +get to the fort and tell Colonel Fairfield of what I've heard, I'll be +doing a good thing."</p> + +<p>An hour went by slowly, and then Joe looked around to find some means of +making himself comfortable for the balance of the night, knowing it +would be useless to pursue his course through the forest in the +darkness.</p> + +<p>"This is camping out with a vengeance!" he muttered grimly. "Darry ought +to be along; I guess he'd soon get enough of it. I'll be lucky if I +don't fall in with some savage animal."</p> + +<p>The thought of wild beasts gave him another shiver, and he concluded to +climb into a nearby tree, which was low-drooping and had a spot where +several branches made a sort of platform. He was soon up in a +comparatively dry place, and here he fell asleep, being too tired to +hold his eyes open longer.</p> + +<p>When Joe awoke the storm had cleared away and the sun was struggling +through the scattering clouds. The forest still dripped with the rain, +and with this dripping were mingled the songs of the birds and the hum +of insects.</p> + +<p>Stiff from the wet, he climbed slowly to the ground and looked around. +On every side were the tall trees and the dense undergrowth, shutting +off the distant view of everything but a towering mountain to the +westward. This was the mountain he and the others had been ascending +when the storm had overtaken them.</p> + +<p>"I suppose I may as well head in that direction," he mused. "If I can +strike the trail that will be something. But I'll have to keep my eyes +open, or I may fall into the hands of that Gilroy gang."</p> + +<p>He was hungry, but there were no means at hand with which to satisfy the +cravings of his stomach, and so he had to move forward without eating.</p> + +<p>Getting into the forest had been difficult, but getting out was even +more of a task. The underbrush at certain points was positively +impassable, and he had to make long detours, which took time and tired +him greatly. At noon he was still in the forest, and the mountain +seemed as far off as ever.</p> + +<p>"I am lost, that is all there is to it!" he burst out with a groan. "I +am lost, and perhaps I'll never get out!"</p> + +<p>The sun shone down directly on his head, and even though still wet he +was glad enough to seek the shelter the stately trees afforded. Here and +there he saw some berries of various hues, but they were strange to him, +and he did not dare touch them for fear of being poisoned.</p> + +<p>Toward the middle of the afternoon he reached a tiny brook, flowing +between the rocks, and here he again rested. He reached the conclusion +that the brook came down from the mountain side and by following it up +he must sooner or later run across the lost trail.</p> + +<p>"I'll follow it, anyway," he told himself, and, hungry and footsore, set +out along the water-course.</p> + +<p>Here the walking was somewhat better, for he had no brushwood and vines +to tear aside. The brook was clear, and he often saw trout and other +fish darting hither and thither. This gave him an idea, and, picking +some berries he had seen, he dropped them in. At once some of the fish +darted forward and swallowed the berries.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah, a good bait!" he cried, and quickly made himself a line out of +threads from his clothing. To this he attached a pin bent into shape +with infinite care. Then he baited with the berries, and dropped the +line in over a rock near a cottonwood.</p> + +<p>Hardly had his bait touched the water when a good-sized fish seized it, +and in a twinkling he had his catch landed. His heart gave a bound, for +here was the material for at least one square meal.</p> + +<p>"I'll cook it right away," he told himself, after feeling to see if he +had any matches. His hunger was beginning to make him desperate, and he +did not much care even if the desperadoes did see his camp-fire.</p> + +<p>With some trouble he got together a few sticks of wood and some moss +which the sunshine had dried out, and soon he had a respectable blaze +between two rocks. With his jackknife he cleaned the fish as best he +could, and then broiled it on a green twig. When done the meat was +slightly burnt on one side and underdone on the other, but to the +half-famished lad nothing had ever tasted sweeter, and he continued to +eat until the whole fish was gone.</p> + +<p>"Now I feel like myself," he muttered, after washing down the repast +with a drink from the brook. "On a pinch that meal ought to last me +until to-morrow noon, and surely I ought to find my way back to the +others by that time."</p> + +<p>With renewed energy he continued his tramp along the brook, often wading +in the water when the brushwood on either side was extra thick. He kept +his eyes and ears on the alert, but no human being came into sight, and +presently a great feeling of loneliness swept over him.</p> + +<p>"I'm alone," he whispered to himself. "Alone! I must say I don't like it +much," and he hurried on faster than ever.</p> + +<p>The sun was shining over the distant mountain when he reached a bend in +the brook and came out upon a rocky trail which crossed the water-course +at a right angle. As he looked at the trail he was tempted to shout with +joy.</p> + +<p>"The place we crossed yesterday morning!" he exclaimed. "There is the +very spot where we got a drink and watered the horses. Now I ought not +to have such a hard time finding the cave."</p> + +<p>He got down and examined the trail closely, hoping to discover some +hoofmarks. But the heavy rain had washed everything clean. Nevertheless, +he felt certain that he was right, and hurried along as fast as his +tired limbs permitted.</p> + +<p>Leaving the brook, the trail wound in and out along a series of rocks +and then through some heavy brushwood and along the edge of a jagged +cliff. The cliff was overgrown with heavy vines, which hung down and +brushed Joe's head as he passed.</p> + +<p>"I can't be more than three or four miles from the cave," thought the +boy. "And if I hurry——"</p> + +<p>He stopped short, and then gave a cry of terror, and with good reason. +He had seen the vines ahead suddenly part, and now there came to view +the shaggy head of a black bear. As soon as the beast caught sight of +the boy he leaped to the trail and advanced upon him.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<h3>THE BIG BLACK BEAR.</h3> + + +<p>Joe had never before met a black bear in the open air, but he had seen +several in menageries and studied them at a safe distance, and he +realized that he was in a perilous position. The bear looked both +untamed and fierce and as if nothing would suit him better than to hug +the lad to death and eat him up afterward.</p> + +<p>Joe did not stand upon the order of his going, but went instantly, +running as fast as his tired limbs would permit. After him came the +bear, and it was astonishing what good time the beast could make +considering his size and his general appearance of clumsiness. Looking +over his shoulder, the lad soon saw that the beast was slowly but surely +lessening the distance between them.</p> + +<p>"Shoo!" he yelled, and waved his arm threateningly, but the bear did not +mind in the least. He trotted on until less than two rods separated boy +and beast. Then Joe reached some underbrush and rocks, with a +low-hanging tree in their midst, and without stopping to think twice he +climbed into the tree and to one of the upper branches.</p> + +<p>Hardly had he reached what he thought might prove a temporary place of +safety when he realized his mistake. The bear came up the tree after +him,—slowly, it is true; but still up,—and this caused Joe's hair to +fairly stand upon end.</p> + +<p>"I'm a gone one now!" he groaned, and then espied another tree growing +not far away. A limb could just be reached, and as the bear almost +gained the boy's foot Joe swung himself from the first tree into the +second.</p> + +<p>As the lad gained a safe spot on the tree limb, the bear, coming to a +halt on the branch opposite, set up a growl of rage and disappointment. +For a minute he surveyed the situation, then came out on the branch +slowly, testing it inch by inch. As it bent down he retreated, letting +out a second growl, louder than the other.</p> + +<p>Joe was wondering if he could drop to the ground and escape in that +manner, when he saw the bear descend and come quickly toward the tree he +was on. He watched the beast closely, and waited until it was close to +him. Then he made a leap back into the tree from which he had originally +come.</p> + +<p>Again the bear came out as far as possible on a limb, and again he let +out a growl of rage and disappointment. In one way the situation was +comical, and Joe might have laughed had he not felt so serious.</p> + +<p>"We can keep this up a long time, I reckon," thought the boy. "And as +long as you don't try to leap after me I'll be safe."</p> + +<p>Finding he could not reach the boy by coming up one tree or the other, +the black bear descended slowly to the ground. Then he walked around +both trees several times, and at last came to a halt between the two. +Here he sank down, as if to rest, but nevertheless kept one eye open and +fixed upon Joe.</p> + +<p>"He's going on guard! He means to keep me treed!" muttered the boy, and +again his heart sank. He remembered a story he had once read, in which a +bear had starved a man to death and eaten him afterward. Would Mr. Bruin +do so in this case?</p> + +<p>He wished he had a pistol, or a hunting-knife, or even a fair-sized +stone. But he had nothing except a thin club, which he had cut for +himself with his jackknife. This he kept in hand, and also kept the +knife open and where he could get at it readily if needed.</p> + +<p>Half an hour went by,—a time that to Joe seemed a whole day,—and +still the black bear remained between the two trees, dozing with one eye +and watching with the other.</p> + +<p>The sight of the beast taking it so easy was maddening under the +circumstances, and at last the youth cut another club and hurled it down +on top of the bear. At once the beast flew up with a roar, and, standing +on his hind legs, snapped his teeth at Joe. Then he flew up the tree +once more, faster than ever before.</p> + +<p>As the bear came up, Joe went higher than before, having seen another +friendly limb over his head. He was sorely tempted to reach for the +beast with his club, but thought best not to run too much of a risk.</p> + +<p>As before, the youth swung to the next tree, and again the bear gave a +growl and went down. Then, being near the top of the tree, the lad took +a good look around.</p> + +<p>In a moment a sight caught his eye which caused his heart to jump with +delight. There on the trail were Darry and old Benson, riding along +slowly.</p> + +<p>"Hi! hi! This way!" he shouted, with all the strength of his lungs. +"This way, Darry! This way, Benson!"</p> + +<p>He saw his cousin and the guide bring their steeds to a halt and gaze +around in wonder. To them the voice appeared to come out of the very +air itself.</p> + +<p>"It's Joe's voice!" exclaimed Darry. "But I must say I don't see him."</p> + +<p>Both gazed around, and at last the scout caught sight of the boy's +handkerchief fluttering among the tree branches.</p> + +<p>"There he is!" he exclaimed. "But what's he doing up there?"</p> + +<p>"This way!" went on Joe, and as they turned in the direction, he added, +"Look out for the bear!"</p> + +<p>"A bear!" came from Darry. "He must be treed!"</p> + +<p>"I reckon you've struck it," muttered Benson, and hastily unslung his +rifle, at which Darry did the same. "Follow me, but be on your guard," +went on the old scout.</p> + +<p>He advanced with caution, his horse lifting his ears sharply as the +neighborhood of the trees was gained. Presently the animal came to a +sudden halt. At the same moment Benson caught sight of the bear.</p> + +<p>"So that's where ye are!" muttered the old scout.</p> + +<p>The bear raised himself on his hind legs and let out a growl at the +newcomers. Hardly had the sound arose upon the air when Benson's rifle +cracked, and a bullet hit the beast in the breast. Down went the animal +on all fours, but did not tumble further. Instead, he made a swift bound +for the scout's horse.</p> + +<p>Crack! It was now Darry's rifle that spoke up, and the bear was hit +again, this time in the right front knee. He dropped, but quickly arose, +shaking the wounded leg in the air and uttering a tremendous roar of +pain and rage.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus2" id="illus2"></a> +<img src="images/illus2.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3>"NOW DARRY'S RIFLE SPOKE UP, AND THE BEAR WAS HIT AGAIN"</h3> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<p>Neither horse would now stand still, and both danced around so lively +that each rider had all he could do to keep his saddle. But even while +his steed pranced in this fashion, old Benson managed to draw his +pistol, and two additional shots rang out, both hitting the bear in the +side. The roars of the beast were now incessant, and the horses +threatened to bolt in spite of all the riders could do to stop them.</p> + +<p>"Come!" cried the old scout, and turned from the scene. Thinking he +meant to go off to reload, Darry followed. But when at a safe distance +Benson sprang to the ground and tied his horse to a tree.</p> + +<p>"I'd rather finish him afoot," explained the old hunter, and slipped +another cartridge into his rifle. "You can stay here if you wish."</p> + +<p>"Not much!" murmured Darry, and came down also. In a minute he was +following the old scout. When they came up a second time they found the +bear crawling around, roaring in a lower tone. Evidently he was more +than half exhausted.</p> + +<p>"Another good shot will finish him," sang out Joe, from a bottom limb of +the tree. "Why don't you give it to him in the ear?"</p> + +<p>"I will," answered the old scout, and circled around, watching his +opportunity. At length it came—the rifle cracked sharply, and Bruin +fell on his side, to rise no more.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah! That's a big haul!" cried Darry, much delighted. "I was wishing +we'd get a bear some time while we were out here."</p> + +<p>"It's lucky the bear didn't get Joe," remarked Benson. "They generally +come up a tree after their victim."</p> + +<p>"I jumped from one tree to the other," answered the youth. "But I had +quite an exciting time, I can assure you."</p> + +<p>"How in the world did you get here?" questioned Darry, as Joe leaped to +the ground. "Did you get through to another cave? Benson thought that +might be the case."</p> + +<p>"That was the case, Darry. And I've had a wonderful adventure, too," +added Joe earnestly. Then he told his story, to which the others +listened with close attention. When he came to mention Gilroy, Fetter, +and Potts, old Benson uttered a low whistle.</p> + +<p>"So that gang has turned up again, eh?" muttered the old scout. "This +will be news to Colonel Fairfield. I reckon he'll be glad to be put on +guard. If the quartermaster was held up it would prove a big loss."</p> + +<p>"Is it true that Colonel Fairfield killed this Gilroy's chum?"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps he did. The colonel was in that mix-up, and after it was over +Dan Hickey was found dead in the bushes. But it was a fair fight, and +the desperadoes knew what to expect when they went in for it."</p> + +<p>"When does the quartermaster expect to come through with the money?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know, Joe. Like as not it will be soon. And that being the +case, we had better not lose time here, but get to the fort just as soon +as we can," concluded the old scout.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<h3>DARRY MAKES A DISCOVERY.</h3> + + +<p>As pressed as they were for time, Darry and Joe begged that the bearskin +be saved, and did all they could toward helping the old scout skin the +beast. With the pelt they took along about twenty pounds of the juiciest +steaks.</p> + +<p>"It's a pity to leave the rest to the wolves!" sighed Joe. "But it can't +be helped. What a feast they will have!"</p> + +<p>"I'm going to sling the beast into a tree," replied old Benson. "That +may help save it until somebody else comes this way. The soldiers from +the fort use the trail yonder, you know."</p> + +<p>Soon they were on the way to where Benson and Darry had left Joe's +horse. As Joe was tired from his night's adventure, his cousin and the +old scout took turns in carrying him behind them. Even then his eyes +would occasionally close.</p> + +<p>"We can't make the fort to-night, that's certain," said the old scout.</p> + +<p>"Not if we pushed on hard?" asked Darry.</p> + +<p>"Joe can't push on as fast as that, Darry. He'll want to rest as soon as +sundown comes."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps I can get a nap at noon, while you two get dinner ready," +suggested Joe. "I wonder if we'll meet those rascals anywhere on the +road? I hope not, for they'd be certain to recognize me."</p> + +<p>"We'll keep an eye open for 'em," responded Benson dryly. "And see to it +that your shooting-irons are ready for use."</p> + +<p>"Why—do you think they'd attack us?" asked Darry quickly.</p> + +<p>"They might—if they thought we were carrying anything of value. To such +desperadoes all are fish that swim near their net."</p> + +<p>"It's a pity the government can't stamp such a gang out, Benson."</p> + +<p>"The government has stamped out lots of 'em, lad. Why, ten years ago +none of these trails was safe. Nearly every horseman and stage-coach was +held up. To-day you don't hear of a hold-up once in six months."</p> + +<p>"Is this Gilroy a very bad man?"</p> + +<p>"He is—in a way. He's a well-educated fellow, so I've been told, and +not as brutal as some. But he's committed some robberies that have no +equal in the history of these parts. Once he painted himself as an +Indian and went to the agency, and there collected a lot of money which +was coming to the redskins, the agent taking him for Chief Snowbird of +the Modocs. The trick wasn't discovered until three days later, when the +real Snowbird turned up. Even then it wasn't known who did the trick."</p> + +<p>"And how was Gilroy found out?"</p> + +<p>"A fellow named Downes, who belonged to the gang, was captured, and he +gave the secret away. But it cost Downes his life, for he got away from +the soldiers, and while he was in the mountains some of his gang shot +and killed him."</p> + +<p>At this story both Joe and Darry shuddered.</p> + +<p>"What a lawless set!" muttered Joe. "One could hardly believe it unless +he saw it with his own eyes."</p> + +<p>"In a rough country the men are bound to be more or less rough, lad. +Look at California, for instance. To-day it's as quiet and orderly as +Massachusetts or Illinois. But in the days of '49 it wasn't that way. +Many a miner was held up for his gold dust, and many a miner's secret of +a rich find was stolen from him and the miner himself murdered."</p> + +<p>"And how long do you think it will take to make this territory perfectly +safe?"</p> + +<p>"There aint no telling about that, but probably when you are as old as I +am now you'll be able to travel anywhere without fear of being stopped. +The railroads are a-coming in, towns are building up, and one of these +days the desperadoes and stage-coach robbers will all be a thing of the +past—and a good job done."</p> + +<p>The third horse had been found, and now Joe was riding in his own +saddle. The rain of the night before had made the trail dustless, and +the air was as pure and sweet as one could wish.</p> + +<p>By noon they calculated that they had covered ten miles of the worst +portion of the distance to the fort. The ride had been a strain to Joe, +and when old Benson called a halt he was glad enough to slip to the +ground and throw himself in the shade of a tree to rest. Darry and the +old scout lit a fire, and soon had a nice steak preparing for dinner.</p> + +<p>"He's asleep," said Darry, a little later, pointing to Joe. "Poor +fellow! supposing we let him rest for a couple of hours? I haven't the +heart to wake him up."</p> + +<p>"All right," answered Benson. The pair ate their dinner without arousing +Joe, and after it was over the scout sat down near at hand to smoke his +stumpy brier-root pipe, filling it with cut-plug which was as black as +coal, and puffing away with keen satisfaction.</p> + +<p>Darry was more restless, and having put away the things used in +preparing the meal he began an inspection of the neighborhood.</p> + +<p>"Be careful," said old Benson, as the youth moved around. "Don't get +into trouble, as Joe did."</p> + +<p>"I'll keep my eyes open," replied Darry.</p> + +<p>Opposite the trail was a tall spur of rocks with something of a series +of natural steps leading to the top. Up these steps went the youth. Some +of the climbing was difficult, but this he did not mind.</p> + +<p>When the top was gained a magnificent panorama was spread out before +him. To one side were the tall mountains, hidden in a bluish mist, to +the other the vast forests and plains. Northward was the continuation of +the gap they were traveling, and southward was a series of foothills, +with here and there a stream or waterfall glinting brightly in the +sunshine.</p> + +<p>"How grand!" he murmured. "What a vast country this is! Thousands upon +thousands of people could live here, and nobody be crowded. This would +make splendid pasture for cows and sheep, and yet there isn't a single +animal in sight."</p> + +<p>Beyond the rocky spur was a similar elevation, and presently Darry +crossed to this. Here there was a lone pine with several low branches, +and he drew himself up and climbed to the top. He could now see much +further than formerly, and his view took in a portion of the trail +passed several hours before, as it wound, serpent-like, between the +foothills.</p> + +<p>"Hullo!" he cried, as he caught sight of something moving on the trail. +"Three people on horseback. Can they be the desperadoes Joe met?"</p> + +<p>He watched the riders with interest, and at last felt certain they were +three men fully armed and wearing slouch hats and light-colored coats. +This description tallied with that given by his cousin, and he hastened +down to acquaint old Benson with the news.</p> + +<p>"Must be the gang," said the scout. "Are they moving this way?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Then we had better move on."</p> + +<p>Joe was awakened, and leaped to his feet, looking rather bewildered.</p> + +<p>"I—I thought I'd take a little nap," he stammered. "I suppose I've +slept a good while, haven't I?"</p> + +<p>"About an hour and a half," answered his cousin. "Here's your dinner," +and he passed it over. "We've got to move on. Those rascals are behind +us."</p> + +<p>"Behind us!"</p> + +<p>"Don't get scared," put in old Benson. "They are a good distance back. +Darry discovered 'em from yonder p'int. Eat what you want, and then it +will be time enough to start."</p> + +<p>The repast was quickly disposed of by Joe, and soon they were in the +saddle once more. The long nap had refreshed the lad greatly, and he +said he would now be able to ride as far as anybody.</p> + +<p>On they went, the trail growing more difficult as the top of the +mountain was gained. Here there was a stiff breeze that at times was +positively cold, and both boys were glad enough to button their jackets +tightly around them.</p> + +<p>If all went well Benson calculated that they could reach Hank Leeson's +place with ease before dark. This was the cabin of an old hunter and +trapper who was known from one end of the Territory to the other. As +mentioned at the beginning of this tale, Leeson's place was twenty miles +from the fort.</p> + +<p>"I could ride right through," said the old scout. "But you boys couldn't +do it. If you tried it, you'd be so sore and stiff the next day you +couldn't stand up."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<h3>AT HANK LEESON'S CABIN.</h3> + + +<p>At first the boys were inclined to think that the old scout was +mistaken—that they could ride as far as anybody. But when, shortly +after sunset, they came within sight of Hank Leeson's place both were +glad to think that they would have to ride no more for the present.</p> + +<p>"I'm sore already," whispered Darry to his cousin.</p> + +<p>"So am I—but I didn't want Benson to know it," was the low answer. +"That last mile of the trail was awfully rough."</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson had seen them coming, and stood at the doorway of his cabin, +rifle in hand. He was a tall, thin man, with black eyes that were +exceedingly sharp and shrewd. When he recognized Sam Benson he dropped +his firearm into a corner and ran to meet the scout.</p> + +<p>"Downright glad ter see ye!" he said, shaking hands. "Sam, yer a sight +fer sore eyes, thet's wot!"</p> + +<p>"And I'm glad to see you, Hank," responded Benson, just as warmly. "How +have things been with you?"</p> + +<p>"Putty slow, to tell the truth." Leeson looked at the boys. "Two +tenderfoots along, I see."</p> + +<p>"Yes. This is Joe Moore, brother to the captain up at the fort, and this +is Darry Germain, his cousin. Boys, this is Hank Leeson, the best +trapper and all-around shot in these parts."</p> + +<p>"Oh, come, don't be a-praisin' me so much!" cried Leeson, as he took the +boys' hands in a grip that made them wince. "As fer shootin', ye kin do +thet yerself as good as anybody, Sam." He looked the boys over. "Glad to +know ye, lads. I know Captain Moore downright well, and he's a good +soldier."</p> + +<p>"I've got news, Hank," put in the old scout. "Joe fell in with Matt +Gilroy's gang down near Buckwater Run."</p> + +<p>"What!" roared the old trapper. "Do you mean to tell me thet measly +crowd is around here ag'in?"</p> + +<p>"Three of 'em are—Gilroy, Fetter, and a young fellow named Potts. I +think Potts comes from Denver."</p> + +<p>"I know him. His father was Ike Potts, the card-sharp. Thet blood is +about as bad as any in the gang. What are they up to?"</p> + +<p>"They are laying a trap for the quartermaster when he comes through with +the soldiers' money. Joe heard part of their talk by accident. Do you +know when the quartermaster is expected?"</p> + +<p>"I do not. Ye see, ever since old Cap'n Bissile was held up the army +officers keep mum about the movements of the cash-box. I reckon they +have orders from Washington to do it."</p> + +<p>"I want to warn Colonel Fairfield as soon as I can," went on the old +scout.</p> + +<p>"Yes, he ought to be warned."</p> + +<p>"Can you lend me a fresh hoss?"</p> + +<p>"I can."</p> + +<p>"Then I'll be off as soon as I've had a bit of supper. The boys can stay +with you all night, can't they?"</p> + +<p>"They can, an' welcome," replied Hank Leeson.</p> + +<p>"You are going to leave us?" queried Joe.</p> + +<p>"Don't see any other way to do, lad. The sooner I get the news to the +fort the better. I'll come back in the morning after you—or send your +brother or somebody else."</p> + +<p>"We can ride it alone, can't we?" questioned Darry.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't try it, if I were you. The trail is a rough one, and there +are several forks where you might go astray."</p> + +<p>"Better stay with me, lads," put in Leeson. "I'll treat ye well, never +fear," and he smiled broadly.</p> + +<p>"Thank you," returned Joe. "I was only thinking I'd like to see my +brother soon, that's all."</p> + +<p>"A few hours more or less won't make much difference," said Darry. He +had looked around the trapper's cabin, and was interested. "Let us +wait." And so it was arranged.</p> + +<p>It did not take long to get a bit of supper, and in less than half an +hour Sam Benson was off, astride of a powerful steed which had been Hank +Leeson's pride for years.</p> + +<p>"Jest tell him to go to the fort," said Leeson, "and he'll carry ye thar +with his eyes shet," and he gave a parting salute to the old scout.</p> + +<p>The cabin was a primitive affair of rough logs, with the chinks filled +with dried clay. It contained two rooms, each about twelve feet square. +Back of the cabin was a lean-to where Leeson kept his horses, two in +number. There was room for more animals, so the beasts ridden by our +friends were easily accommodated.</p> + +<p>Night had fallen by the time the horses had been rubbed down and fed and +the boys had finished their evening repast, and it was dark when they +gathered around the doorstep to rest. Hank Leeson sat on a +chopping-block, cleaning his rifle and smoking at the same time, and as +the three rested Joe told of his adventure in the cave, and Darry took +up the tale of the bear.</p> + +<p>"You had a lucky escape, lad," said the trapper. "A lucky escape, an' no +error. Like as not them desperadoes would have killed ye, had they +caught ye."</p> + +<p>"I've been thinking—do you imagine they'll come here to-night?" asked +Darry.</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson shook his head.</p> + +<p>"Don't allow as they will. About a year ago I gave thet Fetter fair +warnin' if he showed his face about my cabin I'd plug him full o' holes, +an' I sent Gilroy the same message. They know me, an' know I won't stand +any nonsense. They'll be likely to give me a wide berth. They know I +aint got much worth stealin'."</p> + +<p>"Then we ought to be safe until the soldiers get the news."</p> + +<p>"Reckon you will be, lad," answered the trapper.</p> + +<p>He was very much of a quaint character, and for two hours the boys sat +up, listening to his tales of encounters with wild animals, desperadoes, +and Indians.</p> + +<p>"I've had my own little fun with b'ars," he said. "Got in a tree onct, +and a b'ar kept me there fer a whole day. I had wounded him in the leg, +and in running over a brook I dropped my gun."</p> + +<p>"How did you get away?" asked Darry.</p> + +<p>"I didn't know what to do fust. The b'ar had me foul, and kept right at +the bottom of the tree all the time. With his wounded leg he couldn't +come up, and I didn't dare to go down, and there we was—a-lookin' at +each other, he a-growlin' and I a-sayin' all kind o' unpleasant things +about him."</p> + +<p>"Didn't you have a pistol?"</p> + +<p>"No, all I had with me at the time was a powder-horn, a matchbox, and my +pocket-knife. What to do I didn't know, and I was a-thinkin' I'd be +starved out, when a thought struck me to blow him up with powder."</p> + +<p>"Blow him up!" cried both boys.</p> + +<p>"Thet's wot, lads—blow him up. I had a handkerchief, ye see, an' into +this I dumped 'bout half my powder, an' into the powder I put three +matches, with the ends pointing out. Then I tied powder an' matches into +a hard lump and watched my chance. There was a flat rock near the roots +of the tree, and putty soon Mr. B'ar squatted on this rock. Then I let +drive fer the rock, an' the powder an' matches landed good an' hard, I +can tell ye."</p> + +<p>"And exploded?" put in Joe eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Yes, exploded with a noise ye could hear 'most a mile, I calkerlate. +The powder flashed straight up into thet ba'r's face, blindin' him and +tearing his jaw half off, and the way he ran to save himself was a +caution. As soon as he was gone I dropped down and ran for my gun. Then +I made after the b'ar and caught him between the rocks and finished +him."</p> + +<p>This was the last story told that night, and soon after the tale was +concluded Leeson showed the boys into the inner room of the cabin, where +there was something of a rough bed with a straw mattress.</p> + +<p>"Make yerselves ter hum," he said. "It aint no hotel, but it's the best +I've got to offer ye."</p> + +<p>"But we don't want to turn you out," said Darry.</p> + +<p>"I'll make myself comfortable near the door," answered Leeson. "I want +to sleep with one eye open—in case those rascals should take a notion +to come this way."</p> + +<p>The boys were glad enough to rest indoors again and take off the +clothing they had worn during the storm.</p> + +<p>"Camping out is well enough," declared Joe; "but I don't want too much +of it."</p> + +<p>"Oh, we've seen the worst side of it," returned Darry. "I expect lots +of good times when we get to the fort."</p> + +<p>"Oh, so do I, for the matter of that."</p> + +<p>After turning in it did not take long for the cousins to get to sleep, +and a little while later Hank Leeson also threw himself down to rest. +But the old trapper remained close to the doorstep, and slept with his +rifle near at hand.</p> + +<p>An hour went by, and the darkness and silence continued. There was no +moon, and only a few stars were visible. At a distance a few night birds +were calling, and occasionally the howl of some lonely wolf could be +heard, but that was all.</p> + +<p>At last from out of the darkness of the trail came three men on foot. +They were Matt Gilroy and his companions. They had tethered their horses +in the bushes some distance away. They stole toward the cabin like so +many grim and silent shadows.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE STEALING OF THE HORSES.</h3> + + +<p>"Go slow, men," came softly from Gilroy. "You know what kind of a man +Leeson is."</p> + +<p>"Reckon I do know," came in a growl from Fetter. "And I've got an +account to settle with him, too."</p> + +<p>"I'm pretty certain the boy is here," went on the leader. "But we must +make sure if the others are here too, or if they have ridden off to the +fort. If they have gone to the fort——"</p> + +<p>"Hist!" came in warning from Potts. "You're talking too much. I've heard +that this Leeson sleeps with his ears wide open."</p> + +<p>"He does," grumbled Fetter; and then the three desperadoes relapsed into +silence.</p> + +<p>They were advancing upon the cabin from the rear, and each held a ready +pistol in his hand, while his rifle was slung over his back. They had +seen the boys and Benson head for the trapper's home while it was still +light and they were on a high cliff; but darkness had closed in on the +scene, and they had come up to the spot in ignorance of what had +followed.</p> + +<p>Tiptoeing their way they reached the lean-to where the horses had been +stabled, and with caution Gilroy went inside. By feeling the animals he +soon learned that three had been in use but a few hours before, while +the fourth was cool and comfortable.</p> + +<p>"Their horses are here," he announced. "And a fourth is here, too."</p> + +<p>"That's Leeson's," answered Fetter. "But I thought he had two or three."</p> + +<p>"Might as well take them while we have the chance," murmured Potts. +"Four nags will bring some money over at Highwater. We can get Gingo to +sell 'em."</p> + +<p>"Let them out," answered Gilroy. "Without horses they'll have their +hands full trying to follow us."</p> + +<p>It was no easy task to untie the horses in a place that was pitch-dark, +and it took some time to get even the horses belonging to our friends +released.</p> + +<p>As Fetter and Potts took the animals out, Gilroy worked to untie the +sturdy mare belonging to Hank Leeson. This was a pet animal, and not +used to strangers. As Gilroy caught hold of the halter she gave a neigh +of suspicion.</p> + +<p>"Hush!" murmured the desperado, and ran his hand down the mare's nose. +But this made her skittish, and she stamped sharply half a dozen times.</p> + +<p>"What's up thar?" came in Hank Leeson's voice, and the trapper was wide +awake on the instant. "Whoa, Nancy, whoa!"</p> + +<p>"Hang the luck!" muttered Gilroy, and ran outside after Fetter and +Potts. "He must have been on the watch."</p> + +<p>"We must get out!" responded Fetter. "He's a sure-shot, remember. +Nothing but the darkness can save us."</p> + +<p>"I'm going!" came from Potts, and he leaped on the back of one of the +horses—that which Joe had been riding.</p> + +<p>"I'm with you," said Fetter, and mounted old Benson's steed. "Come, +Matt, and be quick about it."</p> + +<p>By this time Hank Leeson was running around the corner of the cabin, gun +in hand. His call had aroused Joe and Darry, and they were pulling on +their clothing with all speed.</p> + +<p>"Something is wrong!" exclaimed Joe.</p> + +<p>"It must be those desperadoes," responded his cousin.</p> + +<p>The boys were not yet dressed, when they heard a clatter of hoofs and a +shot, followed by another.</p> + +<p>Then they came out, rifles in hand, to find Leeson reloading near the +stable.</p> + +<p>"Those desperadoes have been here!" exclaimed the old trapper. "They ran +off with your hosses, consarn 'em!"</p> + +<p>"Went off with the horses?" repeated Darry. "Did you shoot at them?"</p> + +<p>"I did, but the light's against me, and I don't reckon as how I hit +anything." Hank Leeson meditated for a moment. "I've half a mind ter do +it—yes, I have!" he muttered.</p> + +<p>"Do what?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"Go after 'em on my mare. Would you be afraid to stay here alone if I +went?"</p> + +<p>"No; go ahead!" cried both boys.</p> + +<p>"We'll keep watch while you are away," continued Joe.</p> + +<p>"If you can get the horses back it will be a great favor," said Darry. +"The three are worth over five hundred dollars."</p> + +<p>Without further words, Hank Leeson dashed into the stable, untied his +mare and mounted her. Rifle over shoulder and pistol in hand, he dashed +away on the back trail, whence the desperadoes had disappeared. Soon he +was swallowed up in the darkness, although they heard the hoofbeats of +Nancy for several minutes after.</p> + +<p>"This is the worst yet," was Joe's comment, when they were alone. +"Those fellows are as daring as they are rascally. I never dreamed they +would come up in that fashion. I wonder what they would have done if +Leeson hadn't woke up?"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we would all have been murdered," answered his cousin with a +shudder. "What shall we do, now we are dressed?"</p> + +<p>"That depends upon how long Leeson remains away. I move we remain on +guard—one at the front of the cabin and the other at the rear. If we +keep our eyes peeled they can't come very close, even though it is +dark."</p> + +<p>"All right, Joe. Keep your rifle handy."</p> + +<p>"Don't fear about that, Darry."</p> + +<p>They were soon on guard, the one on the doorstep and the other near the +lean-to, on a stump. Thus an hour dragged by. To both it was an +unusually long while.</p> + +<p>"I don't see a thing," said Darry, coming to where his cousin rested.</p> + +<p>"Nor I, and I'm getting sleepy. I hardly think Leeson will be back until +morning."</p> + +<p>"Just what I was thinking. Let us take turns at watching. The one on +duty can walk around the cabin now and then, and that will give each of +us some sleep."</p> + +<p>This was agreed upon, and they tossed up to see who should go on guard +first. It fell to Darry's lot, and Joe, hardly able to keep his eyes +open, quickly retired, without undressing.</p> + +<p>Darry's vigil was certainly a lonely one, doubly so because it was new +to him. As he tramped slowly around the cabin, he could not help but +contrast this situation with the one he was used to at home.</p> + +<p>"I don't know as I'd like to be a night policeman or a night-watchman," +he reasoned. "They must be awfully tiresome jobs. And the city isn't +near as lonely as this, either, even in the middle of the night." He +drew a long breath and looked at his watch. "Gracious, only +three-quarters of an hour gone, and I've got an hour and a quarter still +to serve! How awfully slow it is! If Leeson——What's that?"</p> + +<p>He broke off short and came to a halt, with his rifle in his hands and +his gaze fixed on some brushwood a hundred feet to the rear of the +stable. He had seen some dark object moving, but whether it was man or +beast he could not tell.</p> + +<p>"It was something, I'm sure of that," he told himself, after the object +had disappeared from view. "If it was a man he must have been crawling +on hands and knees."</p> + +<p>He wondered if he had better awaken Joe, but hesitated, knowing how +sleepy his cousin was. Perhaps the object would go away—if it was a +wild beast.</p> + +<p>Keeping his eyes on the spot, Darry waited what seemed to him a long +time, but which was really but a few minutes. Then slowly the bushes +parted and the object came forth, with eyes that gleamed fitfully even +in that darkness.</p> + +<p>"A mountain wolf!" muttered the boy. "Well, I'm glad it isn't one of +those desperadoes."</p> + +<p>Taking up a stone he hurled it at the wolf, at the same time shouting to +the beast to go away. At once the wolf turned tail and disappeared +whence it had come.</p> + +<p>"Did you call?" came sleepily from Joe.</p> + +<p>"There's a wolf in the bushes back of the cabin," returned Darry.</p> + +<p>"Does he want to attack you?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know. I just threw a stone at him, and he's slunk out of +sight."</p> + +<p>By this time Joe was also outside, and the two cousins waited for the +reappearance of the wolf.</p> + +<p>But the animal was cowardly, and did not show himself again, and +presently Joe returned to bed. The remainder of the night passed without +anything unusual happening.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<h3>ARRIVAL AT THE FORT.</h3> + + +<p>The morning found the two boys still alone. The sun was well up over the +eastern prairie before both were dressed, for they had taken turns at +guarding, as agreed, and each had consequently lost half his regular +sleeping time.</p> + +<p>"Well, what's to do now?" questioned Darry, while they were stirring +around getting breakfast.</p> + +<p>"I don't know of anything to do but to wait here until we hear from +Benson and Hank Leeson," answered his cousin.</p> + +<p>Breakfast was soon disposed of, and then they sat down to wait, still +keeping their firearms close to hand, in case of unexpected attack. The +meeting with the desperadoes had opened the boys' eyes, and they did not +intend to be caught "napping" no matter what else happened.</p> + +<p>Shortly before ten o'clock Joe espied three horsemen coming down the +trail which led to the fort. Both watched the approaching riders with +interest, and presently saw that they were soldiers. One wore the +uniform of a lieutenant, and the others were privates.</p> + +<p>"You are from the fort?" cried Joe, running forward to meet them.</p> + +<p>"Yes," was the answer from the lieutenant. "Which of you is Joseph +Moore?"</p> + +<p>"I am."</p> + +<p>"I am glad to know you, Moore. Your brother, the captain, and I are +great friends. I am Lieutenant Richard Carrol."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I've heard of you," answered Joe, smiling. "Will has often +mentioned his chum, Dick Carrol, in his letters. This is my cousin, +Darry Germain. Did old Benson reach the fort last night?"</p> + +<p>"He did," answered Lieutenant Carrol, as he shook hands with both boys. +"And your brother and a detachment of Company A have gone out to look +for Matt Gilroy and his gang. Benson went with them, and I was asked to +come down here and escort you to the fort."</p> + +<p>"If my brother wants to round up Gilroy's gang he should have come +here," said Joe. "The rascals were here last night and stole our three +horses."</p> + +<p>"Is it possible! And where is Hank Leeson?"</p> + +<p>"He went after them on his horse, the only one they didn't get. We are +looking for his return at any moment. We promised to watch the cabin +until he got back."</p> + +<p>"I see." The lieutenant turned to the privates. "Men, you may dismount +and tie up the horses for the present. We won't be going back just yet."</p> + +<p>Lieutenant Carrol leaped to the ground, and one of the privates took +charge of his steed. The young officer was a handsome fellow, with a +smiling face, and both Joe and Darry took to him at once.</p> + +<p>"Yes, Captain Moore and I are great friends," he said. "You see, we went +through West Point together, and we have been more or less together ever +since. He has often told me about you two fellows, so I feel as if I've +known you for a long while." He looked at Joe. "You must have had quite +an adventure with those desperadoes at the cave."</p> + +<p>"I did have," answered Joe. "I hope my brother and the others round them +up. Do you know if they came anywhere near here?"</p> + +<p>"No, they struck off on another trail—the one the quartermaster is +expected to use. You see, he is to come in to-morrow with that money."</p> + +<p>"To-morrow! Then they'll have time to warn him."</p> + +<p>"That depends upon circumstances. The quartermaster is an odd sort of a +fellow, and sometimes changes his mind about routes. He may come in the +way we expect, and he may take some entirely different trail."</p> + +<p>"We can't say when Leeson will be back," put in Darry. "But it seems to +me it is our duty to stay here until he returns; don't you think so, +Joe?"</p> + +<p>"I do, Darry. But he will probably be back before long."</p> + +<p>It was only a few minutes later when one of the privates came forward +with the information that a man was coming through the underbrush +skirting the timber. It was Hank Leeson, and he held his mare to a walk, +for Nancy was all but exhausted.</p> + +<p>"Mornin', lieutenant!" he called out, as he drew closer and saluted. +"Come for them boys, I reckon."</p> + +<p>"I did, Leeson. They tell me you've been after the gang. What luck?"</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson shook his head dubiously. "Reckon I didn't have any luck, +lieutenant. Got one shot, but if I hit it didn't count much. They had +the best o' me in the timber, and they got away, not only with the +hosses belonging to the boys an' Benson, but likewise with their own, +which they had tethered in a hollow not far away."</p> + +<p>"Then our horses are gone!" cried Darry, his face falling.</p> + +<p>"Thet's it, lad. I'm sorry, but I did my best."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I don't blame you, Leeson. But—but if we haven't any horses, how +are we to get to the fort?"</p> + +<p>"We'll take turns at carrying you," replied Lieutenant Carrol.</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson was as worn out as his mare, and while one of the soldiers +cared for Nancy the old trapper sank down on his doorstep and told his +story. He had followed the desperadoes up hill and down for fifteen +miles, and gotten one shot at Fetter, which, he believed, had struck the +rascal in the arm. But the party had turned on the trail while passing +through a wide patch of timberland, and on coming out at the other side +he had been unable to locate them again. Then, as it was almost morning, +he had thought best to return to his cabin, to ascertain how the boys +were faring.</p> + +<p>"Which road were they near when you saw them last?" asked Lieutenant +Carrol.</p> + +<p>"Over at Hunkwater's Rock," answered Leeson. "Moving toward the Knob."</p> + +<p>"Humph! Then I am afraid Captain Moore won't round them up very +quickly."</p> + +<p>"My brother didn't go near that trail?" questioned Joe.</p> + +<p>"No, he's on a trail three miles further north. Still, the desperadoes +may turn north."</p> + +<p>"That's so," said Leeson.</p> + +<p>As there was nothing to keep them at the cabin, the boys were now +anxious to move on to the fort, and a short while later Lieutenant +Carrol set off. One private carried Joe and the other Darry; and, as the +horses were powerful beasts, good progress was made.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah! The fort!" cried Joe, as he caught sight of a large flag waving +in the distance. He was right; and soon they could see the tall stockade +quite plainly. It was three hundred feet long by two hundred feet wide, +and surrounded by a ditch twelve feet deep. Inside of the stockade were +the fort proper and a dozen other buildings, including the officers' +quarters, the men's quarters, the messroom, hospital, and the gymnasium, +and also a good-sized stable.</p> + +<p>"Why, it's a regular town in itself!" murmured Darry, when they got +inside.</p> + +<p>"That's right, a town of exactly two hundred and seventy-five people," +answered the lieutenant. "And of that number two hundred and sixty are +soldiers belonging to three companies, three are officers' wives, two +are Indian scouts, and the rest are cooks and other helpers."</p> + +<p>Colonel Fairfield, a tall, dignified old officer, had been told of +their approach, and now came from the officers' quarters to meet them.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to see you, boys," he said, as he shook hands warmly. "If the +story Benson told is true you have had quite a few adventures in +reaching here. I am sorry your brother is not here to meet you, Joseph; +but he was anxious to go after the Gilroy gang, and I let him have his +way."</p> + +<p>"You haven't heard about all of our adventures, colonel," said Darry, +and told of the stolen horses.</p> + +<p>"Worse and worse!" returned the colonel, stroking his mustache +thoughtfully. "That proves that the gang—or what is left of it—is as +desperate as ever. Those fellows will never give up until they are +either arrested or shot down."</p> + +<p>"I hope my brother doesn't get into trouble with them," said Joe +anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Well, a soldier has to take some risks, my boy. But Captain Moore is as +shrewd as he is brave, so you need not fear for his safety. Come right +in; Mrs. Fairfield will be glad to see you. She wants to hear from all +the folks at home."</p> + +<p>The boys followed the old officer into the quarters, and here received +an equally warm greeting from Mrs. Fairfield, whom they had met in +Chicago. Dinner was soon served, and while the lads were satisfying the +inner man they had to tell their whole story over again, and also tell +all the news from home.</p> + +<p>"While you are here, boys, you must make yourselves perfectly at ease," +said the colonel. "I know your fathers will expect me to be a father to +you. As for Captain Moore, I will allow him to be with you as much as +military discipline permits."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<h3>THE RESULT OF A SWIM.</h3> + + +<p>To the boys, who had never visited a military quarters before, the fort +proved of great interest, and they were glad, after the meal was over, +to have Lieutenant Carrol take them around. This occupied some time, and +when they had finished it was time for the evening parade.</p> + +<p>This was quite an affair, and the two lads joined the ladies of the +place to witness it. Everybody turned out, in uniform as clean as +possible, on inspection. The drums rolled, the fifers struck up a lively +air, and the three companies, headed by a major, marched around the +stockade several times and then to the parade-ground in front of the +gates. Here the command went through the manual of arms and through a +number of fancy evolutions.</p> + +<p>"It's splendid!" murmured Joe. "Everything moves like clockwork."</p> + +<p>"It makes me almost wish to be a soldier," answered Darry. "But if a +fellow had this day in and day out I am afraid he would grow tired of +it."</p> + +<p>"You are right, Darry," said Mrs. Fairfield. "The colonel has to think +up a great number of things whereby to interest his men. They get up all +sorts of contests, and concerts and theatricals, and go hunting when +they can get the chance—anything to keep them from growing too dull."</p> + +<p>"Have they had any real military duty to do lately?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"Not for over a year. Then the Modoc Indians got up a sun-dance, and +they had to march over to Kedahmina and stop it. Two Indians were killed +and one soldier was badly wounded. Since that time the Indians have been +quiet."</p> + +<p>"But the Indians may rise again."</p> + +<p>"Probably they will—one is never sure of them. As one old general has +said, 'The only safe Indian is the dead Indian.'"</p> + +<p>The boys were assigned to a small room next to that occupied by Captain +Moore and Lieutenant Carrol. The apartment was neatly furnished with +iron cots, an iron washstand, and a small wardrobe for extra clothing. +Fortunately the extra clothing they had carried had not been stolen, so +they were not as bad off as they would otherwise have been.</p> + +<p>Joe was anxious to hear from his brother Will, but had to be patient. +Yet he was not greatly worried, for he was almost certain that the +soldiers would fail to fall in with the desperadoes, each having taken a +different trail.</p> + +<p>The day following their arrival the boys fell in with several soldiers +who were going fishing up a mountain stream not far away, having +obtained special leave of absence for that purpose. The soldiers, who +were named Biggs, Ferry, and Lambert, were glad enough to have the boys +for company.</p> + +<p>"We'll show you some good sport," said Lambert, who proved to be +something of a leader. "No better fish in these parts than those you can +catch in Rocky Pass River."</p> + +<p>The boys had no fishing-tackle, but Lieutenant Carrol fitted them out, +and soon the party was on the way. The soldiers were to be gone but four +hours, and so struck out at a gait that taxed Joe and Darry to the +utmost to keep up with them.</p> + +<p>"It's the air does it," explained Biggs, when Darry spoke about the +speed. "After you've been out here a while you'll eat like a horse and +feel like walking ten miles every morning before breakfast. I tell you, +the air is wonderful."</p> + +<p>"It certainly is bracing," answered Darry. "I noticed that as soon as we +began to climb the foothills."</p> + +<p>A walk of half an hour brought them to Rocky Pass River, and they +journeyed along the bank until they came to a favorite fishing-hole.</p> + +<p>"Here we are," said Lambert. "Now for the first fish!"</p> + +<p>"Ten cents to whoever catches it!" cried Joe, and placed a shining dime +on a nearby tree stump. At this the three soldiers laughed.</p> + +<p>"That dime is mine," declared Ferry, who was the first to throw in.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," answered Biggs. "But I reckon I've got just as good a chance +now."</p> + +<p>"Here I come," put in Lambert, and threw over his friends' heads. Hardly +had his bait gone down than he felt a tug and whipped in a little fish +not over six inches long.</p> + +<p>"Mine!" he cried.</p> + +<p>"It isn't worth ten cents!" cried Biggs and Ferry; nevertheless Lambert +pocketed the coin, amid a general laughing.</p> + +<p>The boys now went to a spot a little above where the soldiers were +fishing, and set to work on their own lines. Just as Ferry announced a +fine haul, they threw in, and soon everybody in the party was busy, +bringing in several kinds of fish, big and little, including some fine +trout of a variety the boys had not before seen.</p> + +<p>Inside of an hour everybody had all the fish he wanted, and then the +soldiers said they were going to take a swim. The boys were willing, and +soon the whole crowd were in the water, calling out and laughing and +having a good time generally.</p> + +<p>"Don't go too far down the stream," cautioned Lambert. "The falls are +below, and you might get caught in the rapids."</p> + +<p>"All right, we'll surely remember," answered Joe.</p> + +<p>"I'll race you across the river and back," said Darry, a little later.</p> + +<p>"Done!" cried Joe. "To what point?"</p> + +<p>"To that willow hanging down near the big rock."</p> + +<p>So it was agreed, and in a minute both boys were off. They were good +swimmers, and the race interested the soldiers, so that they gave up +sporting around to watch the result.</p> + +<p>At this point the stream widened out to nearly two hundred feet, so the +race was not a particularly short one. The water ran quite swiftly, and +they soon found they had to swim partly up stream to prevent being +carried below the willow.</p> + +<p>Darry made the mark first, and, touching the willow, started on the +return. Joe was close behind, and now it became a neck-and-neck race +between them.</p> + +<p>"Go it, boys!" shouted Lambert. "Do your best!"</p> + +<p>"I bet on Joe," said Ferry.</p> + +<p>"I bet on Darry," added Biggs.</p> + +<p>Hardly had the wager been made when Joe shot ahead. Slowly but surely he +drew away from his cousin.</p> + +<p>While the sport was going on nobody had noticed a large tree that was +drifting rapidly down the middle of the river. Now, however, Lambert saw +the danger.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" he cried wildly. "Look out! A tree is coming down upon you!"</p> + +<p>Joe heard the cry, and looking up the stream managed to get out of the +way of the big piece of driftwood. But Darry was not so fortunate, and +in a twinkling the youth was struck and carried out of sight.</p> + +<p>This accident came so quickly that for the moment nobody knew what to +do.</p> + +<p>"Darry! Darry!" cried Joe. "Where are you?"</p> + +<p>"He went under!" shouted Lambert. "The tree branches struck him on the +head."</p> + +<p>"He'll be drowned!" gasped Biggs. "What shall we do?"</p> + +<p>By this time the tree had drifted past the point where the soldiers were +stationed. Joe had now struck bottom with his feet, and at once went +ashore.</p> + +<p>"We must do something!" he panted. "We can't let Darry be drowned!"</p> + +<p>"He must be caught under the branches," said Lambert. "As the tree hit +him it turned partly over. Perhaps——There is his foot!"</p> + +<p>He pointed to the tree—and there, sure enough, was Darry's left foot, +kicking wildly above the surface of the river. Then the boy's head came +up, but only for a moment.</p> + +<p>"Save me!" he spluttered, and immediately disappeared.</p> + +<p>"This is awful!" groaned Joe. "Can't we throw a fishing-line over the +tree and haul it ashore?"</p> + +<p>"A good idea!" answered Lambert. "We'll take two lines."</p> + +<p>He caught up the fishing-tackle, and lines in hand ran along the river +bank until he was below the tree. The others followed, and helped him to +get the lines into shape. Then a quick cast was made, but the lines fell +short.</p> + +<p>"Too bad!" came from Joe. "Quick, try once more!"</p> + +<p>"The tree is turning over again!" shouted Biggs, and he was right. As +some other branches came into view, they beheld Darry, caught in a +crotch and held there as if in a vise.</p> + +<p>Another cast was made, and then a third, but all in vain. Then the tree, +with its helpless victim, moved forward more rapidly than ever, in the +direction of the roaring falls, which were but a short distance off.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<h3>SOMETHING ABOUT DRILLING.</h3> + + +<p>"Darry is lost! Nothing can save him now!"</p> + +<p>Such was the agonizing thought which rushed through Joe's brain as he +watched the progress of the drifting tree as it moved swiftly toward the +falls of Rocky Pass River.</p> + +<p>He knew the falls to be over thirty feet high. At the bottom was a +boiling pool which sent up a continual shower of spray. Nobody entering +that pool could survive.</p> + +<p>Darry, too, realized his peril, and continued to call for help. Had he +been able to loosen himself he would have leaped into the water, but he +was weak and helpless, and his voice could scarcely be heard above the +rushing of the rapids.</p> + +<p>Joe and the three soldiers continued to run along the river bank, over +rough rocks that cut their feet and through bushes which scratched them +in scores of places. At last they came out on a point directly above the +falls.</p> + +<p>The tree still spun on, and Joe closed his eyes to shut out the sight of +what was to follow.</p> + +<p>Suddenly Lambert let out a shout:</p> + +<p>"The tree is caught! It has stopped moving!"</p> + +<p>Again Joe looked, and he saw that what the soldier said was true. The +under branches of the drifting tree had hit some sharp rocks below the +river's surface, and one branch had wedged itself fast.</p> + +<p>This catching of the driftwood bent down the limb that held Darry, and +soon they saw that the imperiled boy was free from the grip which had +held him. But what to do next the lad did not know. To swim to the shore +was out of the question.</p> + +<p>"I—I can't make it," he told himself, as he panted for breath. He was +so exhausted that he felt very much like fainting away. But he knew he +must keep his senses, or all would be over with him.</p> + +<p>"Darry! Darry! Are you much hurt?" called out Joe.</p> + +<p>"Not much, but I—I can't—swim—ashore!" was the gasped out answer.</p> + +<p>"I'll try the fishing lines again," said Lambert, and prepared them once +more. A first cast did not reach Darry, but a second did, and he caught +the sinkers to the lines with a good deal of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"Will they hold?" questioned Joe.</p> + +<p>"I hope so," answered Lambert. "Anyway, it's the best we can do."</p> + +<p>Letting the lines run out as far as possible, the soldiers and Joe moved +up the bank of the stream to where there was a series of rocks +projecting into the water a distance of several yards.</p> + +<p>"Now brace me, and I will haul in," said Lambert. Then he called to +Darry to help them by swimming as well as he was able, with the lines +caught around him, under the arms.</p> + +<p>"All right, I'm ready!" cried the boy, and dropped into the stream, +taking care to steer clear of the tree.</p> + +<p>Lambert hauled in slowly but steadily. The line straightened out and +became taut, and looked as if it might snap at any instant. Joe's heart +came up into his throat, and he breathed a silent prayer that his cousin +might be saved.</p> + +<p>"Here he comes!" muttered Lambert at length, and they could see that +Darry's feet at last rested on the sandy bottom of the river. They +continued to haul in, and soon he was safe. When on shore he pitched +himself on the grass, completely exhausted.</p> + +<p>"Oh, how glad I am!" cried Joe, as he knelt beside his cousin. "I was +almost certain you'd be drowned!"</p> + +<p>"It was a narrow escape!" answered Dairy, when he could speak. "When the +tree first struck me I was almost stunned, and when I realized what had +happened I found myself fast and hardly able to budge. Just look there!" +And he showed a deep scratch on one side of his body and a heavy red +mark on the other. "But never mind," he went on. "I am thankful my life +was spared!"</p> + +<p>It was a sober-minded party that dressed and journeyed back to the fort, +Joe carrying both his own fish and those his cousin had caught.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid that will end fishing and swimming for a while," said +Biggs. "The soldiers never go near the falls, for they all know the +danger, but Colonel Fairfield is too strict to run any chances."</p> + +<p>"Don't say anything about the adventure on the tree," said Darry.</p> + +<p>"Will you keep mum?"</p> + +<p>"I will, and so will you, won't you, Joe?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>So it was arranged that nothing should be said, that the soldiers' +little recreation might not be interfered with, for both boys saw that +they had little pleasure at the best.</p> + +<p>"A fine haul for you boys!" said Lieutenant Carrol, as he surveyed the +catch. "I must go myself and try my luck. I haven't been fishing this +summer."</p> + +<p>"It's a splendid place for bites," said Joe.</p> + +<p>"I know it. But you have to be careful up there. There's a nasty fall in +the river. If you went over that you'd never come out alive."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we saw the fall," answered Darry, and gave a shudder in spite of +himself.</p> + +<p>Again at sunset there was a parade, similar to that of the day before. +After it was over the boys procured guns and had Lambert put them +through their "paces," as he called it.</p> + +<p>"First we'll drill a bit without guns," said the old soldier, for +Lambert had seen sixteen years of service. "Toe this line, heads up, +chest out, and little fingers on the seams of your trousers. That's all +right. Now then, Eyes Right! When I say that turn your eyes to the +right, but don't move your faces. Now, Eyes Front! That's good. Eyes +Left! Eyes Front! That's first-rate."</p> + +<p>"But we're not moving," said Darry.</p> + +<p>"Now we'll move. Watch me. Right Face! Do you see how it's done? Balance +on the heel, this way, and swing around. Now then, Right Face!"</p> + +<p>The two boys came around like well-trained old soldiers.</p> + +<p>"Good, boys, good. Now then, Front Face! Good. Left Face! That's not so +well. Front Face! Now here's another, About Face!"</p> + +<p>So the drilling went on, until the boys could move as Lambert wished +them to. Then they began to march and to wheel right and left. At last +he put the guns in their hands and let them march with the pieces, and +then showed them the manual of arms.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus3" id="illus3"></a> +<img src="images/illus3.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3>"AT LAST HE PUT THE GUNS IN THEIR HANDS AND LET THEM MARCH WITH THE PIECES."</h3> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p>"You'll learn in no time," said the old soldier, when his off time came +to an end. "You've crowded a dozen lessons into one."</p> + +<p>"And I feel it," said Darry. "I'm going in to rest." And he went, +followed by Joe. All told, the boys had enjoyed the drill very much.</p> + +<p>Joe was somewhat worried when bedtime came and still nothing had been +heard of his brother. Yet Colonel Fairfield told him not to mind the +prolonged absence.</p> + +<p>"But should not your quartermaster be here?" asked the boy.</p> + +<p>"He may come in to-morrow morning," answered the colonel.</p> + +<p>The next day dawned cloudy, and by noon a steady rain was falling. The +boys hardly knew what to do, and, after watching a drill and some +performances in the gymnasium, went back to the living quarters. They +had hardly entered when there came a shout from the guard at the +stockade.</p> + +<p>"Captain Moore is coming, with the quartermaster!" was the cry.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah, it's Will!" shouted Joe, and ran out despite the rain to +welcome his brother.</p> + +<p>Soon the soldiers came up, mud-stained and tired. They embraced half of +Company A, and in their midst was the quartermaster of the regiment, +with two attendants. Each of these three carried heavy saddle-bags, +filled with government money for the soldiers, for payday was now due.</p> + +<p>"Joe!" cried Captain Moore, as he dismounted and caught his brother by +the hand. "I am glad to see you safe and sound."</p> + +<p>"And I am glad to see you," answered Joe.</p> + +<p>"I will be with you soon—I must first report to Colonel Fairfield," +went on the young officer, and lost no time in seeking the commandant.</p> + +<p>His story was soon told, and it speedily spread to all parts of the +fort. Along with his men and old Benson he had looked in vain for the +Gilroy gang for a whole day. Then he had come upon them just as they +were preparing for an attack upon the quartermaster and his escort. The +gang had numbered eight, and in the fight which had followed two of the +crowd had been wounded, although all had made their escape by swimming +their steeds over a dangerous mountain torrent. Of the soldiers three +had been wounded, one man quite seriously. The young captain had +received a bullet through his hat.</p> + +<p>"It was Matt Gilroy himself who fired that shot," said Captain Moore. +"And I won't forget it when next we meet."</p> + +<p>Old Benson had been in the thickest of the fight from beginning to end, +and it was he who had wounded one of the desperadoes while the fellow +was in the act of carrying off one of the money-bags. The rascals had +fought hard over that money-bag, but in the end had been compelled to +drop everything and ride to save their lives.</p> + +<p>As soon as Captain Moore had made his report, another detachment was +sent out, to follow the desperadoes, if they could be found. This +detachment was fifty strong and under the leadership of Lieutenant +Carrol. The lieutenant was a man who had met numerous desperadoes in his +time, and it was felt that he could do the work much better than the +average soldier.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<h3>DEER HUNTING.</h3> + + +<p>With his brother at hand, Joe felt much more at home than formerly, and +the captain's presence also made a difference to his cousin. Old Benson +remained at the fort for the time being, and did what he could to please +the boys.</p> + +<p>He took an especial interest in their shooting, and would often set up a +target on the prairie for them to practice on.</p> + +<p>"You'll do first-rate in a little while," he said. "And as Lambert says +you take to drilling, it won't be long afore you're both out-and-out +soldiers."</p> + +<p>"I don't know as I care to be a regular soldier," answered Darry. "I +wouldn't mind it for a while, but to enlist for five years—why, that's +another thing."</p> + +<p>"Lambert has enlisted four times. When his time is out he'll be in +service twenty years."</p> + +<p>"And yet he is only a private," put in Joe.</p> + +<p>"He is content, and doesn't want to go any higher. He likes the life, +and he told me not long ago that he wouldn't know what to do with +himself if he was out of Uncle Sam's employ."</p> + +<p>One day after another passed, until the boys had been at the fort a +little over a week. They now knew the drills and the "time-card" as well +as anybody, and often practiced on the apparatus in the gymnasium.</p> + +<p>"It's not so bad, after you once get used to it," said Joe. "The men are +a good deal of company for each other."</p> + +<p>"It's odd to see so many men and so few women," returned Darry.</p> + +<p>"Some of the men don't want any women around, so I've been told. They +are like some of the old-time miners who used to move out of camp as +soon as a dress-skirt showed itself."</p> + +<p>One day Captain Moore and old Benson got permission to go off on a hunt, +and took the boys along. All of the party were mounted, and each carried +a saddle-bag with part of the necessary camping outfit.</p> + +<p>"If it's possible to do so, I'll show you some big game," announced the +old scout. "Although I'll allow big game is mighty scarce, even in these +parts."</p> + +<p>"Have the hunters shot down everything?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"A good bit, lad. You see, many used to come out here just to shoot for +the sake of killing. I've known a party of six men to kill twenty or +thirty buffalo and then leave the carcasses to the wolves. That was a +shame."</p> + +<p>"So it was!" cried Darry. "One or two buffalo would have been enough."</p> + +<p>"Some hunters never know when to stop," put in Captain Moore. "They +shoot as long as anything shows itself. If it wasn't for that these +hills would be filled with buffalo, deer, bears, and all other kind of +game."</p> + +<p>The morning was clear and cool, and everybody in the party was in the +best of spirits. The course was down into a broad valley, in the middle +of which flowed the Rocky Pass River, and then up a series of hills +leading to Tom Long Mountain—a favorite resort in this territory for +sportsmen.</p> + +<p>"Do you think we'll see or hear anything of those desperadoes?" asked +Joe of his brother, as they rode along side by side.</p> + +<p>"It's not likely," answered the young captain. "As soon as they learn +that the soldiers are after them they'll take to their heels in +double-quick order. They haven't any taste for meeting our regulars."</p> + +<p>"It's queer that this Matt Gilroy should go in for this sort of life—if +he is as well educated as you say."</p> + +<p>"Some men don't like anything better, Joe—they wouldn't earn their +living honestly if they could. It's queer that this is so, but it's a +fact. Those men have no regular homes, although many often talk of +settling down. Generally they die with their boots on, as the saying +goes."</p> + +<p>By noon the party had covered fifteen miles and were well into the +hills. They came to a rest beside a fine spring which flowed from a +split in the rocks. Near at hand was some dense brushwood, and old +Benson rightfully guessed that it would not be difficult to beat up some +birds.</p> + +<p>"You can now try your luck at aiming," he said to the boys, and led the +way into the dense growth. Soon a flock of birds arose directly before +them, and both Darry and Joe took a quick shot, bringing down seven of +the quarry. Then the scout fired, and five other birds dropped.</p> + +<p>"Pretty good for a starter!" cried old Benson, as they stalked around +picking up the game. "That target practice has made you both pretty +steady. Just a round dozen, all told. That's a-plenty for dinner, I +reckon."</p> + +<p>Captain Moore was also pleased when told of what his brother and his +cousin had accomplished. "You'll make great hunters in time," he said. +"The main thing is to keep your nerve when big game confronts you. You +know you have the best of a bird or squirrel, or anything like that. +But when it comes to a buffalo, or a bear——"</p> + +<p>"I know all about bears," interrupted Joe, and at this there was a +general laugh. "If I ever meet another bear I want to be well prepared +for him," he continued.</p> + +<p>"Generally a wild animal won't fight," went on the young captain. "But +when one is cornered he is apt to get very ugly; eh, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"Right you are, captain. I was once cornered by a buffalo, and had all I +could do to save myself."</p> + +<p>The old scout calculated that they would strike some game that +afternoon, and he was not mistaken. About two o'clock they sighted +several deer far up the hillside.</p> + +<p>"Fine, plump animals," said Benson. "If we get a couple of them we can +be well satisfied."</p> + +<p>It was decided that they should move around in a semicircle, so as to +get to leeward of the herd.</p> + +<p>"If we don't do that, the deer will scent us and be off in no time," +explained Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>Their horses were tethered in the brush, near some trees, and the party +of four started out on foot. The way was rough, but the boys did not +mind this. Their sole thought was upon the deer, and each resolved to +bring down one of the game, no matter at what cost.</p> + +<p>It was no light task to reach a spot from which to shoot. They had to +cross several depressions on the hillside, and here the undergrowth was +so heavy that progress at times seemed impossible. Once Darry went into +a hole up to his waist, and came out with several rents in his coat, +where the thorns had clung to him.</p> + +<p>"Oh!" he muttered. "Oh!"</p> + +<p>"Are you hurt?" questioned Joe quickly.</p> + +<p>"Not much, but I reckon I'm a good deal scratched up," answered Darry, +with a wry face.</p> + +<p>At last they gained a point well to leeward of the quarry, and Benson +brought the party to a halt.</p> + +<p>"We'll creep in as far as we can," he said. "But keep your guns ready +for use, and as soon as one fires the others had best fire too, for the +deer won't wait after one shot. Which will you take, captain?"</p> + +<p>"I'll take the one near the big rock," answered Captain Moore. "Joe, you +had better take the one on the knoll."</p> + +<p>"I will."</p> + +<p>"I'll take the one rubbing his side with his prong," put in Darry.</p> + +<p>"And I'll take the one coming through the brush," finished old Benson. +"Now then, forward. Make no noise, and be sure your gun doesn't go off +and hit somebody else instead of the deer."</p> + +<p>Rifles in hand, they crept through the underbrush and down toward the +glade in which the deer were feeding.</p> + +<p>The animals did not become suspicious until they were less than a +hundred yards away. Then, of a sudden, the leader threw up his head and +began to sniff the air.</p> + +<p>"Now fire," said Benson in a low tone.</p> + +<p>At once the four rifles came up, and each hunter took steady aim. Darry +and Joe fired at the same instant, and the young captain and Benson +discharged their pieces immediately after.</p> + +<p>The aim of the two older hunters was true, and two deer fell dead after +going less than six steps. But the other game was only wounded, Joe's +deer in the side and Darry's in the flank, and they bounded away up the +hillside.</p> + +<p>"Missed!" groaned Joe, and slipped another cartridge into his firearm. +Darry did the same, and both fired a second time. Then, seeing how badly +the deer were wounded, they ran after the animals.</p> + +<p>The course of the deer was straight for the timber down the +mountain-side, and through the brush crashed quarry and boys until +another hundred yards were covered. Then, coming to a rocky cliff, and +being unable to leap to the top, the deer came to a halt.</p> + +<p>"Do you see 'em?" panted Darry, almost out of breath with running.</p> + +<p>"Yes—there they are!" returned Joe. "See?"</p> + +<p>"I do. They can't get up the rocks. Joe, we've got 'em after all. We +must shoot——Gracious!"</p> + +<p>The boy broke off short, and with good reason. The deer had spotted +them, and now without warning turned and ran straight for both, as if to +gore them to death!</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<h3>A FISH AND A SNAKE.</h3> + + +<p>"Look out, Darry, or he'll kill you!"</p> + +<p>"Look out for yourself, Joe!"</p> + +<p>These cries were followed by two shots, as both the young hunters +discharged their weapons. But in their haste the aim of each was poor, +and the bullets flew wide of the mark. Then the maddened deer came +closer, and both boys took to their heels, running as they had never run +before.</p> + +<p>"Hi! what's up?" came in old Benson's voice.</p> + +<p>"The deer are after us!" yelled Joe. "Shoot 'em quick!"</p> + +<p>Hardly had the lad spoken when he felt one of the deer close behind him. +He leaped to one side, and the animal charged past with great vigor, +considering how badly he was wounded. But that charge was his last, for +Benson's rifle spoke up, and the animal fell lifeless where he stood.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Darry was having his hands full with the second deer. +The youth had been unable to reload, and now he found himself in a +thicket, with the deer fairly on top of him. He caught his firearm by +the barrel and hit the animal a resounding blow on the head. This made +the deer stagger back and pause.</p> + +<p>"Help! help!" yelled the boy. "Somebody shoot this beast!"</p> + +<p>"I'm coming!" came in Captain Moore's voice. "Where are you?"</p> + +<p>"Here, in the bush! Quick, or he'll stick me to death!"</p> + +<p>The deer was now charging with lowered head. He was in a fearful rage. +As he came on there was a sharp report, and the young captain burst into +view, his rifle barrel still smoking. Then the deer gave one last leap +into the air, and came down upon Darry. The fall knocked the boy +senseless.</p> + +<p>While Captain Moore was removing the weight from Darry's body, the old +scout came up, followed by Joe.</p> + +<p>"Hullo, he got it, did he?" said Benson. "Is he badly hurt?"</p> + +<p>"I hope not," answered the young captain. "You see, the deer didn't +touch him until I fired. Then he leaped up and knocked my cousin down."</p> + +<p>"Hope there aint any bones broken."</p> + +<p>The deer was removed, and Benson went off to get some water. When he +came back Captain Moore and Joe were rubbing Darry's wrists. The water +was dashed into the unconscious youth's face, and soon he gave a gasp +and opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"The deer?" were his first words.</p> + +<p>"You are safe," said the captain reassuringly. "The deer is dead."</p> + +<p>"Oh!" Darry uttered a sigh of relief. "I was thinking he was goring me +to pieces."</p> + +<p>"You had a narrow escape," put in old Benson. "If it hadn't been for the +captain he would have mauled you for certain. Didn't you hear me yell to +be careful?"</p> + +<p>"I thought it would be an easy matter to bring him down, after he was +wounded," said Darry, still gasping for breath.</p> + +<p>"Any bones broken?" questioned Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"I—I guess not." Darry gave a sigh and sat up. "How did Joe make out?"</p> + +<p>"I am all right," answered that individual. "Benson did the trick for me +though. Benson, I owe you a good deal."</p> + +<p>"And I owe you a good deal," said Darry, turning to his cousin.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad I came up, Darry," answered the young captain. "After this +both you and Joe must be more careful. If either of you had been killed +I would never have forgiven myself for bringing you out on the hunt."</p> + +<p>"I want to give you both a bit of advice, and I want you to remember it +too," came from the old scout. "Never get too close to big game until +you are certain of what you are doing, and be extry careful of big game +that is wounded and cornered. Even a sneaking fox will turn on you if he +sees there is no other way out of his difficulty."</p> + +<p>"I'll remember that," answered both Joe and Darry, and they did +remember, and thus was one peril of big-game hunting abolished.</p> + +<p>Darry felt too weak for the time being to do much, so Joe led him back +to where they had left the horses, while Captain Moore and old Benson +took upon themselves the task of bringing in the four deer. Each was a +beautiful prize, and the quartet made an imposing sight when hung up on +a couple of tree branches.</p> + +<p>"The colonel will like this haul," said the young captain. "It will mean +prime venison for some days to come. Benson, I wish we could get some of +it back to the fort without delay—so we can put it on ice and keep it +nice."</p> + +<p>"I'll take 'em all to the fort to-night, if you say so," answered the +scout. "I can take one on my horse, and load the other three on one of +the other animals."</p> + +<p>"Then do that, and while at the fort ask the colonel if he will give me +permission to remain out until Saturday. Tell him we think we can bring +in something for all hands to enjoy."</p> + +<p>"I'll do it," said the old scout.</p> + +<p>Soon the deer were packed on the horses, old Benson having first cut +some steaks from the smallest of the game, to leave behind.</p> + +<p>"Take good care of yourselves while I am gone," he said on departing. +"And you, Joe and Darry, mind what I told you about getting cornered." +Then he was off, and a turn in the mountain trail soon hid him from +view.</p> + +<p>"A fine old fellow," was Joe's comment, when Benson was gone.</p> + +<p>"He is that," answered the young captain. "I liked him from the first +time I saw him, and I have never had cause to regret it. He is a good +hunter, an excellent scout, and has done us many a good turn."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do while he is absent?" questioned Darry.</p> + +<p>"Oh, we can try our hand at small game and we can fish!" answered the +young captain. "As it is, I reckon both of you would just as lief take +it easy until morning."</p> + +<p>"I would. That deer on me has made me feel sore all over."</p> + +<p>They were soon in camp again, and while the boys rested Captain Moore +stirred around and showed them how the soldiers prepared their meals. He +cooked the steaks to a turn, and boiled a pot of coffee, and these, with +some crackers they had brought along, made a most excellent meal. Being +in no hurry, they took their time over the repast, and it was dark long +before they finished.</p> + +<p>"It's going to be a fine night, so we can sleep under the trees without +fear," said the young captain.</p> + +<p>"Don't you think some wild animals will attack us?"</p> + +<p>"Not if we keep our camp-fire burning."</p> + +<p>The boys brought in plenty of brush and some heavier wood, and arranged +it so that it would burn for a long while, doing this by forming the +stuff into something of a circle. Then the horses were looked after, and +each retired, with his blanket rolled around him to keep off the +mountain dew, which was already showing itself.</p> + +<p>When the boys awoke the sun was shining brightly into their faces. For a +moment each stared at the other.</p> + +<p>"Gracious, I never slept so soundly in my life!" cried Joe. "I couldn't +have done better in a bed at home."</p> + +<p>"Nor I," returned his cousin. "I can tell you, sleeping in the open air +when it doesn't rain is all right."</p> + +<p>But when Darry got up on his feet he changed his tune. The fall of the +day previous, combined with the night air, had made him woefully stiff, +and it was a good half-hour before he became limbered up.</p> + +<p>They found Captain Moore already stirring, and the kettle over the fire +was boiling merrily. The captain himself was trying his luck at a brook +not a great distance off.</p> + +<p>"I saw some fish in here some weeks ago," he explained. "I thought I +might get a couple for breakfast. But you lads will have to wait until I +strike luck."</p> + +<p>"I'm willing to wait," said Joe. "There is nothing to do, is there, +until Benson gets back?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing that I know of, unless you want to fish or go after some small +game. I want to hear what he has to say. If the colonel won't let me +stay out, I'll have to return to the fort to-night."</p> + +<p>It did not take long for Captain Moore to land several good-sized +specimens of the finny tribe, and these the boys took turns at preparing +for eating, while the captain continued to fish. The balance of the +morning was passed at the brook, and, strange to say, the captain and +Joe were both quite successful, while Darry hardly got a bite.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to try my luck further up the stream," announced the boy. "I +believe we are all fishing too closely together."</p> + +<p>"That doesn't seem to hurt my luck," said Joe.</p> + +<p>Darry was soon climbing the rocks leading up the brook. The way was +rough, but he was growing used to this life in the open air and he +enjoyed even the hardship, if such it can be called.</p> + +<p>"That ought to make a good fishing-hole," he said to himself, as he +reached a point where several big rocks hung over the water's edge. +"It's dark down there, and that's what some fish like."</p> + +<p>He prepared his bait with care, and then dropped his line into the hole. +Almost immediately he felt a nibble, and, giving a jerk, found he had +caught something that was both large and powerful.</p> + +<p>"Gracious, it must be a whopper!" he muttered, as the fish darted hither +and thither. Then he braced back on the rock, to play the game, for +bringing in the catch at once seemed out of the question. The pole bent +greatly, and he was afraid it would snap on him.</p> + +<p>He could not stand on the slippery rock very well, and so stepped behind +it, on a number of loose stones. Hardly had he done so when he heard a +strange hissing. Looking down, he saw a snake glide from under the rock. +In a moment more the angry reptile faced him.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<h3>OVER THE MOUNTAIN TOP.</h3> + + +<p>Darry was much alarmed, and with good reason. Never before had he faced +such a snake, and the reptile looked ready to spring upon him at any +instant.</p> + +<p>What to do the boy did not know, yet instinctively he leaped back to the +top of the rock. Then the fish gave a jerk which almost took him from +his feet.</p> + +<p>"Joe! Will!" he shouted. "Come this way! I'm in a pickle!"</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" shouted Captain Moore, and soon he and his brother +were coming forward as quickly as they could.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Darry was having his hands full, for the big fish was +bound to get away. At the bottom of the rock lay the snake, with head +raised and mouth wide open. Its eyes shone like diamonds.</p> + +<p>"A snake! Kill it!" shrieked Darry.</p> + +<p>"A snake?" echoed Joe. "Where?"</p> + +<p>"At the bottom of this big rock. Oh, my, he's going to come up!"</p> + +<p>"I see him," put in Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>As he spoke the snake made a leap for the top of the rock. As the +reptile went up, Darry went down, and ran along the brook's edge, still +with his fishing-pole in his hand.</p> + +<p>Catching up a sharp stone, Captain Moore flung it at the snake, hitting +the reptile in the tail. At once the thing whirled around, and now +forgetting Darry it turned on its assailant.</p> + +<p>"He's coming for you!" ejaculated Joe. "Run, Will, or you'll be bitten +sure!"</p> + +<p>"I'm not running from a snake," answered the young officer, and in a +trice he whipped out his pistol. As the snake came on he let drive. His +aim was true, and the snake dropped with its head half severed from its +body.</p> + +<p>"Good for you!" said Joe, and now he picked up a stone as large as his +hand. This he dropped directly on the quivering head, and thus ended the +battle, although the body of the snake continued to wriggle for a long +while afterward.</p> + +<p>With white face and set teeth, Darry continued to play his catch and he +was still at it when Joe and his brother came rushing up.</p> + +<p>"Did the snake bite you?" questioned the young captain. "Why didn't you +pull in?"</p> + +<p>"I've got something big on," answered Darry. "I didn't want to miss it."</p> + +<p>"Well, I never!" gasped Captain Moore. "And you didn't let go even with +that snake at your heels? Well, you like a fish better than I do, I can +tell you that."</p> + +<p>Again the pole bent and threatened to break, but Darry knew what he was +doing, and promptly let the fish have more line. Then he wound in, and +as the fish unexpectedly came close to shore he gave a sudden strong, +steady sweep, and up came the prize on the rocks, flapping and flopping +violently.</p> + +<p>"My, what a whopper!" cried Joe. "He must weigh at least seven or eight +pounds!"</p> + +<p>"He felt as if he weighed about forty when he was in the water," +returned Darry, a little crest-fallen that the catch was not larger.</p> + +<p>"That's the biggest fish I've ever seen taken out of this stream," said +the young captain. "You can be proud of it, Darry. But to hold on when +that snake was behind you——" He shook his head.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I knew you'd come up and take care of that, Cousin Will."</p> + +<p>"But I might have been too late."</p> + +<p>"Was it a poisonous one?"</p> + +<p>"Some claim they are poisonous, but the surgeon up at the fort says not. +Still I wouldn't want to risk a bite."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps there are more around," suggested Joe.</p> + +<p>"No, the peculiarity of this variety of snakes is that they always +travel alone. If they meet they fight until one or the other is dead."</p> + +<p>"Did you ever see such a fight, Will?"</p> + +<p>"I did, when I first came to these parts. I was riding over a rocky +trail when my horse suddenly stopped, nearly throwing me. On looking +ahead to find out what had frightened my animal, I discovered two of +these snakes. They were facing each other, with mouths wide open and +fangs showing. Each was so interested in the other that neither noticed +me or the horse. They faced each other for fully a minute, and during +that time began to hiss louder and louder. Suddenly they sprang at each +other, and one snake was stung in the eye. He curled himself around the +other snake's neck, and in an instant both were in a tight ball. They +rolled around and around among the rocks. Once in a while a head would +show itself, and then there would be more hissing. After ten minutes the +ball fell gradually apart, and then one snake crawled slowly away, more +dead than alive. The other snake proved to be dead, with both eyes torn +from its head."</p> + +<p>"Didn't you kill the other snake?" asked Darry.</p> + +<p>"I did. That's the first and only battle I ever saw between snakes, and +it was terrible while it lasted, I can tell you that."</p> + +<p>Fishing over, they went into camp, and here rested until old Benson came +back.</p> + +<p>"The colonel was tickled to death to receive so much deer meat," said +the old scout. "And he says you can stay until Saturday night if you +wish. His lady said she had been wanting some venison for several +weeks."</p> + +<p>Captain Moore felt glad to think he could be out four days more.</p> + +<p>"We'll have a grand time now," he said. "Benson, we can go right over +yonder mountain, can't we?"</p> + +<p>"To be sure," answered the scout.</p> + +<p>"Is the hunting good over there?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"Yes, lad. There used to be some buffalo there."</p> + +<p>"Good! Let us get a buffalo by all means!" cried Darry.</p> + +<p>"You go slow about tackling a buffalo, especially a bull," said the +young captain. "If we do sight a buffalo you let Benson manage the whole +affair."</p> + +<p>It was not long before the party were off once more, up a trail which +led directly to the mountain top. Here traveling was difficult, and both +riders and horses were glad to rest at frequent intervals.</p> + +<p>When the top was gained the sun was just sinking in the far west. The +sight on every side was a glorious one, and as the captain had a small +field-glass with him, they could see for miles.</p> + +<p>"There is the fort," said Joe, after looking through the glass. "I can +see the flag quite plainly."</p> + +<p>In the west were more mountains, and between these the valley for which +they were bound. Timber and underbrush were dense in spots, while at +other points the mountain sides were covered with bold, blackish rocks, +with here and there luxuriant moss of several hues. Springs and brooks +were numerous, so there was no danger of a water famine.</p> + +<p>"I can make out some game over yonder," said Darry, when he had the +glass adjusted to his sight.</p> + +<p>"What is it?"</p> + +<p>"I can't see very plainly."</p> + +<p>"Hand over the glass," said old Benson, and took a careful look. But the +setting sun now cast a deep shadow between the mountains, and he was +unable to tell what it was.</p> + +<p>"Mountain deer, most likely," he said. "We'll find out to-morrow—if +the good weather holds out."</p> + +<p>"Do you think we'll have a storm?" asked Joe quickly.</p> + +<p>"We'll have something; don't you think so, captain?"</p> + +<p>"I think we'll have more wind than rain," returned Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"If we have a high wind, will it be safe right on the mountain top?" +questioned Joe.</p> + +<p>"We won't stay here," said old Benson. "I know of a much better +camping-place. Come, while it is still a little light." And they set off +once more.</p> + +<p>The place the old scout had in mind was close beside a cliff. The wall +of rocks was twice as high as their heads, and on either side was a +growth of heavy timber. There was a spring at hand and a grassy patch +which promised them an easy bed, providing it did not rain.</p> + +<p>"If it storms we can seek the shelter of the cliff," said old Benson. +"It won't be as comfortable as a house or cabin, but it will be a good +deal better than being right in the open."</p> + +<p>The boys were glad enough to rest after the wearisome ride over the top +of the mountain, and hungry for the meal the old scout took upon himself +to prepare.</p> + +<p>When the fire was lit it burned up lively, blowing the sparks in several +directions. As soon as he finished cooking the meal Benson put out the +blaze.</p> + +<p>"Too much wind," he said, in reply to a question from Joe. "I don't want +to set the whole mountain side on fire."</p> + +<p>Benson was right about the wind, which was now sweeping strongly through +the tops of the tall trees. Presently it came lower, and shook up the +brushwood. The night birds began to fly around, uttering their shrill +cries. The old scout listened to the birds with some concern.</p> + +<p>"It's going to be a big blow," he said to Darry.</p> + +<p>"You are sure?"</p> + +<p>"Yes. The birds are afraid of it. See how they flutter around? That's a +sure sign."</p> + +<p>"Birds must know a good deal, Benson."</p> + +<p>"They do, lad—a heap sight more than folks gives 'em credit for. We +could learn a good deal from them, if we'd only set our minds to it."</p> + +<p>They took their time about eating, having nothing else to do. Then +Benson cared for the horses, putting them in the shelter of the brush, +but away from the big trees.</p> + +<p>At last it began to blow in earnest, and presently they heard a tree +limb here and there snap with a loud report. Then the wind became so +furious they were glad enough to huddle under the cliff for shelter.</p> + +<p>"It's coming now!" shouted old Benson suddenly. "Hold fast to your hats, +boys, or you'll never see them again. And sit down on the traps!"</p> + +<p>And in a moment more the fury of the wind storm was upon them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<h3>THE RESULT OF A HURRICANE.</h3> + + +<p>Both Joe and Darry had witnessed many a blow, but nothing to compare to +that which now swept through the valley and up the mountain side. The +velocity of the wind was simply terrific, and it was well that old +Benson had cautioned them to hold on to their hats and sit on their +traps, otherwise all would have been blown away to parts unknown.</p> + +<p>"Say, but this is fierce!" gasped Darry, after several minutes had +passed.</p> + +<p>"It's a regular hurricane," said Captain Moore. "I've been out in them +before. Fortunately they do not last over a quarter or half an hour. +Down on the prairies of Kansas they would call it a cyclone. Here, +however, it can't get the sweep that it can on the level."</p> + +<p>"Hark! what is that?" put in Joe, as a tremendous crashing reached their +ears.</p> + +<p>"That's a tree in the forest going down," answered old Benson.</p> + +<p>"There goes another," said Darry, as more crashing was heard. "I am +glad we didn't go into the timber. It's more dangerous than lightning."</p> + +<p>"So it is!" shouted Benson. It was with difficulty that he made himself +heard. "Here comes the worse of it!" he added.</p> + +<p>A strange humming now filled the air, followed by twigs and flying +branches. Overhead it was unusually dark, and they could scarcely see +one another. Joe and Darry kept close together and clasped hands. +Captain Moore was on one side of them and old Benson on the other.</p> + +<p>As the wind struck the cliff it sent a shower of loose stones in all +directions. Then it tore through the undergrowth where the horses were +tethered. Next it seemed to hit the trees fronting the cliff. One tall +monarch of the forest was twisted completely from its roots and began to +topple.</p> + +<p>"See, the tree is coming on top of us!" shrieked Joe.</p> + +<p>His words were drowned out in the fury of the wind and the crashing of +the tree. The next moment the monarch of the forest came down on the +cliff with a bang, cracking the stone in several places. The bottom +limbs caught those under the cliff and pinned them fast.</p> + +<p>To both boys it seemed as if the end of the world had come. They rolled +over, one on top of the other, and for several seconds lay dazed. Then +they tried to get up, but found themselves unable to do so.</p> + +<p>"Get off of my chest!" gasped Joe, who was underneath.</p> + +<p>"I can't—I'm pinned down!" panted Darry.</p> + +<p>"Boys, are you safe?" came from old Benson, who was also caught.</p> + +<p>"I—I guess so!" answered Joe. "But it's a tight squeeze." Then the +youth called out to his brother, but no answer came back.</p> + +<p>"Will must be hurt!" he exclaimed, his heart rising in his throat. +"Will! Will! Where are you?" he continued.</p> + +<p>Still there was no answer, or if so the fury of the wind drowned it out +completely. The boys tried their best to move, but could only budge a +few inches.</p> + +<p>In five minutes the fury of the blow spent itself and the last of the +wind sent the fallen tree rolling along the cliff a distance of several +rods. This released Joe and Darry, and they arose to their feet dazed +and bewildered and scarcely knowing what to do next. It was now raining +and darker than ever.</p> + +<p>"Benson!" called out Joe, "where is my brother?"</p> + +<p>"The captain must still be under the tree," replied the old scout. "He +was next to you when the tree came down, wasn't he?"</p> + +<p>"He was, but I believe the wind carried his hat off, and he made a dive +for it. That's the last I saw of him."</p> + +<p>Staggering to his feet, Joe looked around, trying to pierce the +darkness. Darry followed him, and old Benson also got up. The scout had +received a nasty cut on the shoulder, from which the blood was flowing.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes Joe found his brother. The captain lay on the rocks +unconscious, a big lump on his forehead, where the largest of the tree's +branches had struck him. Kneeling at his brother's side, the boy made a +hasty examination.</p> + +<p>"He's alive!" he said. "But he must have been struck a terrible crack."</p> + +<p>There was little to do excepting to bathe the unconscious officer's +head, and this was done. In the meantime Darry assisted old Benson at +binding up the wounded shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Take the tree off!" Such were the first words Captain Moore uttered +when he returned to consciousness. It was some time before he could sit +up.</p> + +<p>"You are all right, Will—the tree is not on you," said Joe soothingly.</p> + +<p>"But it came down right on top of me."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it came down on all of us."</p> + +<p>"Anybody killed?"</p> + +<p>"No. Benson has a cut on the shoulder, and you were knocked out. Feel +the lump on your head."</p> + +<p>The young captain did so.</p> + +<p>"Phew! But that's a regular goose-egg, isn't it?" he muttered. "I +suppose I can be thankful that I am alive."</p> + +<p>"We can all be thankful for that, Will."</p> + +<p>"It was the greatest blow I ever experienced—in more ways than one," +said the captain. "I see it is raining. We had better go back to the +cliff for protection."</p> + +<p>"Don't do it!" cried old Benson, from out of the darkness. "The tree +struck the cliff a heavy blow, and we don't want that down on our heads +next."</p> + +<p>"No, let us give the cliff a wide berth," said Darry. "I'd rather remain +right out in the open and get soaked than take any more risks."</p> + +<p>"The rain won't amount to much," said Benson. "It never does after such +a hurricane."</p> + +<p>The scout was right, and in less than half an hour after it had begun +the downpour was over and the stars were struggling forth in the sky. +Without delay a camp-fire was lit, and the blaze did much toward making +them comfortable. It was found that Benson's wound was by far the worst, +yet the old scout said it would not interfere with his outing.</p> + +<p>"I've had lots of 'em in my time," was the way he expressed himself. +"Lots, and I aint dead yet. 'Pears to me I'm about as tough as a +pine-knot."</p> + +<p>It was found that the horses had not suffered in the least from the +storm, although they had been much frightened. Soon they calmed down, +and by midnight all was as quiet as if nothing out of the ordinary had +occurred. But Captain Moore and old Benson carried the marks of the +adventure for many days after.</p> + +<p>On the following morning no one felt much in the humor for hunting, and +half a day was lost in "bumming around," as Joe expressed it. This gave +all a good rest and put the horses in fine fettle, and when they started +out after the midday meal all were once again in high spirits.</p> + +<p>That night found them on the edge of what old Benson called the buffalo +ground, a broad valley where the grass was thick and of a peculiar +richness. On the way they had shot a number of birds and also a few +small animals, but nothing of importance. Once some deer had been +sighted, but the game was too far off to be pursued.</p> + +<p>As they expected to remain at this point until ready to return home, the +old scout proceeded to put up a shelter of brush, which, when completed, +was almost as comfortable as a cabin. On the bottom were strewn pine +boughs, which gave the shelter a peculiar odor.</p> + +<p>"Best thing in the world for colds and weak lungs, that smell," said +Benson. "I've never known it to fail." The boys declared that the odor +made them sleep "like logs."</p> + +<p>"It's queer we haven't seen any Indians," remarked Darry. "I thought +these mountains were full of them."</p> + +<p>"They were full, before the fort was established," answered Benson. "But +the kind that are in this neighborhood don't like white men very much, +and they only come around the fort when it's necessary. But we may meet +some after buffalo. An Injun will do a heap to get a critter like that."</p> + +<p>The old scout said it would be useless to go out in a body to look for +buffalo, and so it was arranged that he should first go over the ground +alone, leaving the captain and the two boys to look for smaller game.</p> + +<p>This settled, Benson soon set off, and a little later Captain Moore, +Joe, and Darry took their way along some bushes skirting a small +water-course. They went on foot, leaving their horses tethered near the +shelter.</p> + +<p>"I will go up one side of the stream, and you can go up the other," said +the captain. "By doing that we'll be sure to stir up anything within a +hundred yards of the water."</p> + +<p>The boys agreed, and soon each member of the party was hard at work, on +the hunt for any small game the vicinity might afford.</p> + +<p>It was not long before they gained a spot where the underbrush along the +brook was thick. Here the stream divided into two branches, and, without +knowing it, the captain and the boys became gradually more and more +separated, the brush and small trees hiding each from the other.</p> + +<p>"I don't see much," said Joe, after half a mile had been covered. "Those +little birds aren't worth wasting powder and shot on."</p> + +<p>"It looks to me as if somebody had gone over this ground," returned +Darry. "See here, aren't those fresh footprints?"</p> + +<p>"I believe they are. And see, here are the prints of several horses' +hoofs. Benson didn't come this way, did he?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think he did."</p> + +<p>"Then there must be other hunters not far off."</p> + +<p>They continued on their way, coming to a halt where the branch of the +brook entered a small, rocky canyon.</p> + +<p>"No use of going further," said Joe. "Let us retrace our steps."</p> + +<p>"Where can your brother be? I haven't heard him for some time."</p> + +<p>Joe set up a yell, and both listened attentively. No answer came back. +Then both called in concert. Still the silence continued.</p> + +<p>"It's mighty queer," was Joe's comment "Let us go back. Perhaps he's in +trouble."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<h3>CAPTAIN MOORE'S ADVENTURE.</h3> + + +<p>In the meanwhile, never dreaming of the danger at hand, Captain Moore +pursued his way up the other branch of the water-course. Here the +underbrush was even more dense than where the boys were, and +consequently he did not think it strange that he heard nothing of his +brother and his cousin.</p> + +<p>The fact that he stirred up no game nettled him, and he pushed on, +determined to bring down something before he went back.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he espied something moving in the patch of wood ahead of him. +Rifle in hand, he moved cautiously in the direction.</p> + +<p>As he did this, a man glided out from the bushes to his right and +followed him as silently as a shadow.</p> + +<p>The man was Gus Fetter. The desperado was fully armed, and his face was +black with hatred of the young army officer.</p> + +<p>As the wood was gained, Captain Moore paused to locate the object he had +seen.</p> + +<p>But before he could do this, he was caught from behind and his rifle was +wrenched from his grasp.</p> + +<p>"Fetter!" he ejaculated, as he caught sight of the desperado.</p> + +<p>"Up with your hands, Captain Moore!" growled the rascal savagely. "Up, I +say! I've got the drop on you!"</p> + +<p>Fetter had thrown the captain's rifle to the ground, and now stood upon +it. In his hands he held his own weapon, and the muzzle was aimed at the +young officer's head.</p> + +<p>Realizing that discretion was the better part of valor, Captain Moore +threw up his hands promptly, at which the desperado grinned wickedly.</p> + +<p>"Where did you come from, Fetter?" demanded the captain.</p> + +<p>"From not far away, captain."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by treating a United States army officer in this +fashion?"</p> + +<p>"I've got a score to settle with you, captain. Don't forget that."</p> + +<p>"Are the rest of the gang around?"</p> + +<p>"They are."</p> + +<p>Following his last words, Gus Fetter gave a long, clear whistle, +followed by two shorter ones. At once an answer came back from the +woods, and in a few seconds Matt Gilroy appeared.</p> + +<p>"Hullo, so you've got him," sang out the leader of the desperadoes. "A +good haul. How are you, Captain Moore? Delighted to see me, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"Not at all glad to meet you—considering the circumstances," answered +the young officer, trying to keep cool, although he realized that he was +in a dangerous situation.</p> + +<p>"Well, you're honest about it, anyway," said Gilroy with a brutal laugh.</p> + +<p>"Have you been following our party?"</p> + +<p>"You had better not ask too many questions, captain."</p> + +<p>By this time Potts and two other men were coming up. One of the latter +carried his left arm in a sling. Captain Moore's recognized him as a +fellow who had been wounded in the raid on the quartermaster's party.</p> + +<p>The desperadoes consulted among themselves for a few minutes, and then +Captain Moore was ordered to march on.</p> + +<p>"To where?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"You'll see when you get there," answered Fetter. "Now move, or, by the +boots, I shoot you down where you stand!"</p> + +<p>Seeing it would be worse than useless to resist, the young officer did +as ordered, and the whole party moved away from the water-course and +took to a trail leading back to the side of the mountain.</p> + +<p>Presently they came upon a number of horses, and here they mounted. +There were two steeds without riders, and Captain Moore was ordered to +the back of one of these. All rode off in a bunch, the prisoner being +kept in the center of the party. He had been searched and his pistol +taken from him, also his pocket-knife, field-glass, and his money and +jewelry.</p> + +<p>In less than quarter of an hour a split in the mountain side was gained. +To the rear was something of a cave, the entrance overgrown with brush +and vines. At the mouth of the cave the party came to a halt, and were +met by several other desperadoes.</p> + +<p>"Now you can get down," said Gilroy. "Fetter, I guess we had better bind +his hands behind him."</p> + +<p>"You are going to bind me?" queried Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"And why not? You are such a nice chap, captain, we don't want to part +with you just yet."</p> + +<p>"Why are you going to keep me a prisoner?"</p> + +<p>"Well, don't forget that we hold you responsible for that little mix-up +when we were after the quartermaster's money-bags."</p> + +<p>"I only did my duty, Gilroy."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps; but if it hadn't been for you and your men our gang would have +been about twenty thousand dollars richer than we are to-day."</p> + +<p>"And I wouldn't have this lame arm," growled the fellow who had been +wounded.</p> + +<p>"As I said before, I only did my duty," repeated the captain calmly. +"Even if I hadn't arrived, don't you suppose the quartermaster would +have done all he could to defend himself?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly; but his party numbered only three. However, we won't talk +now. We have other things to do. Get into that cave. And don't try to +escape, or it will be the worse for you."</p> + +<p>With a downcast heart the young officer entered the cave, which was an +old rendezvous of the desperadoes. Inside were a rude table and a couple +of benches, and he threw himself down on one of the latter. One of the +gang, Potts, put himself on guard outside, rifle in hand. The others +separated into two parties, and went off again.</p> + +<p>"Can they be going after Joe and Darry, or after Benson?" was the +question the captain asked himself.</p> + +<p>He waited until the hoofbeats outside had entirely ceased, then called +to Potts.</p> + +<p>"Where are they going?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"That's Captain Gilroy's business," was the answer.</p> + +<p>"Oh, so you call Gilroy captain now?"</p> + +<p>"We do."</p> + +<p>"How many men is he captain of?"</p> + +<p>"About thirty, if you're anxious to know."</p> + +<p>"Thirty! There are not that number of desperadoes within three hundred +miles of this place."</p> + +<p>"All right, if you know better than I do."</p> + +<p>"Has the captain gone off for the rest of my party?"</p> + +<p>"Perhaps he has."</p> + +<p>"It won't do him any good to make them prisoners."</p> + +<p>"I reckon he knows his own business best, Captain Moore."</p> + +<p>"And what will you get out of this affair, Potts?"</p> + +<p>"Me? I'll get my share when we make another haul."</p> + +<p>"Do you expect to make another haul soon?"</p> + +<p>"As I said afore, better ask the captain. We're organized into a regular +company now, and all the privates like me have to do is to obey orders. +You know how it is in the regular army."</p> + +<p>"A company of desperadoes," mused Captain Moore. "That's something we +haven't had out here in years."</p> + +<p>Potts would talk no more after this, but sat down on a rock to smoke +his pipe and continue his guard duty.</p> + +<p>The young captain had had his hands bound tightly behind him, and, try +his best, he found himself unable to either break or slip his bonds.</p> + +<p>He was anxious concerning himself, but he was even more upset concerning +his brother and his cousin.</p> + +<p>"If they kick up a fuss, more than likely Gilroy and the others will +shoot them down!" he groaned. "It's too bad! I thought we would have a +splendid time hunting, and here we are, falling into all sorts of +difficulties."</p> + +<p>As impatient as he was, he could do nothing but stalk around the cave. +The place was five yards wide by over a hundred feet long. To the rear +was a rude fireplace, the smoke drifting through some wide cracks +overhead. A small fire was burning, and he kicked a fresh log on the +blaze, which soon gave him more light. Then he sat down again.</p> + +<p>As he rested, his eyes roamed around the rocky apartment, and presently +fell upon a sheet of paper lying under the table. Curious to know what +it might contain, he bent down backwards, and by an effort secured the +paper and placed it upon the table. Then, by the flickering flames, he +tried to make out the writing it contained.</p> + +<p>The letter—for such the sheet proved to be—was a communication which +had been sent to Matt Gilroy by a writer who signed himself Mose. It ran +as follows:</p> + +<blockquote><p>"The plan will work perfectly, and all we must do is to wait until +the money is at the fort. I am sure the soldiers will leave as +requested, and the defense will amount to little or nothing. Will +see to it that Colonel Fairfield is drugged, and will treat Captain +Moore and the other officers the same way, if I can get the +chance."</p></blockquote> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<h3>THREE PRISONERS.</h3> + + +<p>It did not take Joe and Darry long to retrace their steps at the +water-course. They continued to call to the young captain, and once Joe +shot off his rifle as a signal, but, as we know, no answer came back.</p> + +<p>"I can't understand this at all," said Joe, when they halted near the +shelter. "I didn't hear him do any firing, did you?"</p> + +<p>"Not a shot," answered Darry. "He must have gone away from the brook +instead of along the bank."</p> + +<p>The two boys hung around the shelter for some time, and then decided to +follow up the trail left by the young officer.</p> + +<p>This was easy for part of the distance, but soon the footprints became +so indistinct that they came to another halt.</p> + +<p>"Stumped!" muttered Joe. "We might as well go back to the shelter and +wait till he returns. One thing is certain, he hasn't found any game, or +we would have heard the firing."</p> + +<p>Tired by their long tramp the boys sat down in the shelter, thinking +that Captain Moore would return at any moment.</p> + +<p>Thus an hour was passed. It was now noon, and Joe and Darry set to work +to prepare dinner for themselves.</p> + +<p>The repast was just finished when Joe let out a cry of alarm.</p> + +<p>"Matt Gilroy!"</p> + +<p>He was right. The captain of the desperadoes had appeared, followed by +several others.</p> + +<p>The boys were taken completely off their guard. Darry made a clutch for +his rifle, but on the instant Gilroy had him covered.</p> + +<p>"Leave the gun alone!" cried the rascal. "Leave it alone, or it will be +the worse for you."</p> + +<p>"What do you want?" questioned Joe.</p> + +<p>"We want you to behave yourselves," answered Fetter, who was in the +crowd.</p> + +<p>"You played us a nice trick that time you escaped from the cave," +growled Gilroy, eying Joe darkly.</p> + +<p>"Do you blame me for wanting to get away?"</p> + +<p>"Hardly. But I'll warrant you won't get away again."</p> + +<p>"Then you consider me your prisoner?"</p> + +<p>"I do."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Joe, do you think they met Will——" began Darry, and then stopped +short.</p> + +<p>"Yes, your brother is waiting to meet you," said Fetter, addressing Joe.</p> + +<p>"Then he is also a prisoner?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>Joe's heart sank within him.</p> + +<p>"If old Benson was only here!" he muttered.</p> + +<p>Still guarding the boys, the desperadoes took their guns and also a +pistol the young captain had loaned his brother.</p> + +<p>"Now get on your horses," commanded Gilroy. "And mind, if you try to +play us foul both of you will get shot."</p> + +<p>"Are you going to take us to Captain Moore?" asked Darry.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps."</p> + +<p>The desperadoes would answer no more questions, and in a few minutes the +whole party was off for the cave. Both Darry and Joe wished to leave +behind some sort of message which Benson might pick up, but they were +watched so closely they could do nothing.</p> + +<p>When the cave was gained the boys were told to go inside and keep quiet.</p> + +<p>"Joe! and you too, Darry!" cried Captain Moore. "I was afraid of this."</p> + +<p>"No wonder we couldn't find you!" said Joe, and told of the hunt he and +his cousin had made.</p> + +<p>"These rascals are up to some deep game," whispered the young captain. +"I just picked up a message which Gilroy must have dropped," and he told +what the sheet contained.</p> + +<p>"If I were you I'd burn the paper," said Darry. "Then he won't know you +have seen it."</p> + +<p>"No, I would like to keep the sheet——to show to Colonel Fairfield if I +can manage to get away."</p> + +<p>"Who wrote the message?"</p> + +<p>"I have no idea. There used to be a half-breed around here whom the +soldiers called Mose, but I thought he was dead. He was thick with the +Modoc Indians."</p> + +<p>"Then if he was the writer that would show that the Indians are going to +help the desperadoes, wouldn't it?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>Before his brother could answer, Matt Gilroy stalked into the cave.</p> + +<p>"I told you not to talk," he growled, as he cast his eye on the table +and then around the rocky floor. "You can't get away, so it won't do you +any good to plot against me and my men."</p> + +<p>He was evidently looking for the sheet of paper, for presently he lit a +torch and went over the whole cave carefully.</p> + +<p>"See anything of a bit of paper around here?" he asked presently.</p> + +<p>"What kind of a paper?" questioned Darry.</p> + +<p>"Something with writing on it."</p> + +<p>"I haven't seen anything."</p> + +<p>"What was the writing about, Gilroy?" asked Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"That's my business. Then you haven't seen the paper? All right," and +the desperado stalked from the cave again.</p> + +<p>"That was a close shave," whispered the young captain. "And it proves +that the paper is valuable and that he is worried about it."</p> + +<p>Slowly the balance of the day wore along, and at nightfall one of the +men brought them a scanty supply of food.</p> + +<p>They ate sparingly, fearing the food might be drugged, but no evil +effects followed the meal.</p> + +<p>At the mouth of the cave sat two of the desperadoes on guard, each with +his rifle across his knees.</p> + +<p>"A dash into the darkness might save us," suggested Darry, but the +captain shook his head.</p> + +<p>"No, those fellows are too good shots," he said. "We will have to remain +as we are until something turns up in our favor."</p> + +<p>Our friends wondered if the desperadoes would remain about the cave all +night. The other party which had gone off when Gilroy went for Joe and +Darry had not yet returned, and the leader of the gang seemed to grow +anxious concerning them.</p> + +<p>"Something has happened to them," he said to Fetter. "Perhaps we had +better send somebody off on the trail to find out what's up."</p> + +<p>So it was agreed, and Fetter was the man chosen for the mission.</p> + +<p>As may have been surmised by some of my readers, the other party had +gone off to watch for old Benson and make him a prisoner. The crowd +numbered three, and were desperadoes well acquainted with that +territory.</p> + +<p>The old scout had spent several hours in a vain endeavor to locate some +buffalo, when, on resting in the crotch of a tree, he saw the +desperadoes approaching.</p> + +<p>The rascals were tired out with their search for the scout, and came to +a halt directly under the tree.</p> + +<p>"It's a fool errand," old Benson heard one of the men say. "Matt Gilroy +ought to have been satisfied with corraling Captain Moore and those +boys."</p> + +<p>"The captain wants to make a grand round-up," answered another of the +men. "He told me that if we missed Benson the scout might make trouble."</p> + +<p>Benson listened to this conversation with intense interest, and soon +learned the truth—that Captain Moore was already a prisoner, and that +another party had gone off to bring in Joe and Darry.</p> + +<p>"This is a nice state of affairs," he thought. "These rascals mean +mischief. I wish I could get the drop on them. I'd soon teach them a +thing or two."</p> + +<p>He watched the men as a cat watches mice, and, when the party of three +moved on, stole after them like an Indian on the warpath.</p> + +<p>The desperadoes skirted the brushwood, but did not go out on the grassy +slope of the valley, fearing that the old scout might be near by in +hiding and see them.</p> + +<p>They were a shiftless lot, and soon came to another halt, under some +small trees. Here they threw themselves on the ground, and while two of +them smoked their pipes the third indulged in a nap.</p> + +<p>Not a great distance off was a spring of pure cold water, and presently +one of the men got up and walked over to this to get a drink.</p> + +<p>"My chance for number one!" muttered old Benson, and crawled after the +desperado. As the man turned the corner of a number of rocks, he came up +behind, clapped his hands over the fellow's mouth, and bore him to the +earth.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<h3>BENSON PUTS SOME MEN IN A HOLE.</h3> + + +<p>The man whom old Benson had attacked was taken completely by surprise, +and he went to the ground easily. But, once down, he struggled fiercely +to release himself, and at the same time did his best to cry out for +assistance.</p> + +<p>"Silence!" commanded the scout in a whisper. "If you yell, it will go +hard with you."</p> + +<p>The desperado now saw who had attacked him, and his face changed color. +But he continued to struggle, and was on the point of breaking away when +the old scout hit him a heavy blow on the ear, which bowled him over and +rendered him partly unconscious.</p> + +<p>"Hi! did you call?" came from the other man who had been smoking.</p> + +<p>Old Benson looked at the man before him, and saw that the fellow would +be unable to do anything for several minutes to come.</p> + +<p>"Yes," he answered, in a rough voice. "Here's something funny to look +at. Come quick."</p> + +<p>At once the second man leaped up, and without stopping to pick up his +rifle came to the spring. Old Benson quickly stepped behind a bush, out +of sight.</p> + +<p>"Hullo, Riley, what's the trouble?" cried the second man when he beheld +his prostrate companion.</p> + +<p>He bent over Riley, and while he was making an examination old Benson +came behind him and threw him as he had thrown the first desperado.</p> + +<p>But the second man was "game," and the struggle lasted for several +minutes. At one time it looked as if the old scout would get the worst +of the encounter, but in the end he triumphed and the rascal was +disarmed.</p> + +<p>All the time the struggle was going on Benson had been afraid the third +man would rouse up, especially as the second called several times for +help. But the rascal had now fallen into a heavy sleep, and heard +nothing.</p> + +<p>What to do with the two desperadoes before him the old scout did not +know, until he suddenly thought of a big cave-like hole he had +discovered that very morning, while hunting for buffalo tracks. The hole +was fifteen to twenty feet in diameter and twice as deep, and once at +the bottom he felt certain the desperadoes would have considerable +trouble in getting to the top.</p> + +<p>"Come with me," he said to the second fellow. "And no monkey shines, if +you know when you are well off."</p> + +<p>"Wot yer goin' to do wid me?" growled the desperado.</p> + +<p>"You'll see. Your blood is so hot it needs cooling off," answered the +old scout.</p> + +<p>He forced the man along, and soon the big hole was reached. Much against +his will, the rascal was forced to drop to the bottom.</p> + +<p>"Now, if you try to climb up I'll shoot you," said Benson, and ran back +swiftly to where the second rascal was just getting out of his +unconscious state.</p> + +<p>Before the other desperado could realize what was coming he, too, was +down in the big hole. Old Benson made certain that each of the men was +relieved of all his weapons.</p> + +<p>"Now, I'm going to keep watch on you," he said, as a warning. "Be +careful of what you try to do."</p> + +<p>"Don't leave us here!" pleaded Riley. "A buffalo or a bear might fall in +on us."</p> + +<p>"You've got to take your chances on that," answered Benson.</p> + +<p>The next movement of the old scout was to go back to where the third man +was sleeping. It was an easy matter to secure all the weapons belonging +to this fellow. Then Benson procured a rope from their outfit, and bound +his feet together and then his hands. During the latter operation the +rascal awoke.</p> + +<p>"Wot yer doin'?" he demanded sleepily, and then, seeing the old scout, +stared in open-mouthed astonishment. "Let go o' me! Wot did yer tie me +up fer?"</p> + +<p>"You keep quiet," said Benson, with a broad smile over the trick he had +played.</p> + +<p>"Whar's Riley an' Nason?"</p> + +<p>"Not far off."</p> + +<p>"Did they go ter sleep too?"</p> + +<p>"You can ask them when you see them, Anderson."</p> + +<p>"So you know me, do yer?"</p> + +<p>"I do, and I haven't forgotten that affair at Mountain Meadow," went on +old Benson, referring to a shooting in which Anderson had been the +guilty party.</p> + +<p>At these words the desperado winced.</p> + +<p>"Well, now ye have got me fast, wot yer goin' to do with me?" he +questioned.</p> + +<p>"I'm going to ask you a few questions, Anderson, and I want you to +answer me straight, too. If I learn you've given it to me crooked, I'll +fix you for it, remember that."</p> + +<p>"Wot do yer want to know?"</p> + +<p>"Where are Gilroy and the rest of your crowd stopping?"</p> + +<p>"Wot do yer want to know that fur?"</p> + +<p>"Answer the question—and tell me the truth," and old Benson looked +sternly at his prisoner.</p> + +<p>"At a cave near Bald Top," returned Anderson sulkily. "But I don't know +how long they were goin' ter stay there."</p> + +<p>"Where were they going to take Captain Moore?"</p> + +<p>This question came as a surprise to the desperado.</p> + +<p>"Wot do yer know about dat?" he cried.</p> + +<p>"Answer the question."</p> + +<p>"Goin' ter take him to dat same cave, first."</p> + +<p>"And then?"</p> + +<p>"Dey was bound fer Lone Creek, up to where old Cimber onct had a claim."</p> + +<p>"You are telling me the truth? Remember, if you put me on the wrong +trail——"</p> + +<p>"It's the truth, Benson. But, say, don't be rough on me. I aint such a +bad egg. Dat shootin'——"</p> + +<p>"I know all about you, Anderson. Now come with me."</p> + +<p>Reaching down, the old scout untied the rascal's feet, that he might +walk, and then forced Anderson to journey to the big hole.</p> + +<p>Here they found the other two desperadoes sitting at the bottom, +growling over their luck and speculating upon what old Benson intended +to do next.</p> + +<p>"If you leave us here we'll die of hunger and thirst," said one.</p> + +<p>"No, you won't," answered the old scout. "You've got your hands to work +with, and if you aint lazy you can dig your way to the top inside of +twenty-four hours."</p> + +<p>"And our hosses?"</p> + +<p>"I'll take care of them, Riley. If you want 'em again you can get 'em by +applying at the fort."</p> + +<p>"At the fort!"</p> + +<p>"Exactly, and in the meantime we'll keep them in exchange for the +animals Matt Gilroy stole, when I and my friends were stopping at Hank +Leeson's cabin."</p> + +<p>With the desperadoes safe for the time being at the bottom of the hole, +old Benson set off without delay for the cave near Bald Top Mountain, as +it was called for years by Rocky Mountain pioneers. He rode his own +horse, leading the others by his lariat, which he always carried with +him.</p> + +<p>He fully realized that there was danger ahead, and that if he wanted to +assist his friends he must move with caution. He knew that Captain Moore +had been made a prisoner, but whether or not Joe and Darry had been +captured also was still a question.</p> + +<p>Coming in sight of the spot where the cave was located, he dismounted +and tied all the horses in the woods at the foot of a slope. Then he +crawled forward until he was within a hundred feet of the entrance to +the cave.</p> + +<p>He was just in time to see Fetter depart on his mission. The desperado +passed within fifty yards of where the horses were stationed, and for +several minutes Benson was fearful that the animals would be discovered. +But Fetter was looking in another direction, and so saw nothing of the +steeds.</p> + +<p>As darkness had come on, the desperadoes had lit a camp-fire near the +entrance to the cave.</p> + +<p>Two men still remained on guard. The others took it easy, and did very +much as they pleased. All waited for Riley and the others to return with +Fetter, bringing in old Benson as a prisoner.</p> + +<p>As the scout heard the talk about himself he chuckled grimly and grasped +his rifle tighter than ever.</p> + +<p>"Reckon you'd be surprised to know I was so close," he muttered. "Well, +if it comes to a mix-up, I'll try to hold up my end, just you see if I +don't!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<h3>ESCAPING IN THE DARKNESS.</h3> + + +<p>It was after midnight when the camp settled down to rest. Fetter had not +returned, and Matt Gilroy was much worried in consequence. Yet he was +tired out, having lost a good portion of the night previous in +traveling, and he lay down with the others.</p> + +<p>The guards at the entrance to the cave had been changed. Those now there +were two young men, recruits to the desperadoes' organization.</p> + +<p>Inside of the cave Captain Moore, Joe, and Darry, having untied each +other's bonds, held a long consultation, the upshot of which was that +they intended to escape if the deed could be accomplished.</p> + +<p>"There is no use in telling you that we will run a big risk," said the +captain. "But as for myself, these rascals are plotting against Colonel +Fairfield and the soldiers at the fort, and I feel it my duty to do my +best toward getting away and warning my commander."</p> + +<p>"Whatever you do, Will, I will back you up, so far as I am able," was +his brother's answer.</p> + +<p>"And I will back you up, too," came from Darry. "But we must be +cautious, for these desperadoes will not hesitate to shoot, and shoot to +kill." And the boy shivered in spite of himself, for no matter how brave +a person may be he seldom cares to run the risk of losing his life.</p> + +<p>The prisoners had been ordered to keep to the back of the cave, but +after all but the guards had retired Captain Moore made bold enough to +walk carefully to the mouth of the place.</p> + +<p>"Hi, you want to keep back there," growled one of the guards, promptly +raising his rifle.</p> + +<p>"Don't be hard on us," pleaded the captain. "Let me get a little fresh +air. It's vile in the back of the cave."</p> + +<p>"Orders were to keep you out of sight," growled the second guard.</p> + +<p>"All right, I'll go back as soon as I've cleaned out my lungs."</p> + +<p>While the captain was speaking he was peering around sharply, trying to +locate the other desperadoes and ascertain what the chances of escape +really were.</p> + +<p>As he gazed first to one side and then the other, he caught sight of a +hand waving in the air. A second later he made out the head and +shoulders of old Benson, as the scout rose to his feet behind some +brushwood.</p> + +<p>The thought that the scout was at hand to assist them cheered the young +officer wonderfully, and he drew a deep breath of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>"Are you going back soon?" growled one of the guards.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered the captain. "But I say," he went on, "why can't we come +to terms?"</p> + +<p>"Don't want to make any terms with you," growled the other guard.</p> + +<p>"It might be better for you to do so."</p> + +<p>"We know our own business best, captain. You just go back as you was +ordered to do. If you don't——"</p> + +<p>"I don't feel safe in the cave, men, to tell the truth. What is that +pounding overhead?"</p> + +<p>"Pounding overhead?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Don't know of any pounding. Do you, Ike?"</p> + +<p>"Nary a bit," replied the other guard.</p> + +<p>By this time Joe and Darry were just behind the young officer.</p> + +<p>"Watch out," whispered Captain Moore. "Old Benson is outside, in the +bushes on the left."</p> + +<p>"Good for him!" whispered Joe joyfully.</p> + +<p>"What are you talking about?" demanded one of the guards.</p> + +<p>"I want to know about that pounding overhead," said Captain Moore. "I +don't want the roof to cave in on us."</p> + +<p>He spoke so decidedly that both of the guards were deceived.</p> + +<p>"Nobody is up there," said one of the two. "It must be some wild +animal."</p> + +<p>"Can't one of you go up and look?" asked the young officer.</p> + +<p>"You want the chance to get away," was the suspicious answer.</p> + +<p>"How can we get away, when we are unarmed and you have that rifle," went +on the captain, speaking loudly, for old Benson's benefit. "It won't +take you a minute to look."</p> + +<p>The men, however, refused to budge.</p> + +<p>"We'll stay right here," said one, and the other nodded affirmatively.</p> + +<p>In the meantime old Benson had crawled closer, until he was directly +behind the pair.</p> + +<p>Now of a sudden he leaped between them, and as quick as a flash caught +their rifles and twisted the weapons from their grasp.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus4" id="illus4"></a> +<img src="images/illus4.jpg" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3>"HE LEAPED BETWEEN THEM AND CAUGHT THEIR RIFLES."</h3> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<p>As the old scout did this, the young captain also leaped in, followed by +Joe and Darry.</p> + +<p>The guards struggled, but with four against them could do little or +nothing. One, however, had a powerful pair of lungs, and before he could +be stopped, set up a loud cry of alarm.</p> + +<p>"Come with me!" cried old Benson. "Be quick, or it will be too late!"</p> + +<p>He led the way to the wood where the horses were tethered, and the +captain, Joe, and Darry came close behind him.</p> + +<p>Hardly had they gotten away from the guards when the whole camp was in +alarm.</p> + +<p>"What's the trouble?" demanded Matt Gilroy, leaping to his feet and +catching up his rifle.</p> + +<p>"The prisoners have escaped!" answered one of the guards. "We were +attacked by some men from behind. There they go!"</p> + +<p>"Stop!" roared the leader of the desperadoes, and raised his rifle. But +before he could take aim our friends were behind the shelter of the +trees.</p> + +<p>It took but a few seconds to loosen the horses, and as the captain and +the two boys had long since relieved themselves of their bonds they were +soon in the saddle and following the old scout, who seemed to know the +way perfectly, despite the darkness.</p> + +<p>"It was lucky you came up, Benson!" cried Joe, as they dashed along.</p> + +<p>"Wait, we are not yet out of this trouble," answered Benson. "Hark! they +are following!"</p> + +<p>He was right. Gilroy and several of his men had rushed to their horses, +and were now coming along the forest trail at a good rate of speed.</p> + +<p>But their horses were no better than the animals our friends rode, so +the desperadoes did not succeed in cutting down the distance between the +two parties, and at last gave up the chase.</p> + +<p>"It has been a most stirring adventure from start to finish," said +Captain Moore after each had told his story. "And it brings to an end +this outing. I must now get to the fort without delay."</p> + +<p>"And I am perfectly willing to go along," said Darry. "There is no fun +in hunting in a country where the desperadoes are so thick."</p> + +<p>"This will open Colonel Fairfield's eyes," went on the young officer. "I +shouldn't be surprised if he organized another expedition against +Gilroy's gang and didn't let up on them until they were all either in +prison or shot down."</p> + +<p>"It's what they deserve," came from old Benson. "I'll go on such a hunt +with pleasure."</p> + +<p>Our friends continued in the saddle all night and until ten o'clock the +next morning. Then, tired and hot, they went into camp by a cooling +stream. Here they went fishing, and soon caught enough fish for dinner, +after which they took a nap lasting several hours.</p> + +<p>"And now for the fort!" cried Captain Moore; "and the sooner we get +there the better."</p> + +<p>The nap had done the boys a world of good, and as they rode along their +spirits rose so high that Darry proposed a race. Joe was willing, and +away they went, along the well-defined trail, before either the young +officer or the old scout could stop them.</p> + +<p>"They are full of life," said Joe's brother. "Let them go. We'll make +the fort to-night, even if they do tire the horses a bit."</p> + +<p>"It's all right if they don't get into trouble," answered Benson.</p> + +<p>On and on went the two lads, down something of a slope and then along a +level stretch. The bushes grew thick upon both sides, and here and there +were numerous wild flowers. At last they reached a glade rich with green +grass.</p> + +<p>Joe was slightly ahead when he came to a sudden halt.</p> + +<p>"Back, Darry!" he cried. "Get back behind the bushes."</p> + +<p>"What's up?" queried his cousin, as he brought his steed to a +standstill.</p> + +<p>"Buffaloes!"</p> + +<p>"Buffaloes! Where?"</p> + +<p>"Right around the cliff on our right. See, they are coming this way! +Here's luck."</p> + +<p>Joe was right; they had come most unexpectedly upon a herd of seven +buffaloes. The shaggy beasts were all large and powerful-looking. They +were not in the least alarmed, and came toward the boys at a slow but +steady walk.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<h3>SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE OX.</h3> + + +<p>"What shall we do, Joe; wait until your brother and old Benson come up?" +asked Darry, as they surveyed the approaching animals.</p> + +<p>"I suppose we ought to wait," answered Joe. "But if they take alarm, +they'll be off in double-quick order, I am afraid."</p> + +<p>Each of the boys brought around his rifle, which had been picked up on +leaving the desperadoes' rendezvous, and saw that it was ready for use.</p> + +<p>"If we could only signal to the others!" suggested Darry impatiently.</p> + +<p>"One of us might go back," began Joe, when he gave a sudden start. "They +see us! See, they are turning away!" he cried.</p> + +<p>Hardly had he spoken when Darry fired, aiming at the largest of the +buffaloes. Joe followed, with a second shot, aimed at the same beast. +Both bullets reached their mark, and the animal was hit in the breast +and in the right foreleg.</p> + +<p>"We hit him!" ejaculated Darry. "Let us fire at him again!" And he +started to reload with all speed.</p> + +<p>When struck the buffalo uttered a bellow of pain and went down on his +knees. But he quickly arose, and now came straight for the boys, his +head down, as if to gore them to death.</p> + +<p>Crack! It was Darry's rifle which spoke up, and the buffalo staggered, +hit on the head, a glancing blow, however, which did little damage.</p> + +<p>By this time Joe had reloaded, but he did not fire at once, hoping to +get a closer shot at the beast. In the meantime the others of the herd +had disappeared completely.</p> + +<p>Soon the buffalo was less than fifty yards off, and not daring to wait +longer Joe took steady aim and let drive. His rifle-barrel had been +pointed at one of those gleaming, bloodshot eyes, and the bullet sped +true, entering the brain of the beast. With a roar and a grunt the +buffalo went down, tearing up a great patch of grass in his fall.</p> + +<p>"Hi! what's all the shooting about?" The cry came from Benson, as he +rode down the trail at a breakneck speed, rifle ready for use.</p> + +<p>"A buffalo!" cried Darry.</p> + +<p>"A buffalo? Look out for yourselves."</p> + +<p>"Yes, take care," came from Captain Moore, who was behind the old scout.</p> + +<p>"We've fixed him," said Joe, not without a good deal of pardonable +pride.</p> + +<p>"Fixed him?" Old Benson looked out upon the glade. "By the great +Jehosophat!" he roared. "Gone and shot a buffalo all by your lone +selves! Or maybe he was dead when you got here?" he added suspiciously.</p> + +<p>"You wouldn't think he was dead, if you could have seen him come toward +us," said Darry.</p> + +<p>"But who shot him? I heard four shots."</p> + +<p>"And every one of 'em went into the buffalo," answered Joe. "Two for +Darry and two for myself."</p> + +<p>"But Joe finished him, with a shot in the eye," said Darry quickly.</p> + +<p>"But Darry hit him in the leg, and that lamed him," said Joe, just as +quickly. "I guess honors are even."</p> + +<p>"Certainly remarkable shooting," was Captain Moore's comment. "Old +hunters couldn't do better, could they, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"Not much better, captain. I never would have dreamed of it, boys. And +to think I couldn't get a smell of 'em when I was out looking 'em up," +Benson said, shaking his head dubiously.</p> + +<p>"This buffalo wasn't alone," said Darry. "The others went in that +direction. You might follow them up."</p> + +<p>"It wouldn't be any use now, lad. They are gone, and that's the end of +it."</p> + +<p>"We mustn't lose too much time," put in the young captain. "I must make +the fort to-night, no matter what comes."</p> + +<p>"But, Will, we can't leave this magnificent buffalo behind," pleaded his +brother. "Darry and I will want the skin, and we'll want to mount the +head and horns, eh, Darry?"</p> + +<p>"To be sure."</p> + +<p>"How long will it take to skin the beast, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"An hour and over, if I want to make a good job of it," was the slow +reply. "It's too nice a hide to ruin by quick cutting."</p> + +<p>"Supposing I ride ahead then, and you follow with the boys as soon as +you are ready?"</p> + +<p>This was agreed to, and in a minute the young officer was off once more, +urging his horse forward at the animal's best speed.</p> + +<p>"Now I can take my time," declared old Benson. "Sorry I aint got my +hunting-knife."</p> + +<p>"Where is it?"</p> + +<p>"It was lost in the shuffle with those desperadoes I put in the hole." +The old scout chuckled. "My! my! how they must love me for putting 'em +down there!"</p> + +<p>"They'll have it in for you when they get out," remarked Darry.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm not afraid, lad."</p> + +<p>The buffalo had fallen into something of a heap, and it took their +combined efforts to turn the huge carcass over. Then old Benson got out +his clasp-knife, sharpened the blade upon the leather of his boot, and +set to work, the boys assisting him as much as possible, which was not +much, since the process was entirely new to them.</p> + +<p>"That will be a load," said Joe, when they had the skin and a part of +the head free. "How much do they weigh, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"Close on to a hundred pounds."</p> + +<p>"And how shall we carry that load?"</p> + +<p>"We'll tie it up into something of a long bundle and take turns at +toting it behind our saddles. Of course we won't be able to move along +as fast as before, but that won't be necessary, now the captain has gone +ahead to break the news."</p> + +<p>The trail now led toward the river where Darry had almost lost his life +by being hit with the drifting tree. The path was uncertain in spots, +and they had to be careful for fear of getting into some boggy hole.</p> + +<p>"What a splendid place for a ranch home!" suggested Darry. "Benson, I am +surprised that there are so few cabins in this neighborhood."</p> + +<p>"There used to be quite a number through here, lad; but the Modoc and +other Indians burnt them all down. I suppose new settlers will come in, +now the Indians are behaving themselves."</p> + +<p>"But are they behaving themselves?" questioned Joe.</p> + +<p>"They are doing a good deal better than formerly, Joe. There is only one +old chief in this neighborhood who seems to want to cause trouble."</p> + +<p>"And who is that?"</p> + +<p>"White Ox. He is some sort of a relative to Sitting Bull, so I've been +told, and he won't give in that the white man is master of the +situation. He has tried to get his warriors to rise against us several +times, but so far he hasn't accomplished much."</p> + +<p>"Where is White Ox now?"</p> + +<p>"Over behind yonder mountain to the north. He is chief of a band that +numbers between a hundred and a hundred and fifty people. He himself is +one of the best Indian shots in the West."</p> + +<p>"It's a pity they can't become citizens as well as other folks," +remarked Darry.</p> + +<p>"That's the whole trouble, lad. The United States didn't treat them +right in the first place, and we are bound to suffer in consequence. But +in the end the Injun will be wiped out completely."</p> + +<p>As night came on, countless stars shone in the sky, making the trail +fairly light. Old Benson rode in advance, with Darry next and Joe +bringing up the rear.</p> + +<p>Presently the old hunter drew rein, and motioned the others to do the +same.</p> + +<p>"Somebody ahead," he said in a low voice. "Four or five men on hossback. +If I aint mistaken they're Injuns, too."</p> + +<p>"Indians!" exclaimed Joe. "Do they come this way often?"</p> + +<p>"No, lad. Fact is, they haven't any right over here, so close to the +fort. It's against Colonel Fairfield's rules."</p> + +<p>"Then what can they be doing here?"</p> + +<p>"That's for us to find out."</p> + +<p>Old Benson led the way to a side trail, and then into the shelter of a +number of trees.</p> + +<p>He quickly passed the pelt over to Darry.</p> + +<p>"Both of you stay here until I get back," he said. "I'm going to find +out what those redskins are up to."</p> + +<p>"You won't be gone long, will you?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"Don't expect to be gone over an hour at the most. If I aint back in two +hours, make up your mind something has happened. Then you'll have to get +back to the fort the best way you can," concluded the old scout.</p> + +<p>A moment later the darkness of the night hid him from their view, and +they were left alone in the bit of timberland.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<h3>A TRICK OF THE ENEMY.</h3> + + +<p>"I must say I don't fancy this much," observed Joe, after the sounds of +Benson's departure had lost themselves in the distance.</p> + +<p>"Nor do I like it, Joe," came from Darry, with a long-drawn sigh. "But I +guess we'll have to make the best of it."</p> + +<p>"With what was on that message my brother found in the cave, and what +Benson said about this Indian chief, it looks as if the folks at the +fort might have trouble in the near future."</p> + +<p>"That's true, too. I hope Will got through in safety."</p> + +<p>Dismounting, the two boys sat down under the trees to wait in the +darkness. The horses were glad enough of the rest, and fell to cropping +the short grass which showed itself in spots in the vicinity.</p> + +<p>Thus half an hour passed. The silence was oppressive, broken only by the +occasional note of a night bird or the dismal croaking of a frog in some +hollow and the answering squeak of a lizard.</p> + +<p>"Somebody is coming!" cried Joe at last, and both of the boys stood on +the defensive, rifles in hand. The party came closer and closer, and at +last they made out the form of the old scout. He was riding at the top +of his speed.</p> + +<p>"Quick! follow me!" he exclaimed, as he dashed up. "There is not a +moment to lose!"</p> + +<p>The boys needed no second bidding, and in a trice they were in the +saddle once more and riding after old Benson, who now took to another +trail leading somewhat to the south of that formerly pursued.</p> + +<p>"You saw the Indians?" questioned Joe, as they dashed on.</p> + +<p>"I did. White Ox is ahead, with sixty or seventy of his best warriors. +From what I could learn he and Lieutenant Carrol have had a fight, and +half a dozen of the soldiers were either killed or wounded. Now White Ox +is marching for the fort."</p> + +<p>"To attack it?"</p> + +<p>"I can't say about that, but I think he is going to hide in the +vicinity, to wait for the coming of the desperadoes."</p> + +<p>"And what of my brother?" questioned Joe anxiously. "Did he get through +all right?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing was said about the captain, lad. I suppose he got through."</p> + +<p>It was hard to talk while riding at such a rate of speed, and soon the +conversation came to an end. The horses now showed plain evidence of +their long journey, but each rider kept his steed at his best.</p> + +<p>It was after two o'clock in the morning when the fort came into view, +dark and silent in the midst of the plain surrounding it. Benson now +rode in advance.</p> + +<p>"Halt!" came the sudden command, while the scout was still a hundred +yards from the stockade. The command was loud and clear, but the speaker +was invisible.</p> + +<p>"It's all right, friend," answered the old scout. "It's me, Sam Benson. +Let me in, quick, I've news for the colonel."</p> + +<p>"All right, Benson," was the answer. "But who is that behind you?"</p> + +<p>"Joe Moore and Darry Germain. Is the colonel sleeping?"</p> + +<p>"The colonel is very sick."</p> + +<p>"Sick?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"What's the trouble?"</p> + +<p>"The surgeon can't make out exactly. He's in a sort of stupor, and they +can't rouse him."</p> + +<p>By this time the stockade gate was open, and all three of our friends +lost no time in entering the yard. Then the gate was closed and barred +again.</p> + +<p>"Has Captain Moore returned?" asked Joe, as soon as he could get the +guard's attention.</p> + +<p>"I haven't seen him."</p> + +<p>"How long have you been on duty?"</p> + +<p>"Came on about an hour ago."</p> + +<p>"Has Lieutenant Carrol come in?" came from Benson.</p> + +<p>"Not that I know of; reckon not," answered the guard.</p> + +<p>"Worse and worse!" groaned the old scout. "Who is in command here?"</p> + +<p>"Captain Lee. But he's about half sick, too."</p> + +<p>"It's a trick of the enemy!" cried Darry.</p> + +<p>"A trick?" queried the guard with interest.</p> + +<p>"Yes, a trick," put in Joe. "Benson, hadn't they better sound the +alarm?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I'll interview Captain Lee."</p> + +<p>No more was said, and, while the sentinel called the corporal of the +guard, the old scout hurried off to find the captain in command. With +him went Joe and Darry. Joe's heart was like a lump of lead, for he was +much concerned over the non-appearance of his brother. Had the captain +met the Indians and been killed or taken prisoner?</p> + +<p>Captain Lee was in a sound sleep, but quickly roused up when told that +an important message awaited him. He met the party in one of the living +rooms of the fort. His head was tied up in a wet towel, and his eyes +showed that he was suffering.</p> + +<p>"This is certainly a deep-laid plot," he said, when all had told their +story. "The desperadoes and Indians intend to combine in an attack on +the fort. Mose is undoubtedly that wily old half-breed who is still +alive and who is very thick with White Ox. But I didn't know he could +write."</p> + +<p>"But what about this money at the fort?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"The money is here, in a chest that is hidden away. It amounts to forty +thousand dollars in gold, and is the property of the Nevell Mining +Company. It was left for safe-keeping until Mr. Nevell could have it +transported to Denver. You see, Nevell is a brother-in-law to Colonel +Fairfield."</p> + +<p>"The colonel must be drugged," said Benson. "That's the reason he acts +so queerly."</p> + +<p>"I suppose so, and that is what has affected me, I presume," answered +Captain Lee. "Last night my head ached as if it would split open. We +must tell the surgeon of this. Perhaps he can then do something to +relieve Colonel Fairfield."</p> + +<p>The captain lost no time in issuing the necessary orders, and in a few +minutes the whole place was in alarm and the soldiers were on the watch +for the first appearance of the Indians.</p> + +<p>"My poor husband drugged!" cried Mrs. Fairfield, when she heard the +news. "What villains those Indians and desperadoes are! Doctor, can you +do nothing?"</p> + +<p>"I think I can, madam," answered the surgeon. "Much depends upon what +drugs were administered and how much the colonel has taken. Rest assured +I will do my best for him."</p> + +<p>Upon examination it was found that out of all the officers at the fort +only four were fit for duty, all the others being sick, either through +being drugged or otherwise. Of the privates not more than sixty-five +were in a condition to fight should an attack come.</p> + +<p>"And the worst of it is, the men won't know what to eat or drink after +this," said Captain Lee to Benson. "Who can tell what has been drugged? +Perhaps it's in the very bread we eat and the water we drink."</p> + +<p>Strict orders were given to the men to touch nothing until the surgeon +had passed upon it. Then the doctor got out his medicines to counteract +the drugs, and set to work to bring the colonel and the other sufferers +out of their stupor.</p> + +<p>Hour after hour went slowly by, and still Captain Moore did not return. +What had become of his brother, Joe could not imagine. He feared the +worst, and when morning came it was all he could do to keep back the +tears.</p> + +<p>"Don't take it so to heart, Joe," said Darry sympathetically. "It may be +all right."</p> + +<p>"But he said he was going to ride straight here—you heard him, Darry."</p> + +<p>"So I did, but he may have seen the Indians or met Lieutenant Carrol, +and that might have changed his plans. Anyway, I wouldn't worry too much +just yet."</p> + +<p>With the coming of daylight Captain Lee brought out his long-distance +glass and swept the surroundings of the fort with extreme care.</p> + +<p>"Some camp-fires are burning to the northward," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Any Injuns?" questioned old Benson laconically. He had been told to +come along to the top of the fort for consultation.</p> + +<p>"Nobody in sight, Benson."</p> + +<p>"Humph! Well, I don't calculate they are far off."</p> + +<p>"Nor I, from what you and the boys told me. How long will it take those +desperadoes to reach here?"</p> + +<p>"They ought to arrive this morning, if they are not with the Injuns +already."</p> + +<p>"All told, we have about seventy officers and men available for duty," +went on the captain thoughtfully. "What is worse, they must know how +greatly our garrison is reduced, since they have had that skunk of a +Mose do the drugging for them."</p> + +<p>"The Injuns number over sixty, and if there are thirty desperadoes, that +will give them a force of almost a hundred, or twice as many as we have, +captain. But then, we hold the fort. They can't come anywhere near us +without being cut down—if we set out to do it."</p> + +<p>"Of course. But White Ox may send off for more Indians—when he hears +how small the available garrison is."</p> + +<p>"Does he know much of affairs here?"</p> + +<p>"I am afraid he does. There were two Indians here yesterday, to lodge a +complaint against a miner who had stolen a horse from them. I think, +now, that the complaint was a blind, and the Indians were here merely to +size up the situation," concluded Captain Lee.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<h3>IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY.</h3> + + +<p>Little dreaming of all the adventures in store for him, Captain Moore +left the scene of the buffalo shooting and rode forth swiftly in the +direction of Fort Carson.</p> + +<p>He felt that he carried news of great importance and the sooner he +gained the fort the better. Should anything happen to Colonel Fairfield +the command of the post would fall upon himself, as next in rank.</p> + +<p>As he dashed along the trail, over hill and valley, he reviewed the +situation with care, and the more he thought of it, the more worried did +he become.</p> + +<p>"Something is going to happen—I can feel it in the air," he muttered.</p> + +<p>The thought had scarcely crossed his mind when something did happen, but +not exactly what he anticipated.</p> + +<p>A shadow fell across his path, and as he drew rein he found himself +confronted by several Indians.</p> + +<p>"White officer, stop!" cried the leader of the red men sternly.</p> + +<p>"Hullo! what do you want?" demanded the captain. The meeting was a +complete surprise.</p> + +<p>"Want to have a talk."</p> + +<p>"Who are you?"</p> + +<p>"Me Red Wolf, belong to White Ox tribe," returned the Indian with a +scowl.</p> + +<p>"And what are you doing out here at this time of night, Red Wolf?"</p> + +<p>"Indians on a big hunt. See buffalo yesterday."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I saw one of the buffaloes myself." Captain Moore paused, not +knowing how to go on. "You are pretty close to the fort."</p> + +<p>"Red Wolf and warriors get on the wrong trail," was the slow reply. "But +want to talk now. Come along."</p> + +<p>As the Indian concluded he caught the captain's steed by the bridle.</p> + +<p>"Let go the horse."</p> + +<p>"Want to talk to white officer."</p> + +<p>"You haven't any right to touch my horse."</p> + +<p>Hardly had the words been spoken when two Indians rushed up behind the +captain and dragged him to the ground.</p> + +<p>The fellows were large and powerful, and they disarmed him before he +could even fire a shot.</p> + +<p>Without further ado Captain Moore was forced to march along, between two +of the red men, while a third led his horse.</p> + +<p>A route around the rocks was taken, and presently they came to a dense +bit of timberland. In the midst of this was a clearing, and here was the +camp of some ten or a dozen Indians.</p> + +<p>The Indians at hand were a guard over several white soldiers, and to his +intense surprise the young captain recognized some of Lieutenant +Carrol's men.</p> + +<p>"What are you doing here?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Had a mix-up and came off second best——" began one of the soldiers, +when an Indian guard clapped a dirty hand over his mouth and ordered him +to be silent, under penalty of death.</p> + +<p>Then the captain was taken to another part of the glade, and here he was +made a close prisoner by being bound, hands and feet, to the trunk of a +blasted tree.</p> + +<p>Red Wolf wished to know what the captain had been doing away from the +fort.</p> + +<p>"I've been on a hunting expedition."</p> + +<p>"Alone?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Where are the others?"</p> + +<p>"Safe, by this time. What do you intend to do with me, Red Wolf?"</p> + +<p>"White Ox shall decide that," grunted the red man.</p> + +<p>"Then he is on this hunt, too?"</p> + +<p>"He is."</p> + +<p>"When will he be here?"</p> + +<p>"Soon."</p> + +<p>"Don't you know that I am an army officer, and that you are laying up a +good deal of trouble for yourself by making me a prisoner?"</p> + +<p>"The white man has not treated the Indians right."</p> + +<p>"This is no way to redress wrongs, Red Wolf. Why don't you go to Colonel +Fairfield and make a complaint? He will send the story to the Great +Father at Washington."</p> + +<p>"The Great Father will not listen. We have sent many complaints—as the +white captain knows."</p> + +<p>"He will listen—if the complaint is a just one. The trouble is, the +Indians will not obey Colonel Fairfield's orders."</p> + +<p>"And why should they obey the white man? Is not White Ox their chief?"</p> + +<p>"That is true. But the land is now the white man's, and the Indians must +obey the Great Father at Washington, or in the end it will go hard with +them."</p> + +<p>"Not so!" cried Red Wolf savagely. "In the end the white man will be +driven eastward, where he belongs. No one shall rule in these mountains +but the red man. White Ox and the other great chiefs have spoken."</p> + +<p>"What! you are going on the warpath?"</p> + +<p>"The hatchet may be dug up, if the white man will not listen to the red +man."</p> + +<p>"I know what the trouble is, Red Wolf. Matt Gilroy and that scoundrelly +half-breed, Mose, have set you up to this. They have filled your ears +with false stories about our cruelty and about much money at the fort."</p> + +<p>By the look on the Indian's face the young officer saw that he had +struck the truth, at least in part.</p> + +<p>But the red man would talk no more, fearing he had already said too +much, and he stalked off, warning a guard to be careful and not let the +captain escape.</p> + +<p>When left to himself, Captain Moore's reflections were very bitter.</p> + +<p>"If the redskins are out in force they'll probably fall in with Benson +and the boys," he told himself. "And if they do there will surely be +trouble. Benson won't allow them to take him alive, and that will mean a +good deal of shooting all around."</p> + +<p>He listened attentively for shots in the distance, but none came, and +this caused him to be more perplexed than ever.</p> + +<p>Just before daybreak several additional Indians came in, and the young +officer and the soldiers were told to march. Their feet were unfastened, +but their hands were not, and they were forced to move with the red men +on all sides of them, and each of the enemy fully armed and ready to +shoot them down at the first show of resistance or escape.</p> + +<p>From one of the privates Captain Moore learned that Lieutenant Carrol +and the other soldiers had escaped, but what had become of them nobody +knew.</p> + +<p>The little body of whites and Indians marched over a mountain trail for +fully four hours. The step was a lively one, and when the party came to +a halt even the soldiers used to a hard march were tired out.</p> + +<p>"Those redskins can walk the legs off of anything I know of," was the +way one old soldier expressed himself. "They are like some of these wiry +mustangs who don't know the meaning of rest."</p> + +<p>"This region is strange to me, Peck. Do you recognize it?"</p> + +<p>"I do, Captain Moore. Yonder is Henebeck Fall, and this trail leads to +Silver Gulch."</p> + +<p>"Then we are about six miles from nowhere in particular."</p> + +<p>"You've struck it, captain. Why they brought us to such a forsaken spot +is more than I can guess—unless they are going to shoot us down like +dogs and leave us for the wolves to feed on. The wolves are thick around +here, so Leeson told me."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe they'll shoot us down. They are not desperate enough +yet. But they may do it, if they attack the fort and lose heavily. That +will open their eyes, and make them as mad as hornets."</p> + +<p>A little later Silver Gulch, a wide opening in the rocks of the +mountain, was gained, and here the soldiers were again made fast to +several trees. Then the Indians prepared their midday meal. They took +their time about eating, and did not offer the white men anything until +they had finished.</p> + +<p>"They don't intend to treat us any too good," was Peck's comment. +"Captain, can't we fix it to get away?"</p> + +<p>"I intend to escape if I can manage it," returned the young officer. +"But we must be careful, for they are fully armed, and they watch us +like so many foxes."</p> + +<p>Slowly the afternoon wore away, and with the coming of night it grew +darker than usual, as though a storm was brewing.</p> + +<p>"A storm ought to help us," said the captain.</p> + +<p>Some of the Indians had departed, so that now the guard consisted of but +four warriors. These red men walked around each prisoner, seeing to it +that all the bonds were tight.</p> + +<p>As the men passed Peck the old soldier watched his chance, and, unknown +to the red men, caught a hunting-knife from the belt of one of the +number.</p> + +<p>This knife was concealed up his sleeve, and then the soldier waited for +his chance to use the blade, which was as sharp as a razor.</p> + +<p>The Indians decided that two of their number should sleep, while the +other two remained on guard. Soon those to retire turned in, while the +others sat down to smoke their pipes.</p> + +<p>This was Peck's opportunity, and with a slash of the hunting-knife he +released his hands. A moment later the lariat around his ankles was +likewise severed.</p> + +<p>Watching his chance, Peck passed the knife to Captain Moore, and then +went back to his position by the tree as if still fastened.</p> + +<p>Thus the knife was passed from soldier to soldier until all were +liberated.</p> + +<p>All told, the party numbered six, and nobody was armed, excepting Peck, +to whom the hunting-knife had been returned.</p> + +<p>Motioning to the others to keep quiet, Captain Moore picked up a stick +of wood lying near and threw it in some bushes a distance away.</p> + +<p>This made considerable noise, and instantly the two guards gazed in the +direction.</p> + +<p>"A wolf, perhaps," said one of the Indians, in his native tongue, and +walked over to the bushes. His companion started to follow, when Captain +Moore leaped upon him and bore him to the earth.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<h3>A PANTHER IN CAMP.</h3> + + +<p>As Captain Moore fell upon one of the Indians, Peck the private stole +after the guard who had walked toward the bushes. The other soldiers +jumped to where the remaining Indians were sleeping, to gain possession +of the firearms.</p> + +<p>The Indian the captain had tackled was a young but powerful brave, and +he put up a hard fight to release himself. But he had been taken +unawares, and after he was on the ground the captain saw to it that he +did not get up.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the Indian near the bushes turned just in time to see +Peck raise the hunting-knife. Crack! went the red man's rifle, and the +bullet clipped the soldier's ear. The shot was so close that to the day +of his death Peck carried in his face some traces of the burnt powder.</p> + +<p>The shot was the last the Indian ever fired, for in the midst of the +smoke Peck hurled himself at the warrior, and a second later down came +the hunting-knife, piercing the red man's back and entering his right +lung. The stroke was a fatal one, and before the fighting in the glade +came to an end the Indian had breathed his last.</p> + +<p>When the sleeping Indians awoke they could not for the moment realize +what was going on. In his bewilderment one leaped up and rushed at a +soldier, who promptly laid him low by a heavy blow from a rifle stock, +which almost cracked the warrior's skull. Seeing this, the other brave +became frightened and ran for the bushes.</p> + +<p>"Don't let him escape!" cried Captain Moore, who was still holding his +man down.</p> + +<p>At once two of the soldiers ran after the fleeing Indian, and presently +two rifle shots rang out, followed by a scream from the red man.</p> + +<p>"He's done for," said one of the soldiers, after the smoke had cleared +away. "He has gone to his happy hunting-ground."</p> + +<p>After this turn of affairs it did not take the soldiers long to make +prisoners of the two Indians who remained alive. These fellows were in +truth much frightened, but tried their best to suppress their feelings.</p> + +<p>From one of the Indians, Captain Moore learned that more Indians were +expected early the next morning.</p> + +<p>"That's all right," said he. "They will come in time to release you and +save you from starvation."</p> + +<p>"Going to tie 'em up, captain?" asked Peck.</p> + +<p>"Yes. There is nothing else to do."</p> + +<p>"Better shoot 'em."</p> + +<p>"I can't shoot them in cold blood, Peck. That would not be human."</p> + +<p>"The wretches don't deserve to live, captain. The Indians and those +desperadoes are plotting to wipe out everybody left at the fort."</p> + +<p>"I know that. Still, I cannot bring myself to take their lives—and we +can't stop to take them along as prisoners. The sooner we get back to +the fort the better."</p> + +<p>"If we can get back," put in another soldier.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe the fort is surrounded just yet," returned the young +officer.</p> + +<p>"But if it is?"</p> + +<p>"Then, perhaps, it will be better for us to be out than in."</p> + +<p>"You wouldn't desert the crowd at the fort, would you?"</p> + +<p>"You know me better than that, Gorman. We might be able to ride to the +next fort and obtain re-enforcements."</p> + +<p>"That's so, captain! I didn't think of that."</p> + +<p>Leaving the dead Indians in the bushes and the others tied to the trees, +the captain and his companions now lost no time in striking out for the +fort.</p> + +<p>Fortunately, Peck was well acquainted with every foot of the territory +to be covered, and he led the way by a route which was fairly easy and +as direct as could be expected, considering the wild region to be +covered.</p> + +<p>As he hurried along, the young captain's thoughts were busy. Where were +Joe, Darry, and Benson, and how were things going at the fort?</p> + +<p>"The Indians are not so much to be blamed as the desperadoes," he said. +"They have some wrongs, although they are more fancied than real. But +the desperadoes ought all to be either shot down or placed under +arrest."</p> + +<p>"Right you are," returned Gorman. "This district will never prosper +until the desperadoes are cleaned out."</p> + +<p>It was not long before the party began to grow hungry, and they had to +halt for an hour, to prepare some birds which one of the number had +brought down with a gun.</p> + +<p>All the time they were eating, one of the soldiers remained on guard, +for they were fearful a band of Indians might come up unawares to +surprise them. But not a red man or desperado showed himself.</p> + +<p>Nightfall found them still sixteen miles from the fort, and unable to +walk further.</p> + +<p>"We will camp out where we are," said Captain Moore. "It is useless to +think of covering the distance in the dark. Besides, we might fall into +some trap."</p> + +<p>A storm had been threatening, but now the clouds passed and the night +proved clear and pleasant. It was decided that two men should remain on +guard at a time, each taking a turn of three hours.</p> + +<p>The young captain slept from nine o'clock until three in the morning. +Then he awoke with the feeling that further sleep was out of the +question. Getting up, he walked to a nearby brook, intending to wash up +and obtain a needed drink.</p> + +<p>While Captain Moore was in the vicinity of the brook something stirring +in the bushes attracted his attention.</p> + +<p>"Carwell, did you see that?" he asked, of the guard who was nearest to +him.</p> + +<p>"See what, captain?"</p> + +<p>"That thing in yonder bushes."</p> + +<p>"I see nothing, sir."</p> + +<p>"Something is moving there. Come here and look."</p> + +<p>The private did as commanded, and both gazed steadily into the bushes.</p> + +<p>"By Jove!" exclaimed the young officer at length, "Do you see what it is +now, Carwell?"</p> + +<p>"I do not, captain."</p> + +<p>"It's a panther, unless I am greatly mistaken."</p> + +<p>"Where?"</p> + +<p>"Lying on the fallen tree, behind that tall bush," and Captain Moore +pointed with his hand.</p> + +<p>As he did this the panther arose suddenly, then crouched down as if to +make a leap at them.</p> + +<p>"Shoot!" ordered the captain, and as quickly as the private could raise +his rifle he fired. But his aim was poor, and the bullet flew a foot +over the panther's head.</p> + +<p>"Missed, hang the luck!" muttered Carwell.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had the words left his lips, when the panther made a fierce +leap and landed directly at the feet of the astonished pair. The beast +was evidently very hungry, or it would not have attacked human beings in +this semi-light of the early dawn.</p> + +<p>Full of fear, Carwell staggered back, with his smoking rifle still in +his hand.</p> + +<p>The panther growled and switched its tail from side to side. The rifle +shot had filled it with wonder, and it did not know what to do next.</p> + +<p>"Be careful—he is going to take another leap!" cried the young captain.</p> + +<p>He was right; the panther was now preparing for another spring. Before +Carwell could get out of the way, the beast came on, pinning the +private to the earth.</p> + +<p>As Carwell went down the whole camp roused up, and the second guard came +up on the double quick.</p> + +<p>"What's up, captain?" he sang out.</p> + +<p>"Shoot the panther!" answered the young officer. "Quick, or you'll be +too late. Don't hit Carwell."</p> + +<p>Crack! the rifle spoke up, and the beast was hit fairly and squarely in +the side. At this it let out a blood-curdling scream of pain. It had +caught Carwell by the arm, but now it released its hold.</p> + +<p>"A panther!" roared one of the old soldiers. "And a big one. Git your +guns, boys! He aint no beast to fool with, I can tell you that!"</p> + +<p>Those who had guns ran for them. But in the meantime the panther turned +around, as if to retreat.</p> + +<p>Then, of a sudden, it seemed to catch sight of Captain Moore, and with a +snarl of rage it threw itself upon the young officer, and both went over +with a loud splash into the brook.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<h3>THE SKIRMISH IN THE BRUSH.</h3> + + +<p>Up to the time the panther had turned upon him, the young officer had +thought but little of his own safety, being concerned chiefly about +Carwell, who was flat on his back, and who looked as if he as going to +be chewed up by this wild, lean, and hungry beast of the forest.</p> + +<p>But now Captain Moore found himself attacked, and as he went over into +the brook he realized that he was in the most perilous position he had +yet encountered. Facing Indians and desperadoes was nothing compared to +facing this beast, that seemed bent upon his destruction.</p> + +<p>The spot where the young officer struck the brook was five or six feet +deep, and as the panther came down on top of him he went straight to the +bottom.</p> + +<p>The beast was also submerged, but not for long. Panthers, although they +can swim, do not like the water, and this one lost no time in coming to +the surface to get air. Then it let out another scream of pain, while +the bullet wound in its side dyed the brook red.</p> + +<p>As the panther came up the young captain tried to do the same. But the +first thing he encountered was the beast's fierce claws, and he received +a deep and painful scratch in his left shoulder. Then he went down +again, and tried to come up further down the stream. But unfortunately +the panther moved in the same direction.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the other soldiers came up to the edge of the brook. +They realized their captain's peril, and as soon as the panther showed +itself two of them blazed away, one hitting the beast in the back and +the other landing a bullet in the panther's neck.</p> + +<p>The fury of the animal was now intense, and whirling around it lashed +the water of the brook into a perfect foam. Then it leaped for the +opposite shore, and made a break for the underbrush. Before anybody +could fire again it was gone.</p> + +<p>When Captain Moore regained the surface of the brook willing hands +helped him out.</p> + +<p>"Hurt?" questioned Peck anxiously.</p> + +<p>"A little—on the shoulder," was the answer, with a gasp. "Where is the +beast?"</p> + +<p>"Got away in yonder bushes, sir. That's a nasty dig. You had better let +me bind it up."</p> + +<p>"Carwell, how are you?"</p> + +<p>"The beast nipped me in the arm," answered the private, trying to +suppress a groan. "By George, but he was an ugly one!"</p> + +<p>"That's right," put in another soldier. "You can be thankful you wasn't +chewed up."</p> + +<p>A brief search revealed the fact that the panther had left the vicinity, +and then the others set to work to bind up the wounds the captain and +Carwell had sustained.</p> + +<p>"We had better move on now," said the young officer, when the hurts had +been attended to. "If there are Indians or desperadoes around they must +certainly have heard those shots, and they will be wondering what they +mean."</p> + +<p>They marched on in the gloom, and did not halt until the sun was showing +itself over the hills to the eastward. They had now gained a rise of +ground from which with a field-glass the fort might have been seen. But +the young captain's glass was gone—confiscated, as already told, by +those who had first attacked him.</p> + +<p>"We will draw closer with caution," said the young officer. "We don't +want to walk into any trap."</p> + +<p>Less than a mile was covered, when Peck, who had been sent out in +advance, came back and called for silence.</p> + +<p>"Some Indians are ahead," he said.</p> + +<p>"How many of them?" questioned Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"Not less than a dozen or fifteen, captain. I counted eleven, and heard +some talking that I couldn't see."</p> + +<p>"Where are they?"</p> + +<p>"Down behind where the brook flows over those sawtooth rocks. We were +out there fishing last summer."</p> + +<p>"I know the spot you mean. What are the redskins doing?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing in particular. I overheard one say to another that he expected +White Ox along before sundown."</p> + +<p>"They must be an advance guard of the tribe, then," returned the young +officer thoughtfully. "Did any of them see you?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think they did."</p> + +<p>But in this Peck was mistaken, for scarcely had the soldiers started to +walk around the spot where the Indians were encamped, when a savage +war-whoop rang out, followed by half a dozen shots.</p> + +<p>The first round was a deadly one, killing two of the men and wounding +Peck in the side. A bullet likewise grazed Captain Moore's shoulder.</p> + +<p>"To cover!" shouted the young officer, as soon as he could speak. "The +Indians are on us!"</p> + +<p>He had a gun in his hand, and as he gave the command he leveled it at +the leader of the party, he who had killed one of the soldiers. Captain +Moore's aim was true, and the Indian fell lifeless over the very body of +the man he had slain.</p> + +<p>By this time the other Indians were coming up, and all the soldiers +could do was to take to the nearest cover, as the captain had ordered. +The warwhoops continued, and shots were fired from several directions.</p> + +<p>Scarcely knowing whether he was hit or not, Captain Moore dashed into +the midst of some brushwood, and not far away from him came Peck. The +latter had broken his rifle over the head of one of the red men, and now +advanced with the hunting-knife which was still in his possession. The +young captain held a rifle, but just now had no time in which to reload +the weapon.</p> + +<p>"They are after us hot-like!" cried Peck, after several hundred feet had +been covered.</p> + +<p>The private's breath came short and sharp, and now for the first Captain +Moore saw how he was suffering.</p> + +<p>"You are wounded, Peck."</p> + +<p>"That's right, captain."</p> + +<p>"You can't run any more."</p> + +<p>"I've got to run," muttered Peck, between his set teeth. "They'll be +on—oh!—on us in another minute."</p> + +<p>"Give me your arm—I'll help you along."</p> + +<p>The private held out his hand, then gave a pitch, and, before the young +officer could catch him, sank on the grass insensible.</p> + +<p>Captain Moore's heart leaped into his throat, for he had known Peck for +years, and the two were very friendly. He listened, and heard a distant +shot. Evidently the Indians were not yet coming in that direction. They +would first hunt down the others, providing they were not already slain.</p> + +<p>Bending down, the young officer took Peck in his strong arms and threw +the private over his shoulder. The weight was considerable, and made him +stagger.</p> + +<p>"I've got to carry him, somehow!" he muttered. "Heaven give me strength +to do it!"</p> + +<p>The brushwood was thick ahead, but there was a sort of trail, made by +wild animals, and he pursued this until he came to a brook. Then to keep +the Indians from following them, should they come in that direction, he +followed the brook for a hundred yards or more. At last he reached a +point where the banks of the brook were rocky, and here he came out, and +crawled over the rocks. Not far off was an opening between two large +bowlders, and here he sank down, too exhausted to take another step.</p> + +<p>It was half an hour before Peck came to his senses. In the meantime the +captain had obtained some water, washed the private's wound and bound it +up in bandages torn from his shirt. The loss of blood had made Peck +light-headed.</p> + +<p>"Keep them off!" he murmured. "Keep them off! They want to bore a hole +in my side. Keep them off!"</p> + +<p>"Be quiet, Peck, you are safe," answered the young captain soothingly. +"You've been wounded, that's the trouble," but the private continued to +rave for some time, when he relaxed into a stupor.</p> + +<p>With strained ears Captain Moore waited for the appearance of friends or +enemies, but nobody came up the brook. Once he heard two shots far to +the northward, but whether fired by the soldiers or the Indians he could +not tell.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid it's been a regular slaughter," he mused sadly. "And our +getting away was a miracle," and this surmise proved correct, for, as +was afterward proven, all the others of the party were slain within an +hour after the surprise occurred.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXV" id="CHAPTER_XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<h3>A LUCKY MEETING.</h3> + + +<p>"Captain, where am I?"</p> + +<p>"In the woods with me, Peck."</p> + +<p>"What has happened?"</p> + +<p>"Don't you remember? The Indians surprised us, and you were shot in the +side."</p> + +<p>The brow of the wounded soldier contracted for a moment, and then he +drew a long and painful breath.</p> + +<p>"Ah, yes, I remember now. Are we alone?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"And what of the others, captain?"</p> + +<p>"I am afraid they have either been shot down or taken prisoners. Poor +Carwell and Leeds I know are dead."</p> + +<p>"It was a nasty surprise, wasn't it? I was sure they hadn't seen me."</p> + +<p>"Those Indians are sly, Peck. They never let on until they are fully +ready. We can be thankful that we escaped."</p> + +<p>"How long have we been here?"</p> + +<p>"The best part of the day. I carried you along the brook and to here, +and I haven't dared to go any further. Those Indians can't be far off."</p> + +<p>"It was good of you to do that for me, captain," said the private +gratefully.</p> + +<p>"I know you would have done as much for me, Peck. What I am worried +about is what we are to do next."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps you had better wait till dark, and then sneak to the fort."</p> + +<p>"How do you feel?"</p> + +<p>"Weak, captain, weak as a rag."</p> + +<p>"I shan't leave you, Peck."</p> + +<p>"But you ought to try to save yourself."</p> + +<p>"We can both try to do that, when you are stronger."</p> + +<p>Slowly the day wore along until night was once more on the pair. Peck +had tried to stand up, but the effort had proved a dismal failure.</p> + +<p>"It's no use," he murmured. "I reckon I'm a fit subject for the +hospital," and he gave a sickly grin.</p> + +<p>The night was one Captain Moore never forgot. He was hungry, but there +was nothing at hand with which to satisfy the cravings of the inner man. +Peck's mind began to ramble again, and once he struggled violently, +thinking he was fighting with an Indian, who was trying to tear out his +side.</p> + +<p>With the coming of dawn the young officer felt that matters were growing +desperate and that he must do something. He determined to go on a short +exploring tour, leaving the soldier where he lay.</p> + +<p>"I'll be back inside of half an hour," he said. "Make yourself as +comfortable as possible while I am gone."</p> + +<p>"Don't desert me!" groaned Peck. "Promise to come back, +captain—promise!" he pleaded, and the young officer promised.</p> + +<p>On the opposite side of the brook was a series of rocks leading to the +top of rather a high hill, and Captain Moore had an idea that from this +eminence he could obtain a faint view of the fort and its surroundings.</p> + +<p>Half of the rocks were passed when he came to a sudden halt. A low groan +ahead had reached his ears. As he stopped and listened the groan was +repeated.</p> + +<p>"That sounds familiar," he thought. "I've heard that before. But where?"</p> + +<p>At last he made up his mind that the sounds came from some wild animal +that was wounded, and plucking up courage he moved forward again, but +with his rifle before him, ready to shoot at the slightest provocation.</p> + +<p>"The panther—and dying!"</p> + +<p>The young officer was right. There on a shelf of rocks lay the wounded +beast, its breath coming short and heavy, and its eyes letting out a +glassy stare that caused the captain to shiver in spite of himself.</p> + +<p>At the sight of a human being the panther tried to rise. But the effort +was too much for it, and it sank down, groaning with pain, in a pool of +blood which had formed.</p> + +<p>At first Captain Moore thought to finish by putting a bullet through its +head, but then he remembered that ammunition was scarce and lowered his +rifle.</p> + +<p>"He'll be dead by the time I get back," he thought, and continued on his +way up the mountain side.</p> + +<p>At last the top was gained, and he looked around eagerly. At first only +the plain far below met his view, but presently he made out a spot which +he knew must be the fort. But all was in a blue haze, and no details +could be distinguished.</p> + +<p>Having spent quarter of an hour on the mountain top he picked his way +back to where he had left the panther. The creature had now breathed its +last, and lay stiffened out on the rocky ledge.</p> + +<p>"I must have something to eat, and so must Peck," he said to himself. +"Panther steaks may be tough, but they will be better than nothing. +I'll go back for the hunting-knife and cut off as much meat as we'll be +likely to need for a couple of days."</p> + +<p>When he reached Peck's side he found the soldier sleeping quietly, and +did not disturb him. Going back, he cut off a generous slice of the +panther meat, leaving the rest to the wild beasts.</p> + +<p>The captain hated to build a fire, fearing it would attract the +attention of the enemy, but he did not wish to eat the meat raw, and +presently, having no matches, shot his gun into the midst of some dry +leaves. By this means he soon had a blaze, which he fed with the driest +wood he could find, thus avoiding a great cloud of smoke. Over the blaze +he cooked the steak, which was soon done to a turn.</p> + +<p>When Peck awoke he felt stronger, and readily partook of the meal +brought to him, washing down the meat with some water from the brook.</p> + +<p>"What do you calculate to do now, captain?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"From the top of yonder hill I can see the fort in the distance," +answered the young officer. "But how to get to it is a question. It +would be a hard enough journey as it is, without having to be on guard +against Indians and desperadoes."</p> + +<p>"Better leave me here, and go it alone."</p> + +<p>"No, I shan't desert you, Peck. We'll see the thing through together."</p> + +<p>"But the Indians might come down on us."</p> + +<p>"We've got to run that risk. The question is, can you walk at all?"</p> + +<p>For reply Peck got up on his feet. At first he swayed around a little, +but presently steadied himself.</p> + +<p>"I'm good for a little distance, captain, but I don't reckon to go into +any walking match just yet."</p> + +<p>"Then we'll go ahead. As soon as you feel played out, don't hesitate to +say so."</p> + +<p>Captain Moore carried the rifle, hunting-knife, and what was left of the +meat, and also insisted upon having the private lean on his arm. In this +fashion two miles were covered by noon, when they came to a rest under +the shade of a big tree. Peck was pale, and showed plainly that the +exertion had done him no good.</p> + +<p>"Hardest walking I ever did," he admitted, as he stretched himself at +full length. It was his will-power alone that had kept him up.</p> + +<p>"Well, we are gaining," said Captain Moore cheerfully. "Three miles more +will see us through."</p> + +<p>"If the enemy don't gobble us in the meantime."</p> + +<p>"The Indians are nowhere in sight."</p> + +<p>"They won't be showing themselves if they can help it. They spring on +us——Hark!"</p> + +<p>Peck broke off short, and both listened.</p> + +<p>"Somebody is coming this way!" whispered the young officer. "Come, we +must get out of sight!"</p> + +<p>He took the wounded soldier by the hand, and with all speed the pair +crept into some brushwood behind the big tree. In the meantime the +foot-steps of the unknown party came closer.</p> + +<p>As the man came into view, Captain Moore let out a shout which was full +of joy.</p> + +<p>"Hank Leeson! How glad I am to see you!"</p> + +<p>The old hunter started around and drew up his gun. Then the weapon +dropped, and he ran forward.</p> + +<p>"Captain Moore!" he ejaculated. "Hang me ef I aint glad to set eyes on +ye! Who is that with you?"</p> + +<p>"Private Peck of Company B. We've had a fight with the Indians, and a +number of the soldiers were killed."</p> + +<p>"The Injuns are on the warpath, along with the desperadoes under Matt +Gilroy," returned Leeson. "I got the word from Sam Benson early this +mornin'."</p> + +<p>"And where was Benson?"</p> + +<p>"Out among the hills, a-lookin' fer you."</p> + +<p>"And what of my brother, and my cousin? Have you heard anything of +them?"</p> + +<p>"They are safe at the fort."</p> + +<p>"Thank Heaven for that!"</p> + +<p>"I see ye'er both of ye wounded," went on Leeson, as he came closer.</p> + +<p>"My wound is not much. But Peck's is bad. I hardly knew how I was going +to get him to the fort. Are the Indians or desperadoes around?"</p> + +<p>"They are, captain—but whar is jest now the conundrum. Captain +Lee—he's in command now—thinks there's a big plot on foot ter wipe out +the fort."</p> + +<p>"He is right. But Colonel Fairfield—what of him? Did they drug him?"</p> + +<p>"They did, captain. But it's queer you know of all this."</p> + +<p>"Then Joe didn't tell you I was with him at the cave?"</p> + +<p>"I didn't have time to hear the whole story. Benson was coming out, and +I came with him. Now, as you're found, I reckon I had better go back +with you," went on Hank Leeson.</p> + +<p>"By all means, for we'll have to take turns in supporting Peck."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later the march for the fort was taken up. It was a +tedious journey, and there were times when the young captain felt as if +it would never come to an end. But at last they came within sight of the +stockade and the big flag floating so proudly to the breeze, and then +several came rushing out to meet them, and their hard-ships, for the +time being, came to an end.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<h3>THE ENEMIES WITHIN THE FORT.</h3> + + +<p>"Oh, I'm so glad to see you again, Will!" was the greeting which Joe +gave his brother. "We were almost certain either the Indians or +desperadoes had fallen upon you and killed you."</p> + +<p>"Well, we did have some hot work," answered the young captain modestly. +"Are you all right?"</p> + +<p>"I am."</p> + +<p>"And you, Darry?"</p> + +<p>"I'm first-class," answered the cousin. "But I can tell you, Will, there +is trouble ahead."</p> + +<p>"I know that, Darry. I must see Colonel Fairfield at once."</p> + +<p>"He is very ill. The surgeon can do hardly anything for him. He says he +has not the right drugs to reach such a dose as the colonel has +swallowed."</p> + +<p>"That's too bad."</p> + +<p>By this time Captain Lee was at hand, and the two officers exchanged +reports. Nothing had been heard concerning Lieutenant Carrol. The +command of the fort now fell upon Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>As soon as possible the young commander went in to see his superior. He +found Colonel Fairfield very weak and in no condition to talk upon +military matters. He took the young captain's hand, and said feebly:</p> + +<p>"You must do your best, captain, do your best. Defend the place to the +last."</p> + +<p>"I will, Colonel Fairfield," answered the young officer. "And I trust +you recover soon."</p> + +<p>That day and the next passed without incident of a special nature. Sick +and wounded were cared for by the surgeon, and a detachment went out, +accompanied by Sam Benson and Hank Leeson, to look for any of the +soldiers who had been attacked by the Indians or desperadoes and who +might still be alive.</p> + +<p>When this party returned they brought in the bodies of two soldiers that +had fallen.</p> + +<p>"The Indians are gathering in force," said old Benson, who had been +right among them in the darkness. "There are now over a hundred and +twenty of them."</p> + +<p>"And what of the desperadoes?" asked Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"The desperadoes number twenty-six," answered Hank Leeson. "I counted +noses myself. Matt Gilroy is a reg'lar captain over 'em an' has 'em +drilled like a company o' sharpshooters—an' I reckon thet's wot they +are, consarn 'em!"</p> + +<p>"Then the enemy, all told, numbers about a hundred and fifty," mused the +young captain.</p> + +<p>"How many men here fit for duty to-day, captain?" came from the old +scout.</p> + +<p>"Not over forty, including the cooks and stable help, Benson. All the +others are on the sick list—and some of them are pretty bad."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps the crowd outside are a-waitin' till ye all git sick," +suggested Leeson with a scowl. "'Taint fair fightin', is it? They ought +all to be hung!"</p> + +<p>"I must do my best," said Captain Moore gravely. "I can do no more."</p> + +<p>As the day wore along and two additional soldiers were taken sick, he +decided to send a messenger to Fort Prescott, a hundred and sixty miles +away, for assistance.</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson knew every foot of the territory, and was chosen for the +mission. Benson was more than willing to go, but Captain Moore told him +to remain where he was.</p> + +<p>"If the enemy attack us you'll have to be our right-hand man, Benson," +he said. Then he added: "I want to talk to you after Leeson is gone."</p> + +<p>Since coming to the fort Captain Moore had been watching two old +soldiers very closely.</p> + +<p>These soldiers were named Moses Bicker and Jack Drossdell. Their +reputations were not of the best, and the black marks against them were +numerous.</p> + +<p>Some time before, the young captain had heard that Bicker came of a +family of Colorado desperadoes and that he had joined the army during a +spasm of reformation.</p> + +<p>The actions of the pair did not suit Captain Moore in the least, and +that night he took it upon himself to watch them more closely than ever.</p> + +<p>In the darkness he saw Bicker make his way to the stable, and to that +spot, a little later, Drossdell followed.</p> + +<p>"Something is in the wind, and I'm going to find out what it is," he +mused, and watching his opportunity he passed into the stable +unobserved.</p> + +<p>At first he could hear nothing but the movements of the horses, but +presently came a low murmur from one corner of the loft.</p> + +<p>Cautiously the young officer climbed the ladder and stepped into the +hay.</p> + +<p>Here he could hear the conversation between Bicker and Drossdell quite +plainly.</p> + +<p>"They never suspected the butter," he heard Bicker say. "It tastes a +little strong, but they would rather have it that way than have none, +and the same way with the condensed milk."</p> + +<p>"When shall we give the signal to the boys?" came from Drossdell.</p> + +<p>"Not yet. There will be more of them sick by to-morrow night," replied +Bicker.</p> + +<p>More of the same sort of talk followed, until the young captain became +fully convinced that Bicker and Drossdell were in league with the +desperadoes, and that they had been using some drugs in the butter, +milk, and other articles consumed at the fort, in order to make the +soldiers sick.</p> + +<p>As soon as he realized the importance of his discovery Captain Moore +went below.</p> + +<p>A corporal's guard was called out and sent over to the stable, and when +Bicker and Drossdell came below they were placed under arrest.</p> + +<p>"What's this for?" demanded Bicker, putting on a bold front. Drossdell +had nothing to say, and trembled so he could scarcely stand.</p> + +<p>"You know well enough, Bicker," answered Captain Moore sternly.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't. I haven't done anything wrong, captain."</p> + +<p>"March them to the guardhouse," was all the young commander said, and +the two were promptly marched away.</p> + +<p>As may be surmised, the moment the evildoers were alone each accused the +other of having done something to bring on exposure.</p> + +<p>Captain Moore knew his men well, and presently he sent for Drossdell and +interviewed the soldier in private.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry to see you in such trouble as this, Drossdell," he said. "I +thought you were a better soldier."</p> + +<p>"I haven't done anything, captain."</p> + +<p>"It is useless for you to deny it. Do you know what my men would do to +you and Bicker if they learned the truth? They would rebel and hang you +on the spot—and you would deserve it, too."</p> + +<p>"Oh, captain, for the love of Heaven, don't put us in the hands of the +boys!" pleaded Drossdell, turning a ghostly white.</p> + +<p>"You and Bicker plotted to get us all sick and then let the Indians and +Gilroy's gang in on us."</p> + +<p>"I—I——"</p> + +<p>"It is useless for you to deny it, for I heard your talk myself, and saw +a letter written by Bicker to Gilroy."</p> + +<p>"Bicker formed the plans!" cried Drossdell, breaking down completely. +"He—he forced me to help him."</p> + +<p>"Forced you?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, captain, forced me. I stood out a long while, but he—he——Well, +I might as well make a clean breast of it, sir. He had me in his power, +on account of something I did in Denver years ago. He said he would +expose me if I didn't help him."</p> + +<p>"This is the strict truth?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, captain, and I will swear to it if you want me to," answered the +prisoner.</p> + +<p>"You were going to signal the gang when all was in readiness for an +attack," went on Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>"Bicker was going to do that."</p> + +<p>"What was the signal to be?"</p> + +<p>"Three white handkerchiefs stuck on the ends of a cross made of sticks +six feet long. He was going to show these at ten in the morning or four +in the afternoon, from the southwest corner of the stockade, behind the +mess hall."</p> + +<p>"And what was the signal to be if you wanted the enemy to hold off for a +while?"</p> + +<p>"A red shirt if he wanted them to hold off for one day and a red and a +blue shirt if they were to hold off for two days."</p> + +<p>"You are certain about these signals? Remember, if you are telling a lie +it will all come back on your own head."</p> + +<p>"I am telling the strict truth," answered Drossdell.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<h3>SIGNALS AND WHAT FOLLOWED.</h3> + + +<p>The interview over, Captain Moore lost no time in summoning Hank Leeson.</p> + +<p>"You must depart for Fort Prescott without delay," he said.</p> + +<p>"I'm ready now, captain," replied the old hunter.</p> + +<p>"You must ride night and day till you get there."</p> + +<p>"I'll do thet too."</p> + +<p>"I have received important news. At the longest our enemies will hold +off two days. I will try to make them hold off a day longer if I can. +That will give you three days. I will write a letter to Major Hardie at +once."</p> + +<p>This was early in the morning, and inside of half an hour the letter was +written and the old hunter was off, on the back of the freshest and most +enduring horse the fort possessed. He went fully armed, for he knew that +he carried his life in his hands.</p> + +<p>As soon as Leeson had gone the young captain summoned the surgeon and +told that individual about the drugged butter and condensed milk.</p> + +<p>Dr. Nestor was incredulous, but on an examination said that all were +drugged. A cat that had drunk of the diluted condensed milk was found in +a stupor from which she could not be aroused.</p> + +<p>"It's awful," said the surgeon.</p> + +<p>A trustworthy cook was called in, and all the butter and condensed milk +which were open, or which showed signs of having been tampered with, +were thrown away.</p> + +<p>This put the soldiers on short rations so far as these commodities went, +but nobody complained. Some suspected Bicker and Drossdell, and there +was talk of a demand on the captain to have the traitors shot, but it +came to nothing.</p> + +<p>"What does this mean?" asked Joe, when he caught his brother in a quiet +spot.</p> + +<p>In a few words the young captain explained.</p> + +<p>"You and Darry must say nothing," he concluded. "We will have our hands +full as it is. The Indians are in this, but the drugging was not done by +Mose the half-breed."</p> + +<p>"When will you signal to the enemy?" asked Darry.</p> + +<p>"This afternoon at four. That will give us at least two whole days—and +a lot may happen in that time."</p> + +<p>"If only the surgeon can bring some of the men out of their stupor," +remarked Joe.</p> + +<p>"He hopes to do so—now he knows more about the drugs used against +them."</p> + +<p>"If you hadn't caught Bicker and Drossdell what do you suppose would +have happened?" questioned Darry.</p> + +<p>"More than likely every one of us would have been sick," answered the +young captain with a shudder. "Then the Indians and the desperadoes +could have walked in here without a struggle."</p> + +<p>"Even if help does not come, you'll fight them, won't you, Will?"</p> + +<p>"To be sure—to the bitter end."</p> + +<p>"By the way, are you certain the ammunition hasn't been tampered with?" +came from Joe.</p> + +<p>"I was thinking of that and was going to have an examination made when +you stopped me," said Captain Moore, and hurried on.</p> + +<p>An examination showed that some of the powder on the place had been +hidden. Drossdell said this was under the barn flooring, and his words +proved true.</p> + +<p>Promptly at four o'clock Captain Moore appeared at the southwest corner +of the stockade with a red shirt in one hand and a blue shirt in the +other.</p> + +<p>Fortunately he was built like Bicker, and donning a private's hat and +coat made him look a good deal like that individual from a distance.</p> + +<p>Slowly he waved the coats to and fro for five minutes.</p> + +<p>Then an answering signal came back from some brushwood on the top of a +distant hill—the answer being similar to the signal itself, showing the +message was seen and understood.</p> + +<p>It is likely that the Indians and desperadoes were much chagrined to +think that they would have to hold off for two days, but if so they made +no sign.</p> + +<p>The next day proved unusually warm. There was nothing for the boys to do +in the fort, and they wandered around from place to place. At drill but +thirty-eight soldiers presented themselves, all the others being on the +sick list.</p> + +<p>"I must say I don't feel very well myself," remarked Darry. "I can +hardly keep my eyes open."</p> + +<p>"Gracious! don't say that you're going to get sick too!" cried Joe.</p> + +<p>"I won't get sick if I can help it," replied Darry. "But I feel awfully +queer."</p> + +<p>Joe did what he could for his cousin. But, with the limited means at +hand, this was not much, and by sundown Darry was flat on his back, +although the attack he sustained was not as severe as that of many +around him.</p> + +<p>"I feel as if I was in something of a dream," he told Joe. "That drug +must have opium in it."</p> + +<p>"It's something like opium—I heard the surgeon say so," answered his +cousin.</p> + +<p>At night a strict watch was kept, and twice old Benson went out to +reconnoiter.</p> + +<p>"The Indians and desperadoes have surrounded us on all sides," he +announced. "But it don't look as if they meant to attack us just yet."</p> + +<p>With the coming of morning it began to rain, but this cleared away by +noon, and then the sun boiled down as fiercely as ever. The sunny spots +within the stockade were suffocating, and the boys were glad enough to +stay within the cool walls of the stone fort.</p> + +<p>As far as he was able Captain Moore had prepared the place to resist an +attack. A weak spot in the stockade was strengthened and the cannon of +the fort were put in the best possible condition. The soldiers were told +where to go in case of a sudden alarm, and were cautioned not to waste +any ammunition, for the supply was limited.</p> + +<p>Thanks to the surgeon's efforts Colonel Fairfield was now somewhat +better. Yet he was too weak by far to get up or to manage affairs, so +the command still remained in Captain Moore's hands. Even Captain Lee +was now down, and it was a question whether he would live or die.</p> + +<p>"You must do your best, Captain Moore," said the colonel feebly. "I know +I can trust you. You are brave, and your training has been a judicious +one."</p> + +<p>Early that night there came a sudden alarm, followed by two rifle shots +in quick succession. At once there was a commotion, and everybody sprang +to his post.</p> + +<p>"The Indians and desperadoes must be coming!" cried Joe, and ran for the +rifle with which he had been armed.</p> + +<p>The cause of the alarm, however, was not from without, but from within. +Bicker had forced his way out of the guardhouse, and at the risk of +breaking his neck had climbed to the roof of the barn and leaped over +the stockade into the ditch outside.</p> + +<p>A guard had seen the leap and had fired on the man, hitting him, it was +thought, in the shoulder. Then a second guard had discharged his weapon, +but by this time the fleeing prisoner had been swallowed up in the +gathering darkness.</p> + +<p>"He must not get away!" cried the young captain. "If he does, they will +attack us at once. After him, Benson, and you, too, Forshew and +Donaldson. I will follow with some horses!"</p> + +<p>Without delay the old scout climbed the stockade and scrambled over the +ditch. The others ran around to the gate, and soon several additional +soldiers followed. On second thought Captain Moore sent the horses out +by a lieutenant, thinking it best that he remain where he was, that +being primarily his post of duty.</p> + +<p>"Can we go?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"No, Joe, stay where you are," said his brother. "If that rascal gets to +his friends there will be work enough here, never fear."</p> + +<p>The pursuit of Bicker lasted for over an hour, and brought on a smart +skirmish between the men from the fort and the desperadoes, in which one +person on each side was slightly wounded. But the rascal managed to gain +the enemy's camp in safety, and then those from the fort came back as +fast as possible to report.</p> + +<p>"Now the deception is up," said Captain Moore, with a serious look. "I +wouldn't be surprised to see them attack us before morning."</p> + +<p>"Right you are, captain," replied old Benson, "and my opinion is, that +the desperadoes and Indians will fight hard, when once they get going," +he concluded.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE DEMANDS OF THE ENEMY.</h3> + + +<p>It was an hour later, when the excitement had cooled down a little, that +Captain Moore sent for Benson again. Wondering what was to follow, the +old scout hurried to the room in which the young commander was +transacting his business.</p> + +<p>"I want a little talk with you in private, Benson," said the young +officer.</p> + +<p>"Yes, captain."</p> + +<p>"I know you've been wondering why I didn't send you to Fort Prescott +instead of sending Hank Leeson."</p> + +<p>"You had a right to do as you pleased, captain."</p> + +<p>"The truth of the matter is, Benson, I wanted you here. You brought Joe +and Darry to the fort, and those two boys need looking after. We are +going to have a fight, sooner or later. We may win, and if we do, all +right. But if we don't——"</p> + +<p>"You want me to stand by the boys to the last?" put in the old scout +quickly.</p> + +<p>"I do, Benson; and, no matter what comes, I want you to promise to do +your level best to save them, and see them safe back to the East. If the +worst comes I am willing to die fighting, but Joe must get out of it +somehow. If he doesn't it will break my mother's heart. And you must do +as well by Darry, for he is an only child."</p> + +<p>The eyes of the old scout and the young captain met. Then Benson put out +his hand, which Captain Moore quickly grasped.</p> + +<p>"I understand, captain. I'll do my best, and if those lads don't get +away it will be because Sam Benson aint alive to take 'em."</p> + +<p>"As you are not a soldier you have a right to leave the fort as quickly +as you please," went on the young captain. "Therefore, if you see the +tide of battle turning against us, don't wait, but get the boys away as +speedily and as secretly as you can."</p> + +<p>"I will, captain; but yourself——"</p> + +<p>"Never mind me. Get the boys to a place of safety, and I know our family +and Darry's family will reward you well."</p> + +<p>"I won't want any reward. I took to the lads from the start, and I'll +stand by 'em through thick and thin," said old Benson.</p> + +<p>There was but little sleeping done in the fort that night. The majority +of the soldiers slept on their arms, expecting an alarm at any moment. +Yet it did not come, and the sun rose on a scene of perfect peace and +quiet.</p> + +<p>But at eight o'clock a sentinel announced a horseman approaching, +bearing a white flag.</p> + +<p>"So they want to talk, eh?" said the young captain. "All right, anything +to gain time."</p> + +<p>The flag of truce was promptly answered, and as the horseman came closer +many recognized Matt Gilroy. The young captain went out himself to meet +the leader of the desperadoes.</p> + +<p>"Good-morning, Captain Moore," began the desperado, with a regular +military salute.</p> + +<p>"What brings you?" demanded the captain abruptly.</p> + +<p>"Well, I thought we had best come to terms—that's what brought me."</p> + +<p>"Terms about what, Gilroy?"</p> + +<p>"Terms about surrendering the fort and all of its contents."</p> + +<p>"Surrendering? To whom?"</p> + +<p>"You know well enough, Captain Moore. It will be only a waste of time to +beat about the bush. Our crowd and the Indians now number over three +hundred, and we are bound to get possession of the fort and all that is +in it."</p> + +<p>"Do you speak for the Indians as well as for yourself?"</p> + +<p>"I do."</p> + +<p>"So far as I know the Indians are not on the warpath, Gilroy. I must +have a talk with one of their chiefs before I do anything."</p> + +<p>"You know they are on the warpath. Didn't you have a mix-up with them?"</p> + +<p>"There are always some Indians who are ugly and willing to make +trouble."</p> + +<p>"Well, all the Indians are standing in with us on this deal," went on +Gilroy, his face darkening. "And you have got to surrender or take the +consequences."</p> + +<p>"What will the consequences be?"</p> + +<p>"If you won't surrender we'll attack the fort immediately. We know just +how weak you are, and let me tell you that we have a dozen or more +dynamite bombs on hand with which we can blow the fort sky-high if we +wish."</p> + +<p>"What good will it do you to capture the fort?"</p> + +<p>"We know all about the money that is stored here, and we want every +dollar of it."</p> + +<p>"And if we surrender?"</p> + +<p>"If you surrender you will be allowed to march from the place +unmolested, taking all of your sick with you, or leaving them here, in +care of a doctor, if you prefer. If you know where your head is level +you will surrender," went on the desperado earnestly.</p> + +<p>"But if I am compelled to surrender, don't you know that our army will +be after you, Gilroy?"</p> + +<p>"Never mind, we'll take care of that part of it," was the answer, with a +sickly grin. "Then you agree to surrender?"</p> + +<p>"I can't do it until I have spoken with one of the leading Indian +chiefs."</p> + +<p>At this the desperado's face fell.</p> + +<p>"Will White Ox do?" he asked, after an awkward pause.</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"All right; I'll bring him along in about half an hour."</p> + +<p>This ended the interview, and turning his horse Matt Gilroy rode off and +Captain Moore walked back to the fort.</p> + +<p>"A little time gained, at least," was the young officer's comment.</p> + +<p>It was fully an hour before Gilroy reappeared, accompanied by White Ox +and an under-chief known as Little Wildcat.</p> + +<p>"Want to talk," grunted White Ox, coming to a halt at a safe distance.</p> + +<p>"Have you dug up the hatchet, White Ox?" demanded the captain. "If not, +let us smoke the pipe of peace together."</p> + +<p>"The pipe of peace is broken," answered the old Indian. "The white man +is not the red man's friend. He makes promises only to break them. The +Indian must fight for what is his own."</p> + +<p>"Do you consider this fort your own?"</p> + +<p>"The land is the red man's—the white man has stolen it from him. The +white man must go and leave the red man to his own."</p> + +<p>"If you want the white man to go why don't you drive Gilroy and his gang +away too?"</p> + +<p>"They have promised to leave—after they have had their share of what is +here."</p> + +<p>"Oh, so that's the bargain!"</p> + +<p>"You see how matters stand, Captain Moore," broke in the leader of the +desperadoes. "If you know when you are well off, you'll submit as +gracefully as possible."</p> + +<p>"If we leave will you promise to let all go in peace," went on the young +captain to the Indian chief, "you will not molest the women or any of +the young people?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, all the women and young people can go," said White Ox, but the +look in his face was not one to be trusted.</p> + +<p>"And if we refuse when do you expect to attack us?"</p> + +<p>"At once."</p> + +<p>The reply came from Matt Gilroy, and White Ox nodded in the affirmative.</p> + +<p>"I must consult Colonel Fairfield first," said the captain slowly, +wondering how he was to gain more time.</p> + +<p>"I thought you were in command," remarked Gilroy.</p> + +<p>"I was—but the colonel is getting better. Meet me here in another hour, +and I will give you his reply and my own."</p> + +<p>This did not suit Gilroy and White Ox, but the captain was firm, and at +last they went off, promising to be back exactly at the end of the hour.</p> + +<p>"And then it must be surrender or fight," said the leader of the +desperadoes sharply. "No more dilly-dallying."</p> + +<p>It must be confessed that Captain Moore returned to the fort in a +thoughtful mood. He had an awful responsibility upon his shoulders. He +called several of the other officers in consultation.</p> + +<p>"For myself, I believe in fighting," he said. "But we must consider +those who are sick and must consider the women."</p> + +<p>"The colonel's wife wishes us to fight to the end," replied another +officer. "She is not willing to trust White Ox or any of the other +redskins."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe in surrendering," put in another. "Let us see if we +can't hold off until we hear from Leeson and Fort Prescott."</p> + +<p>And so it was arranged.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<h3>OPENING OF THE BATTLE.</h3> + + +<p>Promptly on the minute Gilroy and White Ox appeared again, with the +white flag of truce flying between them.</p> + +<p>This time Captain Moore took with him one of his lieutenants, Bacon by +name.</p> + +<p>The interview was shorter than the captain had anticipated.</p> + +<p>"Well, is it surrender or not?" asked Matt Gilroy.</p> + +<p>"We must have more time," answered Captain Moore. "Cannot you wait until +to-morrow morning?"</p> + +<p>"Not another minute," was the angry reply. "Is it surrender or not? +Answer yes or no."</p> + +<p>"We will not surrender—at least not yet," came from the young captain +firmly.</p> + +<p>"Then your time is up, and we shall attack at once," returned the leader +of the desperadoes. "Am I not right, White Ox?"</p> + +<p>"You have spoken truly," came from the Indian chief. "Soon the blood of +the white soldiers will flow freely."</p> + +<p>Without another word White Ox galloped away, and Matt Gilroy went after +him.</p> + +<p>"We are up against a battle now!" exclaimed Lieutenant Bacon.</p> + +<p>"I have done my best to delay the contest—I can do no more," said +Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>When he returned inside of the stockade he was immediately surrounded.</p> + +<p>"Boys, we must fight," he said in a loud, clear voice. "They will wait +no longer. But re-enforcements must be on the way by this time. Can I +depend upon your standing by me?"</p> + +<p>"Yes! yes!" was the cry.</p> + +<p>"We know how to do our duty to Uncle Sam and the flag!"</p> + +<p>"Let the desperadoes and the Indians come on! We'll give them as hot a +reception as they ever got!"</p> + +<p>While the soldiers were taking their way to the several defenses of the +fort there was the beating of Indian drums at a distance, followed by +the blowing of a bugle in the camp of the desperadoes.</p> + +<p>Soon the beating and blowing came from half a dozen directions.</p> + +<p>"They are gathering, sure enough!" exclaimed Joe. "I wonder how long it +will be before they fire the first shot?"</p> + +<p>"They'll not be rash—be sure of that," answered Darry. "They must know +that the fort is a strong place."</p> + +<p>A little later one of the guards announced that bodies of Indians were +marching from the south of the fort to the westward.</p> + +<p>Here there was a fringe of trees at a distance of not over a hundred +yards from the stockade.</p> + +<p>Colonel Fairfield had often thought to have the belt of timberland cut +down, but had never put the plan into execution.</p> + +<p>"They mean to get as close as possible before they expose themselves," +said the captain. "Dilberry, have the four-pounder trained on that +spot."</p> + +<p>"I will, Captain Moore," said the head gunner, and saluted.</p> + +<p>Quarter of an hour went by, and the drumming and bugle calling had +ceased.</p> + +<p>Suddenly a shout went up from behind the belt of timberland, and a small +cannon spoke up, sending a shell into the ditch outside the stockade.</p> + +<p>"Hullo, they have a cannon after all," thought Captain Moore. He called +Dilberry to him. "Can you get the range of that piece?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"I can try, sir."</p> + +<p>"Then do it, and if you can disable the piece so much the better."</p> + +<p>At once the head gunner ran off and sighted one of the cannon of the +fort with care.</p> + +<p>A few seconds later the cannon spoke up with a report that rang in the +boys' ears for long after. The ball sped straight into the timberland +and cut down a heavy sapling growing beside the piece the enemy were +reloading. One desperado was killed instantly and another badly injured.</p> + +<p>"A fair shot!" said the young captain. "Try it again," but before +Dilberry could do so the cannon was withdrawn from sight.</p> + +<p>After this came another lull, as if desperadoes and Indians were +considering what to do next.</p> + +<p>"It's a wonder they don't make a rush," said Joe, "if they have so many +in their command."</p> + +<p>"Nobody cares to risk an advance in the open, Joe," said old Benson. +"More than likely they won't try to do much until dark."</p> + +<p>Again the Indian drums were rolling, coupled with shrill warwhoops.</p> + +<p>Then, with a wild yelling and a brandishing of rifles, about a hundred +and fifty red men burst from cover and ran toward the stockade.</p> + +<p>"They are coming!" was the cry.</p> + +<p>"Stand firm, men, don't waste your ammunition!" Captain Moore cried. He +turned to the gunner. "Let them have it, Dilberry!"</p> + +<p>Bang! the cannon boomed out again, and the shot tore through the +advancing horde of Indians, laying four of them low.</p> + +<p>Then came a volley from the red men, followed by the discharge of the +piece in the hands of the desperadoes. The splinters flew in several +directions around the stockade and one soldier was seriously wounded. +The cannon ball grazed the flagstaff, and presently it was seen to +totter.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" roared old Benson to Joe, and as he spoke down came the +Stars and Stripes on the heads of Joe and Darry, and a section of the +flagstaff with it.</p> + +<p>"The flag is down!" A score of voices took up the cry, and a yell of +triumph came from the Indians and desperadoes.</p> + +<p>"It's not going to remain down!" cried old Benson, and began to climb +what remained of the pole. He carried the halyard with him, and soon, +with the aid of the two boys, he had the glorious Stars and Stripes once +more in position.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the soldiers under Captain Moore were busy. The Indians +were now at the ditch, and one had advanced as far as the stockade +itself. They were yelling like demons, and now the desperadoes began to +show themselves, confident that the fort would soon be taken.</p> + +<p>"They haven't got a corporal's guard to defend it!" cried Matt Gilroy. +"Nearly everyone of those inside is sick. Come on!"</p> + +<p>The noise was now deafening, for soldiers and Indians were discharging +their weapons as rapidly as possible. The red men had brought with them +a long board, to which cross-pieces were nailed. This board was now set +slantingly against the stockade, and a dozen warriors rushed upon it.</p> + +<p>"Down with them!" shouted Captain Moore. "Heave the plank off!"</p> + +<p>A dozen soldiers started to do his bidding. The first that showed +himself was shot down, and the second shared a similar fate. But others +were more successful, and into the ditch went the board with a loud +splash, carrying the Indians with it.</p> + +<p>The soldiers set up a shout of triumph, and as the red men fell back +those who could gain a point of vantage fired on the enemy. By this +movement three Indians were left in the ditch dead and several others +were wounded. A desperado was also brought down. Those that were +uninjured lost no time in seeking cover; and thus the first advance on +the fort came to an end.</p> + +<p>All told, the attack had lasted nearly an hour, and when it was over it +was found that everybody was hot, dry, and dusty. But, fortunately, +water was to be had in plenty, and a drink refreshed all. The dead and +wounded were carried away, and the latter were made as comfortable as +the limited means of the fort afforded.</p> + +<p>"They won't come back in a hurry," said the young captain. "The Indians +have had their eyes opened."</p> + +<p>"How soon can those re-enforcements come, Will?" asked Joe.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they can get here before to-morrow noon, if as soon. +They'll have a long journey before them, and a body of several hundred +soldiers can't travel as fast as a single person."</p> + +<p>"Of course they'll be cavalry," put in Darry.</p> + +<p>"I hope so—if the cavalry was at Fort Prescott when Leeson got there."</p> + +<p>Colonel Fairfield was much disturbed by the shooting, and he insisted +upon sitting up and hearing the particulars.</p> + +<p>"Good!" he murmured. "Keep them off another twenty-four hours and we +shall be saved," and then he went off in another stupor.</p> + +<p>All was now as quiet as if not an enemy was within a mile of the fort. +But the soldiers remained on guard, and this vigilance was increased as +the sun went down in the west.</p> + +<p>"This night will tell the tale," was old Benson's comment. "Boys, it's +do or die, and don't you forget it!"</p> + +<p>Whether or not the old scout was right we shall soon see.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXX" id="CHAPTER_XXX"></a>CHAPTER XXX.</h2> + +<h3>SIGNALS IN THE DARK.</h3> + + +<p>"Joe, I've got a scheme to outwit the desperadoes and Indians, and I've +a good mind to propose it to Will."</p> + +<p>It was Darry who spoke, as he and Joe were eating an early supper that +night, in one corner of the messroom.</p> + +<p>"If the scheme is good for anything let Will have it by all means," +answered his cousin. "Heaven knows we need all the help we can get!"</p> + +<p>"My scheme is this," went on Darry. "Those Indians and the desperadoes +must know something of our sending off for re-enforcements. Now why +can't Will send out old Benson and a few others, to steal off for +several miles and light camp-fires, blow bugles, and all that, to make +the enemy think the re-enforcements are close at hand?"</p> + +<p>Joe clapped his hands. "That's a grand scheme!" he cried. "Let's speak +to Will about it at once."</p> + +<p>The supper was soon finished, and they sought out the young captain, who +was dividing up his force for guard duty during the night.</p> + +<p>"I was thinking of such a scheme myself," he said, when he had heard +them. "And old Benson suggested it, too. Perhaps I'll do it."</p> + +<p>"If old Benson goes can't I go with him?" asked Joe quickly.</p> + +<p>"And let me go too," put in Darry. "You won't miss us as much as you +would miss two of your regulars."</p> + +<p>At this the young captain grew grave. "Old Benson said he would like to +take you along. Perhaps it would be best, too." He paused. "You see, +they may fall on the fort to-night and wipe us out completely."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Will, do you really believe that?"</p> + +<p>"They will certainly attack us, and the men fit for duty number but +thirty-four. Thirty-four against several hundred is not much of a force, +even in a fort."</p> + +<p>The matter was talked over for half an hour, and old Benson was called +in for consultation. In the end it was decided that the old scout should +head a party consisting of two regulars and the two boys, who were to +carry a drum and a bugle and a good supply of matches for bonfires.</p> + +<p>"If you can pass them without being seen, head straight for Conner's +Hill," said Captain Moore. "Blow the bugle there, and beat the drum, and +then move over to Decker's Falls and light your first camp-fire. After +that you'll have to do what you think is best."</p> + +<p>"I understand, captain," answered the old scout. "And trust me to fool +'em nicely, if the trick can be done at all."</p> + +<p>"It is not going to be an extra-dark night," went on the young officer. +"So you will have your own troubles in getting away from the fort +without being seen."</p> + +<p>"I know a route," answered old Benson. "Trust me for it." But just then +he would say no more.</p> + +<p>The men to go along were named Cass and Bernstein. Cass was a good +drummer and bugler, and Bernstein was noted for his good sight and the +accuracy of his aim. All of the party went fully armed, and took with +them rations for two days.</p> + +<p>"Good-by, Joe," said the captain affectionately, and he took his brother +by the hand. "I hope you pull through in safety."</p> + +<p>"And I hope you do too, Will," answered Joe, and his lip quivered as he +spoke. Perhaps this would be the last time he would see his brother +alive. Never before had the situation appeared so serious as now. Darry +also received an affectionate farewell.</p> + +<p>In absolute silence old Benson led his little party to a far corner of +the stockade, where there was a small gate, fastened with a strong log +bar. This gate was opened just far enough for them to slip through, and +then closed again. Their mission had begun. There was no telling how it +would end.</p> + +<p>Slipping into the ditch, the old scout told the others to lie low, while +he and Bernstein surveyed the situation. It was silent, and from +overhead only a few stars twinkled down upon them.</p> + +<p>Old Benson presently pointed with his bony hand.</p> + +<p>"Clear that way, aint it?" he whispered.</p> + +<p>"Looks so," answered Bernstein, after a searching look lasting several +minutes. "I wouldn't go too close to that patch of underbrush, though."</p> + +<p>The party began crawling along the ditch, until they came to a little +gully which the last heavy rains had formed. Here they progressed on +hands and knees until they reached some low brushwood. Then old Benson, +still crouching close to the ground, set off on a lope, and the others +came after him in Indian file.</p> + +<p>If they had been discovered, neither Indians nor desperadoes gave any +sign, and inside of ten minutes the fort was left out of sight, and +they were standing in a hollow fringed with berry bushes. The boys were +somewhat out of breath, and old Benson gave them a short spell in which +to get back their wind.</p> + +<p>"We were right, they are none of 'em in this vicinity," said the old +scout. "Getting away was easier than I expected."</p> + +<p>"It was no easy matter with the drum," came from Cass. "I came pretty +close to falling and smashing it once."</p> + +<p>The course now led up a small hill and then across a valley to another +hill, a distance of nearly three miles. The trail was by no means +straight and the walking was bad, and Joe and Darry had all they could +do to keep up with the others.</p> + +<p>At the last minute Captain Moore had given the boys half a dozen +rockets, and explained how the fireworks were to be set off. Everything +they could do to puzzle the enemy was to be done.</p> + +<p>At last they gained the top of Conner's Hill—so called because Major +Conner fell there while battling with some stage-robbers early in the +seventies.</p> + +<p>Bringing around his bugle, Cass blew a long blast and then a regular +military call, which echoed and re-echoed throughout the mountains. +This was followed by a long roll on the drum, and then another call on +the bugle.</p> + +<p>After this all waited impatiently, gazing in the direction of the fort, +which was, of course, hidden in the darkness.</p> + +<p>"There they go!" cried Joe, and as he spoke two rockets flared up, dying +out almost instantly.</p> + +<p>The boys had planted two of the fireworks given them, and now these were +touched off and went hissing skyward, leaving a trail of sparks behind. +Two minutes later a single rocket went up from the fort.</p> + +<p>"That's the last," observed old Benson.</p> + +<p>"I'll wager that will set the Indians and the desperadoes to thinking," +said Cass.</p> + +<p>"They'll think some more when they see a camp-fire over Decker's Falls," +put in Bernstein. "They'll imagine that they are being surrounded."</p> + +<p>"Don't be too sure," came from the old scout. "White Ox is no fool. He +has been through too much fighting. If we can only make him hold off a +bit that's as much as we can expect. You can bet he'll have spies up +here in less than an hour from now."</p> + +<p>The march was now for Decker's Falls, a distance three miles to the +westward. Again they advanced in Indian file, Bernstein now leading and +old Benson bringing up the rear.</p> + +<p>A mile had been covered, when the regular in front called a halt.</p> + +<p>"A small camp is ahead," he said. "There, through the trees."</p> + +<p>Without delay old Benson went forward to investigate.</p> + +<p>He found three desperadoes talking earnestly among themselves, while +warming some coffee over a small fire.</p> + +<p>Listening to their talk he learned that they had been out on the trails +leading to Fort Prescott, and had come in with the news that no +re-enforcements for Fort Carson were within forty miles of the latter +place.</p> + +<p>"Gilroy and White Ox will be glad to hear our news," said one of the +crowd. "They've been afraid all along Colonel Fairfield had sent out for +aid."</p> + +<p>Not stopping to hear anything further, old Benson crawled back to the +place where he had left the others.</p> + +<p>"We must capture those men, dead or alive," he said. "If they carry +their news to the enemy there will be another attack on the fort within +an hour."</p> + +<p>Leaving the drum, bugle, and remaining rockets in a safe place, our +friends advanced until all could see the three desperadoes quite +plainly.</p> + +<p>One of the fellows was unknown to Joe, but the others were Gus Fetter +and Nat Potts.</p> + +<p>The desperadoes had placed their rifles against a tree, and old Benson +motioned to the boys to secure the weapons.</p> + +<p>As Joe grabbed up two of the firearms and Darry the third, the +desperadoes leaped to their feet in alarm.</p> + +<p>"Hands up!" sang out old Benson. "Hands up, or you are all dead men!"</p> + +<p>The scout's rifle was raised, and so were the weapons of Cass and +Bernstein, and the desperadoes found themselves at a disadvantage.</p> + +<p>Yet Fetter was game, and he quickly reached for a pistol hanging in his +belt.</p> + +<p>But the movement, quick as it was, was not quick enough for Bernstein, +and as the regular's rifle rang out Fetter fell headlong across the +camp-fire.</p> + +<p>"Do you surrender?" asked old Benson.</p> + +<p>"Yes," came from Potts, sulkily, and his companion said the same. In the +meantime Fetter had rolled from the camp-fire and was breathing his last +at Potts' feet.</p> + +<p>The sight was a thrilling one, and caused Joe and Darry to shudder.</p> + +<p>"Can't I do something for that poor wretch?" asked Joe, of Benson, but +before the old scout could answer Fetter breathed his last.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes more Potts was made a close prisoner.</p> + +<p>While he was being tied up, the third man made a quick leap into the +woods.</p> + +<p>"After him!" cried Benson, and Cass and Bernstein did as commanded. Soon +the desperado and the two regulars were out of sight and hearing.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXI" id="CHAPTER_XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<h3>BURNING OF THE STOCKADE.</h3> + + +<p>"What will you do with him?" asked Joe of Benson, as he pointed to Nat +Potts.</p> + +<p>"Don't be hard on me," pleaded Potts. "I meant you no harm."</p> + +<p>"You ought to be hung," grunted the old scout. "You aint fit to live and +you know it, Potts. You could make an honest living if you wanted to, +but you would rather cheat and steal."</p> + +<p>"It was Matt Gilroy who got me into this," answered Potts. "He——"</p> + +<p>"Don't put it off on to somebody else, Potts!" cried the old scout +wrathfully. "If you aint got backbone enough to be honest, it's your own +fault."</p> + +<p>"Will you let me go, if I promise to leave this Territory?" asked Potts +eagerly.</p> + +<p>"No, sirree!" was Benson's answer. "You shall suffer the full extent of +the law, and don't you forget it!"</p> + +<p>While waiting for the return of Cass and Bernstein, the old scout +searched Potts and the dead body of Fetter, taking away all their +weapons and some papers which Potts carried.</p> + +<p>These papers showed how deep-laid was the plot which the desperadoes had +formed to gain possession of the money stored at Fort Carson, and how +they had duped the Indians under White Ox and other chiefs to assist +them.</p> + +<p>At last Cass and Bernstein came back, all out of breath with running.</p> + +<p>"Did he get away?" questioned Benson quickly.</p> + +<p>"He did and he didn't," answered Cass. "He ran up Cedar Cliff, and +seeing we were after him he tried to jump to the other side of the +canyon. But he missed his footing in the dark, and went down, and that's +the last we seen or heard of him."</p> + +<p>"And that's the last anybody will see or hear of him," answered the old +scout. "That canyon is three hundred feet deep, and nothing but sharp +rocks, sides and bottom. He's done for."</p> + +<p>The march onward was now resumed, the old scout forcing Potts to walk +between himself and the boys, with his hands tied tightly behind him.</p> + +<p>"If you make any noise it will cost you your life," said Benson to the +prisoner, and thereupon Potts became perfectly mute. To tell the truth +the desperado was thoroughly downcast, and his face was filled with +despair.</p> + +<p>They calculated that it was two o'clock in the morning when the heights +above Decker's Falls was gained, a wild spot, from which old Benson had +often viewed the fort, miles below, in the valley.</p> + +<p>The driest possible brush was gathered, and on this were heaped several +good-sized limbs, that the fire might burn an hour or two. Quarter of a +mile away another similar fire was kindled, and at this spot the boys +set off all but one of their remaining rockets.</p> + +<p>"There is the answer from the fort!" said Joe, as two rockets flared up +in the dim distance. "Anyway, Will knows we have gotten this far."</p> + +<p>"But he doesn't know of the adventure we have had on the way," said +Darry.</p> + +<p>As soon as the fires were well under way old Benson began to lead the +way down the mountain side toward a stretch of timber running within +half a mile of the fort.</p> + +<p>While they were in the midst of the forest a distant firing broke upon +their ears.</p> + +<p>"Is that from the fort?" asked Joe quickly.</p> + +<p>"Reckon it is, lad," replied the old scout.</p> + +<p>"Then our signals haven't done any good."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they have. But it may be that others have been out spying, and +they have brought in the same report that Potts and his crowd were +carrying."</p> + +<p>As they advanced the firing died away for half an hour, but then it was +renewed with vigor.</p> + +<p>Coming to another hilltop, they could see the flashes, of fire as the +rifles and cannon were discharged.</p> + +<p>The Indians and desperadoes had approached Fort Carson in the darkness, +hoping to catch those inside napping.</p> + +<p>But the regulars had opened the firing, and two Indians were killed at +the very outset.</p> + +<p>The red men had brought forward a large quantity of brush, and at the +risk of their lives they heaped this against the wooden stockade.</p> + +<p>When Joe and the others who were with him gained the plains surrounding +the stronghold they saw that the brush was burning at a lively rate.</p> + +<p>"They are firing the fort!" cried Darry. "Heaven have mercy on those +inside!"</p> + +<p>"I see nothing of Indians or desperadoes," said Joe. "Where have they +gone, Benson?"</p> + +<p>"Reckon they didn't like those last signals," answered the old scout.</p> + +<p>From a distance they watched the burning of the brush with interest. +Here and there they saw the stockade take fire, and then saw a blaze on +the stable within the fort yard.</p> + +<p>"The fire has reached inside!" groaned Joe. "The place is doomed!"</p> + +<p>"Come on! There is no use of our staying here longer!" cried Benson, and +led the way across the plain, now lit up by the conflagration beyond. He +forced Potts with him.</p> + +<p>Suddenly several shots rang out, and Joe felt a bullet graze his hand. +Then he saw Cass pitch forward on his face, and heard Potts give a yell +of mortal agony.</p> + +<p>"Poor Cass, he's a goner!" muttered Bernstein. "And the desperado is +dead, too."</p> + +<p>No more was said, for all felt they must run as never before, if they +would save themselves. Soon the gully was reached, and they dropped to +shelter. But no more shots followed, and in a few minutes more they were +close to the burning stockade.</p> + +<p>"Friends!" shouted Benson, to a guard. "Don't shoot! Come out here and +put out the fire!"</p> + +<p>"Is that you?" came from Captain Moore, in the semi-darkness. "Are Joe +and Darry safe?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," came from the boys.</p> + +<p>There was no time to say more, for already the soldiers were forming a +bucket brigade, carrying water with which to put out the flames. Some +had long poles with hooks, and with these they dragged a large part of +the burning brush into the ditch.</p> + +<p>All this while some of the regulars remained on guard, and occasionally +a shot rang out, answered by another from a great distance.</p> + +<p>"They have surely withdrawn," said the young captain. "Benson, the trick +worked after all."</p> + +<p>"That's right, captain. But it won't work many hours, you can depend +upon that."</p> + +<p>"If it only makes them hold off until morning I shall be satisfied," +concluded Captain Moore.</p> + +<p>By the exertion of the soldiers the fire was kept from communicating +with any of the buildings but the stable, and of this structure only a +corner of the roof suffered. But the stockade was greatly damaged, and +by the time the last spark was out it was seen that it had sustained +three openings each eight to twelve feet long.</p> + +<p>"We'll have to repair these," said Captain Moore; and, tired though the +workers were, he made them haul fresh timbers from the woodpile and also +tear up part of the barn floor, that the stockade might present a whole +front to the enemy once more.</p> + +<p>The fighting had greatly agitated the women in the fort, and nobody had +slept for two nights. Yet even now, with the fire out and silence +brooding everywhere, nobody thought of going to bed. All felt that this +was but the lull before the greater storm.</p> + +<p>If only the relief would come! Such was the thought of everyone but +Drossdell, who still remained in the guardhouse, heavily chained, hands +and feet. Drossdell was deeply downcast, and with good reason.</p> + +<p>At last came the welcome signs of dawn in the east, and then a few of +the soldiers, who could stand the strain no longer, threw themselves +down to sleep. The others, pale and haggard, sat around in little groups +wondering what was going to happen next. To each was served extra-strong +coffee and the best rations the fort afforded.</p> + +<p>"It cannot last much longer," said Captain Moore, trying to cheer them +up. "Relief must come sooner or later."</p> + +<p>He had now but a pitiful twenty-eight men left, including old Benson and +Joe and Darry. Twenty-eight! What could such a number do against the +attack of two or three hundred desperadoes and Indians? The situation +was certainly one to make the stoutest heart quail.</p> + +<p>"It was too bad you came out here on a vacation," said the captain +sadly, to his brother and his cousin. "Perhaps you'll never see home +again."</p> + +<p>"Oh, Will, do you really think it's so bad?" came from Darry.</p> + +<p>"It is hard to tell what I think, Darry. I know we are in a mighty tight +box."</p> + +<p>"Let us hope for the best," said Joe. "Leeson must be doing something."</p> + +<p>"If he wasn't caught and shot down, Joe."</p> + +<p>"That is true," and now Joe gave a long sigh that meant a good deal.</p> + +<p>"There is but one thing in our favor now, this daylight. But if no +relief reaches us by sundown——" The captain did not finish, but shook +his head.</p> + +<p>A moment later one of the guards called down that he could see some +Indians to the northwest of the fort.</p> + +<p>A glass was brought into play, and by this a party of seventy-five red +men could be made out marching directly for the fort. Behind the red men +came a dozen or fifteen whites.</p> + +<p>Hardly had this discovery been made when another body of Indians and +whites were seen marching upon the fort from the south.</p> + +<p>"We are to suffer a double attack now!" was Captain Moore's comment. +"Heaven help us and bring us through it in safety!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXII" id="CHAPTER_XXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<h3>RELIEF AT LAST—CONCLUSION.</h3> + + +<p>The attack did not come until half an hour later, and during the time of +waiting the nerves of the boys were strained to the utmost. The +seriousness of the situation was depicted upon the faces of all the +soldiers, who felt that the coming contest must decide whether or not +the fort was to stand.</p> + +<p>The firing began on the part of the Indians and desperadoes, who +advanced upon the stronghold from four points of the compass at once. +The enemy had learned the folly of massing their force, and Indians and +whites came on in a wide open skirmish line.</p> + +<p>The soldiers within the stockade fired upon the advancing foe as best +they could. Yet by the time red men and desperadoes were within reach of +the stockade only three of the foe had fallen.</p> + +<p>As before, some of the Indians carried a board with strips nailed across +it for steps, and the desperadoes had a similar contrivance. The two +boards were placed at opposite ends of the stockade, and, while some of +the enemy began to mount them, others came rushing on with a tree trunk, +which they used as a battering-ram against the stockade gate.</p> + +<p>The noise was now terrific, as rifle and cannon shot sounded out, +mingled with the warwhoops of the Indians and the groans and shrieks of +the wounded and dying.</p> + +<p>As for Joe and Darry, the first shock over, each felt as if he was in a +dream—as if this terrible sight presented to their gaze could not be +true. They shot off their rifles mechanically, yet when it was all over +Joe remembered how he had sent one redskin tumbling back into the ditch, +and Darry could tell of a desperado who had dropped his gun because of a +shot through the shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Fight to the last, men!" shouted Captain Moore, as he discharged his +pistol at the leader of the desperadoes. Gilroy had hit him in the +forearm, but the young officer's aim was still more true, and Matt +Gilroy went down never to rise again.</p> + +<p>In the meanwhile old Benson was having a terrific hand-to-hand encounter +with White Ox. Each had fired a shot at the other, and now they closed +in, the Indian chief with his hunting-knife and the old scout with his +clubbed rifle.</p> + +<p>The struggle was as short as it was thrilling. Benson made a pass which +the Indian chief dodged. Then White Ox plunged his knife toward the old +scout's heart, but a quick turn made it catch in Benson's hunting-shirt. +Down came the rifle butt a second time, and the blow, catching White Ox +on the neck, forced him to his knees. Even then he struck at Benson's +legs, but the old scout leaped over his head. Then down came the rifle +butt once more, and the Indian chief gave a groan which was his last.</p> + +<p>Fully sixty Indians and a score of desperadoes were now within the +stockade, and it looked as if all was lost to our friends. A part of the +regulars were fighting at the entrance to the stable, but the majority +were gathered around Captain Moore at the entrance to the officers' +quarters. Behind these were the ladies of the fort and the officers who +were sick.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we had better surrender," said Colonel Fairfield, when told by +his wife of the condition of affairs. "If we don't——" He could not +finish.</p> + +<p>"Kill the white soldiers!" was the cry from the Indians. "White Ox has +fallen! They must all die! Spare nobody!"</p> + +<p>Captain Moore was now fighting as never before. Beside him stood old +Benson, and not far away were Joe and Darry. Each of the number was +wounded, and hardly any of the regulars were better off. Ammunition was +running low. Still the horrible din continued, and the dust and smoke +were blinding.</p> + +<p>But now, hark, what was that? From a distance sounded out a bugle call. +Then came a shot, followed by another, and then a regular volley. +Captain Moore started, and his eyes lit with pleasure.</p> + +<p>"The relief!" he shouted. "The relief from Fort Prescott! Boys, we are +saved!"</p> + +<p>"Hurrah, the relief!" was the shout which made the fort ring from end to +end. "The relief! We are saved!"</p> + +<p>"Give it to the reds and to the desperadoes!" came from old Benson. +"Teach 'em the lesson so they won't forget it! Don't let a skunk of 'em +escape!"</p> + +<p>Nearer and nearer came the shots from without, and a bugle continued to +blow calls to a detachment still further away. Then up to the fort rode +a troop of dashing cavalry from Fort Prescott, Hank Leeson beside them, +and every horse covered with foam. Crack! crack! crack! spoke up the +firearms of the newcomers, and Indians and desperadoes fell in all +directions.</p> + +<p>"We must retreat!" shouted one of the desperadoes. "The game is up!"</p> + +<p>"Retreat! retreat!" came from the others; and the red men took up the +cry. Soon the enemy were pouring from the fort grounds even more rapidly +than they had entered.</p> + +<p>There was only a pitiful handful that could follow them, the young +captain, Benson, and nine regulars. But there was no need for even that +number, for the blood of the cavalry was up and every desperado and red +man received one or more shots the instant he appeared. Soon the enemy +were flying in all directions. But the cavalry went after them, and in +the end all but four desperadoes and thirty-six Indians were killed, the +others being forced to surrender.</p> + +<p>It was rather a silent party that gathered in and around the fort that +night. Victory had come to our friends, but the cost had been a heavy +one, and the hospital ward of the fort was filled to over-flowing.</p> + +<p>Hank Leeson came in for many a warm hand-shake, and was made to tell his +story over and over again.</p> + +<p>"It was a close shave," said the old hunter. "Twice I got in a close box +with the redskins an' I had to shoot one of 'em down afore I could git +away. Thet's wot kept me so long. I'm glad we wasn't an hour later, fer +then mebbe we'd 'a' been too late."</p> + +<p>All of the principal desperadoes were dead and the same can be said of +the Indians. Among the slain was found the body of Bicker, and, if the +truth must be told, nobody mourned his loss.</p> + +<p>"He is responsible for a great deal of this suffering," said Captain +Moore. "Had he lived it is likely he would have been court-martialed and +shot."</p> + +<p>Both of the boys had been slightly wounded, yet each felt happy when the +fighting was over and they were assured that from henceforth they would +be safe to come and go as they pleased.</p> + +<p>"It was like a regular campaign," said Darry. "Joe, we have become +soldiers after all!"</p> + +<p>"That's so, Darry," replied Joe. "We can call ourselves, after this, the +boys of the fort!"</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>A few words more, and we will bring this story of fort life in the Great +Northwest to a close.</p> + +<p>Two weeks after the events just narrated Joe and Darry returned to their +homes. Here they were received with open arms by their parents, who had +heard all manner of ugly reports and who half expected to see them +coming back wounded and crippled for life. But the lads soon proved that +they were not so bad off as that, and inside of a few months both were +as well as ever.</p> + +<p>At the fort an active campaign was started under Captain Moore and the +commander of the cavalry, and this resulted in the rounding up of six +more desperadoes and thirty Indians. Lieutenant Carrol and four regulars +were found as prisoners of the Indians and were released.</p> + +<p>The desperadoes were turned over to the civil courts, and were dealt +with severely, two being hung and the others being imprisoned for years.</p> + +<p>Drossdell was court-martialed, and after a long trial was sentenced to +imprisonment in a military prison for ten years. He served six years, +after which he was released. To his credit be it said, he turned over a +new leaf, and from the West went to Cuba, where he fought with the +Cubans against Spanish rule. He was with the Cubans at the fall of +Santiago and died a few weeks later of tropical fever.</p> + +<p>As soon as the proper medicines could be obtained and administered, +those who had been drugged at the fort began to recover, and inside of +two weeks Colonel Fairfield, Captain Lee, and our other friends were +around once more, although rather weak.</p> + +<p>The mining company whose money had been saved was exceedingly thankful +to Captain Moore and the others for what had been done, and when, +several years later, the young captain left the regular army, this +company offered him a lucrative position, which he accepted and which +he fills to this day.</p> + +<p>Old Benson and Hank Leeson still continue to roam the Great Northwest, +and are happy. Occasionally they receive a visit from Joe and Darry, and +are never more satisfied than when they have the two young men with them +on a hunting and fishing tour.</p> + +<p>"Takes me back to years ago," says old Benson. "Years ago, when you were +both green as grass."</p> + +<p>"Well, we are not so green now," replies Joe, with a quiet smile. +"Through bitter experience we have learned a thing or two."</p> + +<p>"Now it is over I am glad I didn't miss it," puts in Darry. "We got a +genuine taste of soldier life, didn't we?"</p> + +<p>"That's so," adds Joe. "We were really and truly the Boys of the Fort."</p> + + +<h3>THE END.</h3> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="BY_THE_SAME_AUTHOR" id="BY_THE_SAME_AUTHOR"></a>BY THE SAME AUTHOR</h2> + + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, A Young Scout among the Indians.<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">BOYS OF THE FORT;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, A Young Captain's Pluck.<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">THE YOUNG BANDMASTER;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield.<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">WHEN SANTIAGO FELL;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums.<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, Afloat in the Philippines.<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">OFF FOR HAWAII;<br /></span> +<span class="i2">Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano.<br /></span> +</div></div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of The Fort, by Ralph Bonehill + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE FORT *** + +***** This file should be named 32057-h.htm or 32057-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/2/0/5/32057/ + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/32057-h/images/cover.jpg b/32057-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..677e556 --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/32057-h/images/illus1.jpg b/32057-h/images/illus1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff9615d --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/images/illus1.jpg diff --git a/32057-h/images/illus2.jpg b/32057-h/images/illus2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..231762f --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/images/illus2.jpg diff --git a/32057-h/images/illus3.jpg b/32057-h/images/illus3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6f83fa --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/images/illus3.jpg diff --git a/32057-h/images/illus4.jpg b/32057-h/images/illus4.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a56b2e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/32057-h/images/illus4.jpg diff --git a/32057.txt b/32057.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0c3584 --- /dev/null +++ b/32057.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7335 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of The Fort, by Ralph Bonehill + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Boys of The Fort + Or, A Young Captain's Pluck + +Author: Ralph Bonehill + +Release Date: April 19, 2010 [EBook #32057] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE FORT *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + + + + + BOYS OF THE FORT + + _Or, A Young Captain's Pluck_ + + FLAG OF FREEDOM SERIES + + By CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL + +AUTHOR OF "THE YOUNG BANDMASTER," "WHEN SANTIAGO FELL," "A SAILOR BOY +WITH DEWEY," "OFF FOR HAWAII," ETC. + + +GROSSET & DUNLAP +PUBLISHERS NEW YORK + +COPYRIGHT, 1901, BY +THE MERSHON COMPANY + + + + +[Illustration: DEFENDING THE FORT.] + + + + +PREFACE. + + +"BOYS OF THE FORT" is a complete story in itself, but forms the fifth +volume of a line of works issued under the general title of "Flag of +Freedom Series." + +In penning this tale I had it in mind to acquaint my young readers with +the ins and outs of military life at one of our Western forts of to-day, +showing what both officers and privates are called upon to do, and what +troubles the Indians and the bad men of that locality are still in the +habit of making. The field is one about which little has been written, +although abounding in interest, and one which is worthy the attention of +all who have the proper development of our country at heart. + +To some, certain scenes in this book may appear overdrawn, yet such is +far from being the case. In this wild territory there are those who have +lived all their lives beyond the pale of civilization, men who grow up +dwarfed and crooked in mind, and who resent every effort made to better +their condition. + +The young captain is a fine specimen of the wide-awake American army +officer, yet he is no more brave and dashing than are thousands of +others, officers and privates, who serve under our Flag of Freedom. He +is trained to do his duty, and he simply does it, regardless of possible +consequences. + +Once more I take this opportunity to thank my young friends for the +kindness with which they have received my former stories, and I +earnestly hope this present tale merits equal commendation. + +CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL. + +_July 1, 1901._ + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + I. BOUND FOR THE FORT + + II. CAVES IN THE MOUNTAIN + + III. AN IMPORTANT CONVERSATION + + IV. LOST IN THE FOREST + + V. THE BIG BLACK BEAR + + VI. DARRY MAKES A DISCOVERY + + VII. AT HANK LEESON'S CABIN + + VIII. THE STEALING OF THE HORSES + + IX. ARRIVAL AT THE FORT + + X. THE RESULT OF A SWIM + + XI. SOMETHING ABOUT DRILLING + + XII. DEER HUNTING + + XIII. A FISH AND A SNAKE + + XIV. OVER THE MOUNTAIN TOP + + XV. THE RESULT OF A HURRICANE + + XVI. CAPTAIN MOORE'S ADVENTURE + + XVII. THREE PRISONERS + + XVIII. BENSON PUTS SOME MEN IN A HOLE + + XIX. ESCAPING IN THE DARKNESS + + XX. SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE OX + + XXI. A TRICK OF THE ENEMY + + XXII. IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY + + XXIII. A PANTHER IN CAMP + + XXIV. THE SKIRMISH IN THE BRUSH + + XXV. A LUCKY MEETING + + XXVI. THE ENEMIES WITHIN THE FORT + + XXVII. SIGNALS AND WHAT FOLLOWED + + XXVIII. THE DEMANDS OF THE ENEMY + + XXIX. OPENING OF THE BATTLE + + XXX. SIGNALS IN THE DARK + + XXXI. BURNING OF THE STOCKADE + + XXXII. RELIEF AT LAST--CONCLUSION + + + + +List of Illustrations + + +DEFENDING THE FORT. + +"NOW DARRY'S RIFLE SPOKE UP, AND THE BEAR WAS HIT AGAIN" + +"AT LAST HE PUT THE GUNS IN THEIR HANDS AND LET THEM MARCH WITH THE +PIECES." + +"HE LEAPED BETWEEN THEM AND CAUGHT THEIR RIFLES." + + + + +BOYS OF THE FORT. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +BOUND FOR THE FORT. + + +"How many miles have we still to ride, Benson?" + +"About fifty, Joe. But the last half is pretty much uphill, lad." + +"Can we make the fort by to-morrow night?" + +"Well, we can try," answered the old scout, who sat astride of a +coal-black horse and rode slightly in advance of his two youthful +companions. "It will depend somewhat on what the weather does." + +"Why, do you think it is going to rain?" put in Darry Germain. "I'm sure +it looks clear enough." + +"Aint no telling what the weather will do in this valley," answered Sam +Benson. "It may stay clear for a week, but to me the signs don't exactly +p'int that way," and he shook his head gravely. + +"A little rain wouldn't hurt," said Joe Moore. "A couple of miles back +the road was fearfully dusty." + +"The trouble is, when it rains out here it rains," answered the old +scout. "The clouds come a-tumbling over yonder mountains, and inside of +half an hour you'd fancy the water was going to drown out everything." + +"Then if it rains we'll have to put up somewhere," said Darry Germain. + +"Aint no cabin on this trail short of Hank Leeson's place, twenty miles +this side of the fort. If we can get that far I reckon we can make the +fort." + +"Then where will we stop to-night?" asked Darry with interest. + +"At the Star Hotel--if the sky is clear," said Sam Benson, with a laugh +at what he considered his little joke. + +"You mean in the open, under the stars!" cried the boy; and, as the old +scout nodded, he went on: "That will be nice. I've been wanting to camp +out in regular trapper style ever since we left Riverton." + +"So have I," put in Joe Moore. "But I don't know as I care to camp out +and get soaked." + +"If it rains we'll find some kind of shelter," answered Benson. "But +come, let us make the most of the daylight while it lasts," and he +urged his steed forward, and the two boys did the same. + +The three were pursuing their way along a gap in the Rocky Mountains, +where the so-called valley was broken up by tiny water-courses, walls of +rock, and dense patches of forest and underbrush. It was midsummer, and +the hot air was filled with the scent of green growing things. Deep in +the forest the song-birds sang gayly and the wild animals had full play +to come and go as they pleased, for to get at them in those vast +fastnesses was next to impossible. + +The party of three had left the town of Riverton four days before. They +were bound for Fort Carson,--so named after Kit Carson, the celebrated +scout and Indian fighter,--and Sam Benson carried messages of importance +to Colonel Fairfield, the commandant at the fort. + +Joe Moore and Darry Germain were cousins, and both were boys of sixteen, +well built and well trained in outdoor athletic sports. Joe came from +Chicago and Darry from St. Louis, and each had graduated from his local +high school but a few weeks before. + +It was while Darry was spending a brief vacation with his cousin Joe +that a plan for visiting the fort was formed. Joe's older brother, +William, was a West Point graduate and a captain at the fort, and he +wrote on stating that he had received permission to have Joe visit him, +and Darry could come too if he desired. Colonel Fairfield was an old +friend of both families, and promised to treat the lads well should they +make the trip. + +"Hurrah! just the thing!" Joe had cried. "Of course you'll go, Darry. We +couldn't have a grander outing." + +"I'll go if father and mother will let me," had been Darry's answer, and +he had at once written home concerning the affair. Two weeks later the +boys were off, the parents of each cautioning them to be careful, and +wishing them the best of luck. + +The journey westward as far as the mining-town of Riverton had occurred +without special incident. They had been told to hire a guide at this +point, and while looking for a man had fallen in with Sam Benson. Benson +knew Captain William Moore well, and he at once promised to take the +boys along with him and do the best he could by them. + +"You'll want good hosses," Benson had said, and had aided them in +selecting their animals and in getting together the necessary outfit. +The start was made one fine morning in August, and all three of the +party were in the best of spirits. + +The four days in the mountains had opened the eyes of both lads. The +traveling had been rather hard, yet they had enjoyed every minute of the +journey. They had stopped once to do some fishing, and Benson had +brought down a small mountain deer. At night they had put up at the +cabins of hunters and trappers, and before retiring had listened to +thrilling tales of adventures with wild beasts and with the Indians. + +But now Joe was anxious to get to the fort and see his brother, from +whom he had been separated for nearly two years. Darry was also anxious +to reach the outpost, to meet not only his cousin William, but likewise +Colonel Fairfield, who was an old friend not easily forgotten. Once at +the fort the two boys felt that a vacation full of fun and pleasure +would follow. Never once did they dream of the perils which awaited them +in that wild region, which was not as civilized as it was to become a +handful of years later. + +"It seems to me it is growing hotter," remarked Darry, after riding a +quarter of a mile in silence. + +"It is growing hotter," answered the old scout. "And that makes me more +certain than ever that a storm's at hand." + +"We'll have to take what comes," said Joe. "But I did hope we'd reach +the fort by to-morrow." + +On they went, around a bend of the trail and over some rough rocks, +where the horses had to step with care, for fear of slipping into a +gully on the left. Then they reached a patch of timber and plunged +beneath the low-drooping trees. Here it was both dark and cool, and +Darry breathed a long sigh of relief. + +"How delicious!" he murmured. "It's almost like going into a cave. +Benson, there must be lots of caves in these mountains," he went on +reflectively. + +"There are," answered the old scout. "I've been in a score or more." + +"I should like to explore a big cave," came from Joe. "It would be a +novelty to me." + +"You may get the chance, lad," said Benson; "and get it soon." + +"What do you mean? Are we going to ride by a cave?" + +"There are a dozen or more ahead, and we may have to seek one of 'em for +shelter. Do you hear that?" + +Benson threw back his head to listen, and the two boys did likewise. +From a great distance came the rumble of thunder, echoing and re-echoing +throughout the mountains. To the westward the sun was hidden by a dense +mass of black clouds which grew more ominous each instant. + +"The storm is coming, sure enough," muttered Joe. "What do you propose?" + +"We'll ride on a bit, lad. It won't hit us right away. Come!" + +The horses were urged forward at an increased speed, and soon they +passed the patch of timber and came out to where a thick fringe of brush +skirted a long, high cliff. The sky was now dark on every side, and the +wind was rising with a dull, humming sound. + +"We'll catch it in a few minutes!" cried Benson; and hardly had he +spoken when the big drops came splashing down, hitting the broad leaves +in the underbrush with resounding smacks. + +The old scout continued to lead, and presently he turned to the left, +where the cliff parted. Here was an opening, lined on either side with +rocks and dirt, and a short distance further was the entrance to a cave +of unknown depths. + +"We'll stop here," said the old scout, leaping to the ground, followed +by the boys. "This aint the best place in the world, but it's better +than the open, in such a blow as is coming." + +He was right about the blow--already the wind was rising, and hardly had +the three led their horses into the cave, the entrance to which was over +a dozen feet high, when there came a crashing through the timber left +behind, which sent many a frail limb and sapling to the ground and +carried the leaves and twigs in all directions. + +"I'm glad we didn't stay in the woods!" cried Darry. "We'd be in danger +of falling trees." + +"And lightning too," added Joe. "Oh, my! look at that!" he continued, as +a blinding flash lit up the heavens. "That must have struck somewhere." + +"We'll go back a little," said old Benson. "The lightning is just as bad +here as it is in the woods. Wait till I get a torch." + +Pine was plentiful in that locality, and soon he had a knot which was +full of pitch and which burned well when a match was applied to it. With +the torch in hand, he led the way further into the cave, and the boys +followed with their animals. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +CAVES IN THE MOUNTAIN. + + +The two boys had expected to find the large cave damp and unwholesome, +and they were surprised when they learned how dry the flooring and the +sides were, and how pure the air was. There was no breeze in the place, +but a gentle draught kept the air stirring. Of course the atmosphere was +much cooler than it had been outside. + +Hardly had the travelers gained the center of the first chamber of the +cave, when the storm outside burst in all its fury. The lightning and +thunder were almost incessant, and the rain came down in broad sheets +which completely obliterated the landscape. + +"It's little short of a flood," said Darry, after having gone to the +mouth of the cave to investigate. "The water is already two or three +inches deep on the trail." + +"Well, such a downpour can't last long," returned Joe. "It's only a +shower, or a cloud-burst." + +"No, it's a regular rain, and it's good for all night," answered the old +scout. + +"All night!" + +"Yes, lad, and we'll be lucky if it don't last through the morning, too. +It don't rain very often out here, you see, but when it does it tries to +make up for lost time." + +"Then we'll have to camp right here, won't we?" + +"To be sure. Even if it did let up, you wouldn't want to camp in the wet +timber." + +"Then we might as well start up a fire," came from Darry, in something +of a disappointed tone. "I was hoping we'd be able to camp under the +stars just once before we got to the fort." + +"Perhaps you'll get a chance to go out after you're at the fort," said +the old scout, by way of comfort. "Yes, we'll start a fire, if we can +find any dry wood." + +The horses were tied up between some rocks, and then the three searched +around. At the entrance to the cave was a mass of brush and tree limbs +which previous storms had sent in that direction, and from this they +gathered enough for a good-sized fire. It did not take long for the +brush to blaze up, sending the sparks to the roof of the cave and +throwing fantastic shadows all about them. + +"I declare, the fire makes the cave look quite home-like!" was Joe's +comment, as he threw himself down on a flat rock with his blanket under +him. "Staying here won't be so humdrum as I anticipated." + +"I'm going to explore the cave, now I am here," returned Darry. "Who +knows but what I might locate a gold mine!" + +"You be careful of where you go," cautioned old Benson. "These caves are +full of pitfalls, and now you two boys are with me I don't want anything +to happen to you. If something did happen, neither Captain Moore nor +Colonel Fairfield would forgive me." + +"To be sure we'll be careful, Benson," answered Darry. "There'd be no +fun in getting hurt--even if we did locate a gold mine." + +"You won't find any gold mine here. This ground was prospected years +ago--before even the fort was located. I came out here once myself, with +a miner named Hooker Brown. Hooker was dead certain there was gold here, +but although we stayed here about two weeks nosing around we never got +even a smell of the yellow metal." + +"Well, we'll have a look around, anyway," said Joe. "But we must get +good torches first." + +Pine knots were procured and lit; and, with another caution from the +scout to be careful, they set off, leaving Benson to care for the horses +and prepare such an evening meal as their stores afforded. Luckily the +scout had brought down half a dozen good-sized birds, and these he now +prepared to broil in true hunter style. + +The front chamber of the cave was somewhat semi-circular, and behind +this were several other irregular apartments, running down to a +passageway which wound in and out between jagged rocks almost impossible +to climb or explore in any manner. At a distance could be heard the +trickling of water, but where this came from, or where it went to, +nobody in the cave could imagine. + +The boys advanced from one opening to another with care, one with his +torch held high, that they might see ahead, and the other with the light +close to the ground, to warn them of a possible pitfall. + +"A regiment of soldiers could quarter in here," observed Darry, as they +pushed on. "What a defense it would make!" + +"An enemy could fire right into the entrance. And, besides, supposing +the enemy started to smoke you out? I can smell the smoke from the +camp-fire away back here." + +At last the two boys reached the passageway back of the rear chamber, +and here came to a halt. The dropping water could be plainly heard, and +Joe flashed his torch in several directions in the hope of catching +sight of the stream. + +"I'm going to climb the rocks," he said, after a pause. "Perhaps there +is another opening behind them." + +"Remember what Benson said, and be careful," cautioned his cousin. +"There is no use in taking a risk for nothing." + +"Yes, I'll be careful," answered Joe, and crawled forward with care. +Darry held his torch as high up as possible, to light the way. + +The youth had advanced a distance of fifty feet when he came to a turn +in the passageway. Here the side walls were not over two yards apart, +while the roof could be touched with ease. + +Thinking the walking better at this point, Joe struck out once more. The +flare from his torch showed him something of a chamber ahead, and the +water sounded closer than ever. + +But hardly had the lad taken a dozen steps when the smooth rock upon +which he was advancing tilted up, sending him headlong. As he went down +the torch was knocked from his hand. Then he slid forward into the +darkness. + +"Help!" he managed to cry. "Help!" + +"What's up?" came from Darry, but the words were drowned out in the +crashing of one stone against another. In the meantime Joe had fallen, +he knew not whither. He landed on some soft ground, turned over and slid +along, and then took a second drop. A stone fell beside him and pinned +his jacket to the ground. + +For the moment the lad was too dazed and bewildered to do anything but +try to get back his breath. Then, as it gradually dawned upon him that +he was not hurt in the least, he endeavored to arise. + +"Fast!" he muttered, and tore his jacket away from under the rock. Then +he turned about, trying to locate his torch. But that was missing, and +all was dark around him. + +"I'm in a pickle now," he thought. "I wish I had taken old Benson's +advice and remained around the camp-fire. But who would have imagined +that big rock would play a fellow such a trick? How in the world am I to +get back again?" + +From a great distance he could hear Darry shouting to him. He tried to +answer his cousin, but whether or not his voice was heard he could not +tell. + +With his hands before him, he moved around, and scarcely had he taken a +dozen steps when he slid down a rocky incline. Here there was water; and +he shivered, thinking he might be dropping into an underground stream +from which there would be no escape. But when a pool was gained it +proved to be but several inches deep. + +As Joe stood in the pool there came a sudden rumble of thunder to his +ears. He listened, and by the sounds became convinced that an opening +into the outer air could not be a great way off. Then came an unexpected +flash of reflected light on the rocks by his side. + +"Hurrah, that light came from outside!" he cried. "I'm not buried alive, +after all. But I may be a good way from daylight yet." + +He had some matches in his box, and lighting one of these he discovered +a passageway below him, running off to his left. Further on he picked up +a bit of dry wood and lit this. It made rather a poor torch, but proved +better than nothing. + +"Now to get out, and then to find my way back to where I left old +Benson," was his mental resolve. + +With extreme caution he stole forward to where the lightning revealed a +distant opening. He did not leave one foothold until he was sure of the +next, for he had no desire to experiment with another moving rock. + +The thunder now reached his ears plainly, and the lightning at times +made the front of the cave as bright as day. + +"It's quite another place," was his thought. "That dangerous passage +connects the two." + +Suddenly, as Joe was advancing, he heard a clatter of horses' hoofs, and +into the cave ahead rode three rough-looking men, all armed with rifles +and pistols and each carrying small saddle-bags across his steed. + +At first Joe thought to call out to the newcomers, but he checked +himself, for their appearance was decidedly against them. + +"I'll try to find out something about them first," he muttered. "Perhaps +they belong to that gang of bad men Benson was telling us about +yesterday." And then, as the three came to a halt in the center of the +outer cave and dismounted, he crept closer, in the shadow of some sharp +rocks, to overhear what they might have to say. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +AN IMPORTANT CONVERSATION. + + +"Who ever saw such a downpour before?" growled one of the three men, as +he switched the water from his soft felt hat. "I'm wet to the skin." + +"I'm no better off," replied one of the others. "I think we were fools +to leave Macklin's place, Gilroy." + +"Just what I think, Fetter," said the third man. "We could have waited +as well as not." + +"Yes, we could have waited, Potts," answered Matt Gilroy; "but, to tell +the truth, I don't want to trust Macklin too far. He might play us +foul." + +"He wouldn't dare to do that," returned Gus Fetter. + +"Why not--if he thought he would get a reward?" came from Nat Potts, the +youngest of the trio. "One thing is certain, Macklin is crazy to make +money." + +"I know a thing or two of Macklin's past--that's why," went on Gus +Fetter. "If he got us into trouble I wouldn't keep silent about him, and +he knows it." + +"Macklin is slippery, no two ways about it," said Matt Gilroy, as he +took off his jacket and wrung the water out. "I am not inclined to trust +him, and that is all there is to it." + +"Did he ever belong to the old gang?" questioned Nat Potts. "Some say he +did, and some say he didn't." + +"He was a hanger-on, that's all," came from Matt Gilroy. "He was always +afraid to take the chances of being shot, but was on hand when the +spoils were divided. They used him as a messenger and a spy, but I don't +believe he ever really helped to hold up a coach." + +"Humph, then it's a wonder the old crowd had anything to do with him!" + +"Oh, they had to have messengers and spies, and they never gave Macklin +more than was coming to him, you can bet on that! I understand that when +the Riverton coach was held up six years ago, and the gang got +twenty-two thousand dollars, they gave Macklin five hundred, and he was +glad to get that." + +"That was a big haul!" cried Nat Potts enthusiastically. "I wish I had +been in it." + +"The gang was followed for two days--by the soldiers under Colonel +Fairfield," went on Matt Gilroy, as he threw himself on the rocks, +leaving his companions to start up a fire. "They had a hot time of it +over to Bear Pass, I can tell you. Two men were shot, and one of them, +Dan Hickey, my old chum, died from his wounds. They say Colonel +Fairfield himself fired the shot that took poor Hickey in the head, and +if that's so--well, I've got an account to square with the colonel, +that's all." + +"You can square that after we've had our little interview with the +quartermaster," returned Gus Fetter with a hard laugh. + +"That's right--we'll be sure to have the soldiers after us," put in Nat +Potts. "They'll be doubly mad when they learn that the hold-up resulted +in the emptying of the box with their wages." + +"It will be a good haul if it goes through, boys. The quartermaster will +be carrying not less than twelve thousand dollars of the government's +money besides his other stuff," returned Matt Gilroy. + +Here the conversation came to a temporary end, for Nat Potts had +produced a black flask, from which each of the men took a deep draught. +Then Potts and Fetter started in to build a roaring fire at which all +might dry their clothing, leaving Gilroy, the leader of the crowd, to do +as he pleased. + +Joe had listened to the talk with mingled interest and horror. It did +not take him long to realize the truth--that these men were thoroughly +bad, and that they had been mixed up in road robberies of the past and +were contemplating another robbery some time in the future. + +"They mean to rob the quartermaster of the fort, when he is bringing in +the soldiers' wages from Rockspur," he thought. "And that leader is +going to shoot down the colonel if he can. Who would imagine men could +be so bad! And that leader seems to be educated, too!" + +Joe would have been very much surprised had he known the truth, which +was that Matt Gilroy, often called The Shadow, was a college-bred man, +having passed through one of the leading institutes of learning of the +Pacific coast. But, following this college career, Gilroy had forged +checks and committed a burglary, in company with an old chum named +Hickey, and then the two had left Sacramento "between two days." Hickey +had immediately joined the "knights of the road" and been shot down, as +previously mentioned. Gilroy had drifted first to the Mississippi and +then to Denver, and had not gone into the mountains until later. Now he +was at the head of a desperate gang, numbering ten or a dozen, who had +already committed several "hold-ups" of importance. + +Soon the fire was burning brightly, and the three men took off part of +their wearing apparel, that the articles might dry. They had brought +some food with them, and as they sat eating and drinking they continued +to discuss their plans. Nat Potts, who was not over nineteen or twenty, +was evidently something of a new member, and asked many questions +regarding the organization, and as he took in what was told him, so did +Joe, listening with "all ears," as the saying goes. + +"They must be as bad a crowd as can be found anywhere," thought the +youth. "I wonder what they would do with me, if they found out I had +been listening to their talk? Perhaps they'd kill me on the spot." And +he gave a shiver. + +The thunder and lightning had gradually abated, but with the coming of +night the rain continued as steadily as ever. Fortunately for the +desperadoes, however, the rocks sloped away from the entrance to the +cave, so that no water came inside, while the fire made everybody quite +comfortable. + +Hardly knowing what to do, Joe continued behind the rocks, taking care +to remain in the shadow. More than once he was afraid one or another of +the men would start to investigate the surroundings and that he would be +discovered. + +"I wish they would go to sleep," he said to himself. "Then I might get a +chance to slip past them and their horses." + +With great impatience he watched the men finish up their supper, get out +their pipes, and fall to smoking. In the meantime the horses had been +led to the opposite side of the cave and fastened to the rocks. + +As Joe waited for a chance to get away he wondered what Darry and old +Benson were doing. More than likely they were looking for him. But were +they in that other cave, at the narrow passageway, or did the old scout +know of this second cave and the secret entrance to it? + +"If Benson leads the way around to here there may be trouble," he mused. +"It would be better if I could get out and head him off. But if I do get +out, how shall I turn to find the trail we were pursuing? In this +darkness a fellow couldn't see his hand before his face." + +At last Fetter threw himself down on a blanket to rest, leaving Gilroy +and Potts still conversing earnestly by the fire. The two desperadoes +talked in a low tone, so that Joe now caught but little of what was +said. + +The backs of both men were turned toward the side of the cave where Joe +was in hiding; and, plucking up courage, the youth started forward on +tiptoe, bent upon getting out of the cave before the men should make +some move which would expose him. + +Step by step he advanced, until he reached a point where he was within a +dozen feet of Gilroy and almost as close to Potts. He hardly dared to +breathe, and his heart thumped madly beneath his jacket. But the men +continued to smoke and talk, unconscious of his proximity. + +At the entrance to the cave the rocks were somewhat rough and the mist +had made them slippery. Joe was crawling forward rapidly, when one foot +slipped, and he pitched headlong, making considerable noise. + +"What was that?" cried Matt Gilroy, and leaped to his feet. He had been +gazing into the fire, and for the moment could make out little in the +darkness. + +"I don't know," returned Nat Potts. "Something moving around out there, +I think." And the younger man reached for his pistol, which still +remained in his belt. + +As rapidly as he could Joe sprang to his feet. A good bit of his wind +had been knocked out of him, but he felt that he must not delay, and he +ran for the outer air gasping for breath. + +"Hi! stop!" roared Matt Gilroy, catching sight of him at last. "Stop, I +tell you!" + +"A boy!" ejaculated Nat Potts. "He must have been hiding in here!" + +"If he was he overheard too much," growled Gilroy. "Come, we must catch +him by all means," and he ran after Joe, with Potts following. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +LOST IN THE FOREST. + + +"I must get away from them!" + +This was the one thought which surged through Joe Moore's brain as he +dashed from the cave in the mountain. He felt that if he was captured it +would go hard with him. Did the desperadoes learn that he had overheard +their conversation, they might make his very life pay the forfeit. + +Forward he pitched, into the rain and the inky darkness, not knowing in +what direction and just then caring but little. His one idea was to put +distance between himself and his pursuers. + +"Stop!" he heard the men call, and heard the clicking of a pistol +hammer. Then he reached some brushwood, and, crouching low, continued to +move on. No shot came, for the reason that the desperadoes could not +locate him with certainty. + +At length Joe reached a clump of trees. Had he not had his hands before +him he might have run into them head first. He glided around them, and +then continued onward, down a slope leading into a broad belt of timber. +Still with his hands before him, he advanced through the undergrowth and +between the stately trees for a distance of several hundred feet. + +He was now exhausted with running and with fighting the entangling +vines, and had to halt to catch his breath. As he came to a stop he +listened attentively, to learn if the men were following, but the +downpour of rain drowned out every other sound. + +Soaked to the skin, hatless, and still short of breath, he went on once +more, feeling that he was not yet far enough from the cave for safety. +He tried to steer a course in the direction of the cave where he had +left Darry and the old scout, but whether he was successful or not he +could not tell. + +A hundred yards further and Joe came to another slope, covered with +prairie grass. Down this he rolled in the darkness, to bring up in more +brush below. Then he climbed out of the hollow at the opposite side, +and, reaching a large fallen tree, sat down to rest and think over his +situation. The tree lay partly under one with wide-spreading branches, +so the boy was somewhat sheltered from the storm. + +It must be confessed that Joe's heart sank within him as he reviewed the +situation. Where he was he could not tell, nor could he form any +definite plan for rejoining his cousin and old Benson. More than this, +he was afraid that the desperadoes might come up at any minute and +pounce upon him. + +But as the minutes slipped by, and he neither saw nor heard anything of +those in pursuit, he grew easier. Evidently they had given up the chase. + +"I hope they have," was what he thought. "I never want to get so close +to them again. They are a hard crowd, if ever there was one. If I can +get to the fort and tell Colonel Fairfield of what I've heard, I'll be +doing a good thing." + +An hour went by slowly, and then Joe looked around to find some means of +making himself comfortable for the balance of the night, knowing it +would be useless to pursue his course through the forest in the +darkness. + +"This is camping out with a vengeance!" he muttered grimly. "Darry ought +to be along; I guess he'd soon get enough of it. I'll be lucky if I +don't fall in with some savage animal." + +The thought of wild beasts gave him another shiver, and he concluded to +climb into a nearby tree, which was low-drooping and had a spot where +several branches made a sort of platform. He was soon up in a +comparatively dry place, and here he fell asleep, being too tired to +hold his eyes open longer. + +When Joe awoke the storm had cleared away and the sun was struggling +through the scattering clouds. The forest still dripped with the rain, +and with this dripping were mingled the songs of the birds and the hum +of insects. + +Stiff from the wet, he climbed slowly to the ground and looked around. +On every side were the tall trees and the dense undergrowth, shutting +off the distant view of everything but a towering mountain to the +westward. This was the mountain he and the others had been ascending +when the storm had overtaken them. + +"I suppose I may as well head in that direction," he mused. "If I can +strike the trail that will be something. But I'll have to keep my eyes +open, or I may fall into the hands of that Gilroy gang." + +He was hungry, but there were no means at hand with which to satisfy the +cravings of his stomach, and so he had to move forward without eating. + +Getting into the forest had been difficult, but getting out was even +more of a task. The underbrush at certain points was positively +impassable, and he had to make long detours, which took time and tired +him greatly. At noon he was still in the forest, and the mountain +seemed as far off as ever. + +"I am lost, that is all there is to it!" he burst out with a groan. "I +am lost, and perhaps I'll never get out!" + +The sun shone down directly on his head, and even though still wet he +was glad enough to seek the shelter the stately trees afforded. Here and +there he saw some berries of various hues, but they were strange to him, +and he did not dare touch them for fear of being poisoned. + +Toward the middle of the afternoon he reached a tiny brook, flowing +between the rocks, and here he again rested. He reached the conclusion +that the brook came down from the mountain side and by following it up +he must sooner or later run across the lost trail. + +"I'll follow it, anyway," he told himself, and, hungry and footsore, set +out along the water-course. + +Here the walking was somewhat better, for he had no brushwood and vines +to tear aside. The brook was clear, and he often saw trout and other +fish darting hither and thither. This gave him an idea, and, picking +some berries he had seen, he dropped them in. At once some of the fish +darted forward and swallowed the berries. + +"Hurrah, a good bait!" he cried, and quickly made himself a line out of +threads from his clothing. To this he attached a pin bent into shape +with infinite care. Then he baited with the berries, and dropped the +line in over a rock near a cottonwood. + +Hardly had his bait touched the water when a good-sized fish seized it, +and in a twinkling he had his catch landed. His heart gave a bound, for +here was the material for at least one square meal. + +"I'll cook it right away," he told himself, after feeling to see if he +had any matches. His hunger was beginning to make him desperate, and he +did not much care even if the desperadoes did see his camp-fire. + +With some trouble he got together a few sticks of wood and some moss +which the sunshine had dried out, and soon he had a respectable blaze +between two rocks. With his jackknife he cleaned the fish as best he +could, and then broiled it on a green twig. When done the meat was +slightly burnt on one side and underdone on the other, but to the +half-famished lad nothing had ever tasted sweeter, and he continued to +eat until the whole fish was gone. + +"Now I feel like myself," he muttered, after washing down the repast +with a drink from the brook. "On a pinch that meal ought to last me +until to-morrow noon, and surely I ought to find my way back to the +others by that time." + +With renewed energy he continued his tramp along the brook, often wading +in the water when the brushwood on either side was extra thick. He kept +his eyes and ears on the alert, but no human being came into sight, and +presently a great feeling of loneliness swept over him. + +"I'm alone," he whispered to himself. "Alone! I must say I don't like it +much," and he hurried on faster than ever. + +The sun was shining over the distant mountain when he reached a bend in +the brook and came out upon a rocky trail which crossed the water-course +at a right angle. As he looked at the trail he was tempted to shout with +joy. + +"The place we crossed yesterday morning!" he exclaimed. "There is the +very spot where we got a drink and watered the horses. Now I ought not +to have such a hard time finding the cave." + +He got down and examined the trail closely, hoping to discover some +hoofmarks. But the heavy rain had washed everything clean. Nevertheless, +he felt certain that he was right, and hurried along as fast as his +tired limbs permitted. + +Leaving the brook, the trail wound in and out along a series of rocks +and then through some heavy brushwood and along the edge of a jagged +cliff. The cliff was overgrown with heavy vines, which hung down and +brushed Joe's head as he passed. + +"I can't be more than three or four miles from the cave," thought the +boy. "And if I hurry----" + +He stopped short, and then gave a cry of terror, and with good reason. +He had seen the vines ahead suddenly part, and now there came to view +the shaggy head of a black bear. As soon as the beast caught sight of +the boy he leaped to the trail and advanced upon him. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE BIG BLACK BEAR. + + +Joe had never before met a black bear in the open air, but he had seen +several in menageries and studied them at a safe distance, and he +realized that he was in a perilous position. The bear looked both +untamed and fierce and as if nothing would suit him better than to hug +the lad to death and eat him up afterward. + +Joe did not stand upon the order of his going, but went instantly, +running as fast as his tired limbs would permit. After him came the +bear, and it was astonishing what good time the beast could make +considering his size and his general appearance of clumsiness. Looking +over his shoulder, the lad soon saw that the beast was slowly but surely +lessening the distance between them. + +"Shoo!" he yelled, and waved his arm threateningly, but the bear did not +mind in the least. He trotted on until less than two rods separated boy +and beast. Then Joe reached some underbrush and rocks, with a +low-hanging tree in their midst, and without stopping to think twice he +climbed into the tree and to one of the upper branches. + +Hardly had he reached what he thought might prove a temporary place of +safety when he realized his mistake. The bear came up the tree after +him,--slowly, it is true; but still up,--and this caused Joe's hair to +fairly stand upon end. + +"I'm a gone one now!" he groaned, and then espied another tree growing +not far away. A limb could just be reached, and as the bear almost +gained the boy's foot Joe swung himself from the first tree into the +second. + +As the lad gained a safe spot on the tree limb, the bear, coming to a +halt on the branch opposite, set up a growl of rage and disappointment. +For a minute he surveyed the situation, then came out on the branch +slowly, testing it inch by inch. As it bent down he retreated, letting +out a second growl, louder than the other. + +Joe was wondering if he could drop to the ground and escape in that +manner, when he saw the bear descend and come quickly toward the tree he +was on. He watched the beast closely, and waited until it was close to +him. Then he made a leap back into the tree from which he had originally +come. + +Again the bear came out as far as possible on a limb, and again he let +out a growl of rage and disappointment. In one way the situation was +comical, and Joe might have laughed had he not felt so serious. + +"We can keep this up a long time, I reckon," thought the boy. "And as +long as you don't try to leap after me I'll be safe." + +Finding he could not reach the boy by coming up one tree or the other, +the black bear descended slowly to the ground. Then he walked around +both trees several times, and at last came to a halt between the two. +Here he sank down, as if to rest, but nevertheless kept one eye open and +fixed upon Joe. + +"He's going on guard! He means to keep me treed!" muttered the boy, and +again his heart sank. He remembered a story he had once read, in which a +bear had starved a man to death and eaten him afterward. Would Mr. Bruin +do so in this case? + +He wished he had a pistol, or a hunting-knife, or even a fair-sized +stone. But he had nothing except a thin club, which he had cut for +himself with his jackknife. This he kept in hand, and also kept the +knife open and where he could get at it readily if needed. + +Half an hour went by,--a time that to Joe seemed a whole day,--and +still the black bear remained between the two trees, dozing with one eye +and watching with the other. + +The sight of the beast taking it so easy was maddening under the +circumstances, and at last the youth cut another club and hurled it down +on top of the bear. At once the beast flew up with a roar, and, standing +on his hind legs, snapped his teeth at Joe. Then he flew up the tree +once more, faster than ever before. + +As the bear came up, Joe went higher than before, having seen another +friendly limb over his head. He was sorely tempted to reach for the +beast with his club, but thought best not to run too much of a risk. + +As before, the youth swung to the next tree, and again the bear gave a +growl and went down. Then, being near the top of the tree, the lad took +a good look around. + +In a moment a sight caught his eye which caused his heart to jump with +delight. There on the trail were Darry and old Benson, riding along +slowly. + +"Hi! hi! This way!" he shouted, with all the strength of his lungs. +"This way, Darry! This way, Benson!" + +He saw his cousin and the guide bring their steeds to a halt and gaze +around in wonder. To them the voice appeared to come out of the very +air itself. + +"It's Joe's voice!" exclaimed Darry. "But I must say I don't see him." + +Both gazed around, and at last the scout caught sight of the boy's +handkerchief fluttering among the tree branches. + +"There he is!" he exclaimed. "But what's he doing up there?" + +"This way!" went on Joe, and as they turned in the direction, he added, +"Look out for the bear!" + +"A bear!" came from Darry. "He must be treed!" + +"I reckon you've struck it," muttered Benson, and hastily unslung his +rifle, at which Darry did the same. "Follow me, but be on your guard," +went on the old scout. + +He advanced with caution, his horse lifting his ears sharply as the +neighborhood of the trees was gained. Presently the animal came to a +sudden halt. At the same moment Benson caught sight of the bear. + +"So that's where ye are!" muttered the old scout. + +The bear raised himself on his hind legs and let out a growl at the +newcomers. Hardly had the sound arose upon the air when Benson's rifle +cracked, and a bullet hit the beast in the breast. Down went the animal +on all fours, but did not tumble further. Instead, he made a swift bound +for the scout's horse. + +Crack! It was now Darry's rifle that spoke up, and the bear was hit +again, this time in the right front knee. He dropped, but quickly arose, +shaking the wounded leg in the air and uttering a tremendous roar of +pain and rage. + +[Illustration: "NOW DARRY'S RIFLE SPOKE UP, AND THE BEAR WAS HIT AGAIN"] + +Neither horse would now stand still, and both danced around so lively +that each rider had all he could do to keep his saddle. But even while +his steed pranced in this fashion, old Benson managed to draw his +pistol, and two additional shots rang out, both hitting the bear in the +side. The roars of the beast were now incessant, and the horses +threatened to bolt in spite of all the riders could do to stop them. + +"Come!" cried the old scout, and turned from the scene. Thinking he +meant to go off to reload, Darry followed. But when at a safe distance +Benson sprang to the ground and tied his horse to a tree. + +"I'd rather finish him afoot," explained the old hunter, and slipped +another cartridge into his rifle. "You can stay here if you wish." + +"Not much!" murmured Darry, and came down also. In a minute he was +following the old scout. When they came up a second time they found the +bear crawling around, roaring in a lower tone. Evidently he was more +than half exhausted. + +"Another good shot will finish him," sang out Joe, from a bottom limb of +the tree. "Why don't you give it to him in the ear?" + +"I will," answered the old scout, and circled around, watching his +opportunity. At length it came--the rifle cracked sharply, and Bruin +fell on his side, to rise no more. + +"Hurrah! That's a big haul!" cried Darry, much delighted. "I was wishing +we'd get a bear some time while we were out here." + +"It's lucky the bear didn't get Joe," remarked Benson. "They generally +come up a tree after their victim." + +"I jumped from one tree to the other," answered the youth. "But I had +quite an exciting time, I can assure you." + +"How in the world did you get here?" questioned Darry, as Joe leaped to +the ground. "Did you get through to another cave? Benson thought that +might be the case." + +"That was the case, Darry. And I've had a wonderful adventure, too," +added Joe earnestly. Then he told his story, to which the others +listened with close attention. When he came to mention Gilroy, Fetter, +and Potts, old Benson uttered a low whistle. + +"So that gang has turned up again, eh?" muttered the old scout. "This +will be news to Colonel Fairfield. I reckon he'll be glad to be put on +guard. If the quartermaster was held up it would prove a big loss." + +"Is it true that Colonel Fairfield killed this Gilroy's chum?" + +"Perhaps he did. The colonel was in that mix-up, and after it was over +Dan Hickey was found dead in the bushes. But it was a fair fight, and +the desperadoes knew what to expect when they went in for it." + +"When does the quartermaster expect to come through with the money?" + +"I don't know, Joe. Like as not it will be soon. And that being the +case, we had better not lose time here, but get to the fort just as soon +as we can," concluded the old scout. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +DARRY MAKES A DISCOVERY. + + +As pressed as they were for time, Darry and Joe begged that the bearskin +be saved, and did all they could toward helping the old scout skin the +beast. With the pelt they took along about twenty pounds of the juiciest +steaks. + +"It's a pity to leave the rest to the wolves!" sighed Joe. "But it can't +be helped. What a feast they will have!" + +"I'm going to sling the beast into a tree," replied old Benson. "That +may help save it until somebody else comes this way. The soldiers from +the fort use the trail yonder, you know." + +Soon they were on the way to where Benson and Darry had left Joe's +horse. As Joe was tired from his night's adventure, his cousin and the +old scout took turns in carrying him behind them. Even then his eyes +would occasionally close. + +"We can't make the fort to-night, that's certain," said the old scout. + +"Not if we pushed on hard?" asked Darry. + +"Joe can't push on as fast as that, Darry. He'll want to rest as soon as +sundown comes." + +"Perhaps I can get a nap at noon, while you two get dinner ready," +suggested Joe. "I wonder if we'll meet those rascals anywhere on the +road? I hope not, for they'd be certain to recognize me." + +"We'll keep an eye open for 'em," responded Benson dryly. "And see to it +that your shooting-irons are ready for use." + +"Why--do you think they'd attack us?" asked Darry quickly. + +"They might--if they thought we were carrying anything of value. To such +desperadoes all are fish that swim near their net." + +"It's a pity the government can't stamp such a gang out, Benson." + +"The government has stamped out lots of 'em, lad. Why, ten years ago +none of these trails was safe. Nearly every horseman and stage-coach was +held up. To-day you don't hear of a hold-up once in six months." + +"Is this Gilroy a very bad man?" + +"He is--in a way. He's a well-educated fellow, so I've been told, and +not as brutal as some. But he's committed some robberies that have no +equal in the history of these parts. Once he painted himself as an +Indian and went to the agency, and there collected a lot of money which +was coming to the redskins, the agent taking him for Chief Snowbird of +the Modocs. The trick wasn't discovered until three days later, when the +real Snowbird turned up. Even then it wasn't known who did the trick." + +"And how was Gilroy found out?" + +"A fellow named Downes, who belonged to the gang, was captured, and he +gave the secret away. But it cost Downes his life, for he got away from +the soldiers, and while he was in the mountains some of his gang shot +and killed him." + +At this story both Joe and Darry shuddered. + +"What a lawless set!" muttered Joe. "One could hardly believe it unless +he saw it with his own eyes." + +"In a rough country the men are bound to be more or less rough, lad. +Look at California, for instance. To-day it's as quiet and orderly as +Massachusetts or Illinois. But in the days of '49 it wasn't that way. +Many a miner was held up for his gold dust, and many a miner's secret of +a rich find was stolen from him and the miner himself murdered." + +"And how long do you think it will take to make this territory perfectly +safe?" + +"There aint no telling about that, but probably when you are as old as I +am now you'll be able to travel anywhere without fear of being stopped. +The railroads are a-coming in, towns are building up, and one of these +days the desperadoes and stage-coach robbers will all be a thing of the +past--and a good job done." + +The third horse had been found, and now Joe was riding in his own +saddle. The rain of the night before had made the trail dustless, and +the air was as pure and sweet as one could wish. + +By noon they calculated that they had covered ten miles of the worst +portion of the distance to the fort. The ride had been a strain to Joe, +and when old Benson called a halt he was glad enough to slip to the +ground and throw himself in the shade of a tree to rest. Darry and the +old scout lit a fire, and soon had a nice steak preparing for dinner. + +"He's asleep," said Darry, a little later, pointing to Joe. "Poor +fellow! supposing we let him rest for a couple of hours? I haven't the +heart to wake him up." + +"All right," answered Benson. The pair ate their dinner without arousing +Joe, and after it was over the scout sat down near at hand to smoke his +stumpy brier-root pipe, filling it with cut-plug which was as black as +coal, and puffing away with keen satisfaction. + +Darry was more restless, and having put away the things used in +preparing the meal he began an inspection of the neighborhood. + +"Be careful," said old Benson, as the youth moved around. "Don't get +into trouble, as Joe did." + +"I'll keep my eyes open," replied Darry. + +Opposite the trail was a tall spur of rocks with something of a series +of natural steps leading to the top. Up these steps went the youth. Some +of the climbing was difficult, but this he did not mind. + +When the top was gained a magnificent panorama was spread out before +him. To one side were the tall mountains, hidden in a bluish mist, to +the other the vast forests and plains. Northward was the continuation of +the gap they were traveling, and southward was a series of foothills, +with here and there a stream or waterfall glinting brightly in the +sunshine. + +"How grand!" he murmured. "What a vast country this is! Thousands upon +thousands of people could live here, and nobody be crowded. This would +make splendid pasture for cows and sheep, and yet there isn't a single +animal in sight." + +Beyond the rocky spur was a similar elevation, and presently Darry +crossed to this. Here there was a lone pine with several low branches, +and he drew himself up and climbed to the top. He could now see much +further than formerly, and his view took in a portion of the trail +passed several hours before, as it wound, serpent-like, between the +foothills. + +"Hullo!" he cried, as he caught sight of something moving on the trail. +"Three people on horseback. Can they be the desperadoes Joe met?" + +He watched the riders with interest, and at last felt certain they were +three men fully armed and wearing slouch hats and light-colored coats. +This description tallied with that given by his cousin, and he hastened +down to acquaint old Benson with the news. + +"Must be the gang," said the scout. "Are they moving this way?" + +"Yes." + +"Then we had better move on." + +Joe was awakened, and leaped to his feet, looking rather bewildered. + +"I--I thought I'd take a little nap," he stammered. "I suppose I've +slept a good while, haven't I?" + +"About an hour and a half," answered his cousin. "Here's your dinner," +and he passed it over. "We've got to move on. Those rascals are behind +us." + +"Behind us!" + +"Don't get scared," put in old Benson. "They are a good distance back. +Darry discovered 'em from yonder p'int. Eat what you want, and then it +will be time enough to start." + +The repast was quickly disposed of by Joe, and soon they were in the +saddle once more. The long nap had refreshed the lad greatly, and he +said he would now be able to ride as far as anybody. + +On they went, the trail growing more difficult as the top of the +mountain was gained. Here there was a stiff breeze that at times was +positively cold, and both boys were glad enough to button their jackets +tightly around them. + +If all went well Benson calculated that they could reach Hank Leeson's +place with ease before dark. This was the cabin of an old hunter and +trapper who was known from one end of the Territory to the other. As +mentioned at the beginning of this tale, Leeson's place was twenty miles +from the fort. + +"I could ride right through," said the old scout. "But you boys couldn't +do it. If you tried it, you'd be so sore and stiff the next day you +couldn't stand up." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +AT HANK LEESON'S CABIN. + + +At first the boys were inclined to think that the old scout was +mistaken--that they could ride as far as anybody. But when, shortly +after sunset, they came within sight of Hank Leeson's place both were +glad to think that they would have to ride no more for the present. + +"I'm sore already," whispered Darry to his cousin. + +"So am I--but I didn't want Benson to know it," was the low answer. +"That last mile of the trail was awfully rough." + +Hank Leeson had seen them coming, and stood at the doorway of his cabin, +rifle in hand. He was a tall, thin man, with black eyes that were +exceedingly sharp and shrewd. When he recognized Sam Benson he dropped +his firearm into a corner and ran to meet the scout. + +"Downright glad ter see ye!" he said, shaking hands. "Sam, yer a sight +fer sore eyes, thet's wot!" + +"And I'm glad to see you, Hank," responded Benson, just as warmly. "How +have things been with you?" + +"Putty slow, to tell the truth." Leeson looked at the boys. "Two +tenderfoots along, I see." + +"Yes. This is Joe Moore, brother to the captain up at the fort, and this +is Darry Germain, his cousin. Boys, this is Hank Leeson, the best +trapper and all-around shot in these parts." + +"Oh, come, don't be a-praisin' me so much!" cried Leeson, as he took the +boys' hands in a grip that made them wince. "As fer shootin', ye kin do +thet yerself as good as anybody, Sam." He looked the boys over. "Glad to +know ye, lads. I know Captain Moore downright well, and he's a good +soldier." + +"I've got news, Hank," put in the old scout. "Joe fell in with Matt +Gilroy's gang down near Buckwater Run." + +"What!" roared the old trapper. "Do you mean to tell me thet measly +crowd is around here ag'in?" + +"Three of 'em are--Gilroy, Fetter, and a young fellow named Potts. I +think Potts comes from Denver." + +"I know him. His father was Ike Potts, the card-sharp. Thet blood is +about as bad as any in the gang. What are they up to?" + +"They are laying a trap for the quartermaster when he comes through with +the soldiers' money. Joe heard part of their talk by accident. Do you +know when the quartermaster is expected?" + +"I do not. Ye see, ever since old Cap'n Bissile was held up the army +officers keep mum about the movements of the cash-box. I reckon they +have orders from Washington to do it." + +"I want to warn Colonel Fairfield as soon as I can," went on the old +scout. + +"Yes, he ought to be warned." + +"Can you lend me a fresh hoss?" + +"I can." + +"Then I'll be off as soon as I've had a bit of supper. The boys can stay +with you all night, can't they?" + +"They can, an' welcome," replied Hank Leeson. + +"You are going to leave us?" queried Joe. + +"Don't see any other way to do, lad. The sooner I get the news to the +fort the better. I'll come back in the morning after you--or send your +brother or somebody else." + +"We can ride it alone, can't we?" questioned Darry. + +"I wouldn't try it, if I were you. The trail is a rough one, and there +are several forks where you might go astray." + +"Better stay with me, lads," put in Leeson. "I'll treat ye well, never +fear," and he smiled broadly. + +"Thank you," returned Joe. "I was only thinking I'd like to see my +brother soon, that's all." + +"A few hours more or less won't make much difference," said Darry. He +had looked around the trapper's cabin, and was interested. "Let us +wait." And so it was arranged. + +It did not take long to get a bit of supper, and in less than half an +hour Sam Benson was off, astride of a powerful steed which had been Hank +Leeson's pride for years. + +"Jest tell him to go to the fort," said Leeson, "and he'll carry ye thar +with his eyes shet," and he gave a parting salute to the old scout. + +The cabin was a primitive affair of rough logs, with the chinks filled +with dried clay. It contained two rooms, each about twelve feet square. +Back of the cabin was a lean-to where Leeson kept his horses, two in +number. There was room for more animals, so the beasts ridden by our +friends were easily accommodated. + +Night had fallen by the time the horses had been rubbed down and fed and +the boys had finished their evening repast, and it was dark when they +gathered around the doorstep to rest. Hank Leeson sat on a +chopping-block, cleaning his rifle and smoking at the same time, and as +the three rested Joe told of his adventure in the cave, and Darry took +up the tale of the bear. + +"You had a lucky escape, lad," said the trapper. "A lucky escape, an' no +error. Like as not them desperadoes would have killed ye, had they +caught ye." + +"I've been thinking--do you imagine they'll come here to-night?" asked +Darry. + +Hank Leeson shook his head. + +"Don't allow as they will. About a year ago I gave thet Fetter fair +warnin' if he showed his face about my cabin I'd plug him full o' holes, +an' I sent Gilroy the same message. They know me, an' know I won't stand +any nonsense. They'll be likely to give me a wide berth. They know I +aint got much worth stealin'." + +"Then we ought to be safe until the soldiers get the news." + +"Reckon you will be, lad," answered the trapper. + +He was very much of a quaint character, and for two hours the boys sat +up, listening to his tales of encounters with wild animals, desperadoes, +and Indians. + +"I've had my own little fun with b'ars," he said. "Got in a tree onct, +and a b'ar kept me there fer a whole day. I had wounded him in the leg, +and in running over a brook I dropped my gun." + +"How did you get away?" asked Darry. + +"I didn't know what to do fust. The b'ar had me foul, and kept right at +the bottom of the tree all the time. With his wounded leg he couldn't +come up, and I didn't dare to go down, and there we was--a-lookin' at +each other, he a-growlin' and I a-sayin' all kind o' unpleasant things +about him." + +"Didn't you have a pistol?" + +"No, all I had with me at the time was a powder-horn, a matchbox, and my +pocket-knife. What to do I didn't know, and I was a-thinkin' I'd be +starved out, when a thought struck me to blow him up with powder." + +"Blow him up!" cried both boys. + +"Thet's wot, lads--blow him up. I had a handkerchief, ye see, an' into +this I dumped 'bout half my powder, an' into the powder I put three +matches, with the ends pointing out. Then I tied powder an' matches into +a hard lump and watched my chance. There was a flat rock near the roots +of the tree, and putty soon Mr. B'ar squatted on this rock. Then I let +drive fer the rock, an' the powder an' matches landed good an' hard, I +can tell ye." + +"And exploded?" put in Joe eagerly. + +"Yes, exploded with a noise ye could hear 'most a mile, I calkerlate. +The powder flashed straight up into thet ba'r's face, blindin' him and +tearing his jaw half off, and the way he ran to save himself was a +caution. As soon as he was gone I dropped down and ran for my gun. Then +I made after the b'ar and caught him between the rocks and finished +him." + +This was the last story told that night, and soon after the tale was +concluded Leeson showed the boys into the inner room of the cabin, where +there was something of a rough bed with a straw mattress. + +"Make yerselves ter hum," he said. "It aint no hotel, but it's the best +I've got to offer ye." + +"But we don't want to turn you out," said Darry. + +"I'll make myself comfortable near the door," answered Leeson. "I want +to sleep with one eye open--in case those rascals should take a notion +to come this way." + +The boys were glad enough to rest indoors again and take off the +clothing they had worn during the storm. + +"Camping out is well enough," declared Joe; "but I don't want too much +of it." + +"Oh, we've seen the worst side of it," returned Darry. "I expect lots +of good times when we get to the fort." + +"Oh, so do I, for the matter of that." + +After turning in it did not take long for the cousins to get to sleep, +and a little while later Hank Leeson also threw himself down to rest. +But the old trapper remained close to the doorstep, and slept with his +rifle near at hand. + +An hour went by, and the darkness and silence continued. There was no +moon, and only a few stars were visible. At a distance a few night birds +were calling, and occasionally the howl of some lonely wolf could be +heard, but that was all. + +At last from out of the darkness of the trail came three men on foot. +They were Matt Gilroy and his companions. They had tethered their horses +in the bushes some distance away. They stole toward the cabin like so +many grim and silent shadows. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +THE STEALING OF THE HORSES. + + +"Go slow, men," came softly from Gilroy. "You know what kind of a man +Leeson is." + +"Reckon I do know," came in a growl from Fetter. "And I've got an +account to settle with him, too." + +"I'm pretty certain the boy is here," went on the leader. "But we must +make sure if the others are here too, or if they have ridden off to the +fort. If they have gone to the fort----" + +"Hist!" came in warning from Potts. "You're talking too much. I've heard +that this Leeson sleeps with his ears wide open." + +"He does," grumbled Fetter; and then the three desperadoes relapsed into +silence. + +They were advancing upon the cabin from the rear, and each held a ready +pistol in his hand, while his rifle was slung over his back. They had +seen the boys and Benson head for the trapper's home while it was still +light and they were on a high cliff; but darkness had closed in on the +scene, and they had come up to the spot in ignorance of what had +followed. + +Tiptoeing their way they reached the lean-to where the horses had been +stabled, and with caution Gilroy went inside. By feeling the animals he +soon learned that three had been in use but a few hours before, while +the fourth was cool and comfortable. + +"Their horses are here," he announced. "And a fourth is here, too." + +"That's Leeson's," answered Fetter. "But I thought he had two or three." + +"Might as well take them while we have the chance," murmured Potts. +"Four nags will bring some money over at Highwater. We can get Gingo to +sell 'em." + +"Let them out," answered Gilroy. "Without horses they'll have their +hands full trying to follow us." + +It was no easy task to untie the horses in a place that was pitch-dark, +and it took some time to get even the horses belonging to our friends +released. + +As Fetter and Potts took the animals out, Gilroy worked to untie the +sturdy mare belonging to Hank Leeson. This was a pet animal, and not +used to strangers. As Gilroy caught hold of the halter she gave a neigh +of suspicion. + +"Hush!" murmured the desperado, and ran his hand down the mare's nose. +But this made her skittish, and she stamped sharply half a dozen times. + +"What's up thar?" came in Hank Leeson's voice, and the trapper was wide +awake on the instant. "Whoa, Nancy, whoa!" + +"Hang the luck!" muttered Gilroy, and ran outside after Fetter and +Potts. "He must have been on the watch." + +"We must get out!" responded Fetter. "He's a sure-shot, remember. +Nothing but the darkness can save us." + +"I'm going!" came from Potts, and he leaped on the back of one of the +horses--that which Joe had been riding. + +"I'm with you," said Fetter, and mounted old Benson's steed. "Come, +Matt, and be quick about it." + +By this time Hank Leeson was running around the corner of the cabin, gun +in hand. His call had aroused Joe and Darry, and they were pulling on +their clothing with all speed. + +"Something is wrong!" exclaimed Joe. + +"It must be those desperadoes," responded his cousin. + +The boys were not yet dressed, when they heard a clatter of hoofs and a +shot, followed by another. + +Then they came out, rifles in hand, to find Leeson reloading near the +stable. + +"Those desperadoes have been here!" exclaimed the old trapper. "They ran +off with your hosses, consarn 'em!" + +"Went off with the horses?" repeated Darry. "Did you shoot at them?" + +"I did, but the light's against me, and I don't reckon as how I hit +anything." Hank Leeson meditated for a moment. "I've half a mind ter do +it--yes, I have!" he muttered. + +"Do what?" asked Joe. + +"Go after 'em on my mare. Would you be afraid to stay here alone if I +went?" + +"No; go ahead!" cried both boys. + +"We'll keep watch while you are away," continued Joe. + +"If you can get the horses back it will be a great favor," said Darry. +"The three are worth over five hundred dollars." + +Without further words, Hank Leeson dashed into the stable, untied his +mare and mounted her. Rifle over shoulder and pistol in hand, he dashed +away on the back trail, whence the desperadoes had disappeared. Soon he +was swallowed up in the darkness, although they heard the hoofbeats of +Nancy for several minutes after. + +"This is the worst yet," was Joe's comment, when they were alone. +"Those fellows are as daring as they are rascally. I never dreamed they +would come up in that fashion. I wonder what they would have done if +Leeson hadn't woke up?" + +"Perhaps we would all have been murdered," answered his cousin with a +shudder. "What shall we do, now we are dressed?" + +"That depends upon how long Leeson remains away. I move we remain on +guard--one at the front of the cabin and the other at the rear. If we +keep our eyes peeled they can't come very close, even though it is +dark." + +"All right, Joe. Keep your rifle handy." + +"Don't fear about that, Darry." + +They were soon on guard, the one on the doorstep and the other near the +lean-to, on a stump. Thus an hour dragged by. To both it was an +unusually long while. + +"I don't see a thing," said Darry, coming to where his cousin rested. + +"Nor I, and I'm getting sleepy. I hardly think Leeson will be back until +morning." + +"Just what I was thinking. Let us take turns at watching. The one on +duty can walk around the cabin now and then, and that will give each of +us some sleep." + +This was agreed upon, and they tossed up to see who should go on guard +first. It fell to Darry's lot, and Joe, hardly able to keep his eyes +open, quickly retired, without undressing. + +Darry's vigil was certainly a lonely one, doubly so because it was new +to him. As he tramped slowly around the cabin, he could not help but +contrast this situation with the one he was used to at home. + +"I don't know as I'd like to be a night policeman or a night-watchman," +he reasoned. "They must be awfully tiresome jobs. And the city isn't +near as lonely as this, either, even in the middle of the night." He +drew a long breath and looked at his watch. "Gracious, only +three-quarters of an hour gone, and I've got an hour and a quarter still +to serve! How awfully slow it is! If Leeson----What's that?" + +He broke off short and came to a halt, with his rifle in his hands and +his gaze fixed on some brushwood a hundred feet to the rear of the +stable. He had seen some dark object moving, but whether it was man or +beast he could not tell. + +"It was something, I'm sure of that," he told himself, after the object +had disappeared from view. "If it was a man he must have been crawling +on hands and knees." + +He wondered if he had better awaken Joe, but hesitated, knowing how +sleepy his cousin was. Perhaps the object would go away--if it was a +wild beast. + +Keeping his eyes on the spot, Darry waited what seemed to him a long +time, but which was really but a few minutes. Then slowly the bushes +parted and the object came forth, with eyes that gleamed fitfully even +in that darkness. + +"A mountain wolf!" muttered the boy. "Well, I'm glad it isn't one of +those desperadoes." + +Taking up a stone he hurled it at the wolf, at the same time shouting to +the beast to go away. At once the wolf turned tail and disappeared +whence it had come. + +"Did you call?" came sleepily from Joe. + +"There's a wolf in the bushes back of the cabin," returned Darry. + +"Does he want to attack you?" + +"I don't know. I just threw a stone at him, and he's slunk out of +sight." + +By this time Joe was also outside, and the two cousins waited for the +reappearance of the wolf. + +But the animal was cowardly, and did not show himself again, and +presently Joe returned to bed. The remainder of the night passed without +anything unusual happening. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +ARRIVAL AT THE FORT. + + +The morning found the two boys still alone. The sun was well up over the +eastern prairie before both were dressed, for they had taken turns at +guarding, as agreed, and each had consequently lost half his regular +sleeping time. + +"Well, what's to do now?" questioned Darry, while they were stirring +around getting breakfast. + +"I don't know of anything to do but to wait here until we hear from +Benson and Hank Leeson," answered his cousin. + +Breakfast was soon disposed of, and then they sat down to wait, still +keeping their firearms close to hand, in case of unexpected attack. The +meeting with the desperadoes had opened the boys' eyes, and they did not +intend to be caught "napping" no matter what else happened. + +Shortly before ten o'clock Joe espied three horsemen coming down the +trail which led to the fort. Both watched the approaching riders with +interest, and presently saw that they were soldiers. One wore the +uniform of a lieutenant, and the others were privates. + +"You are from the fort?" cried Joe, running forward to meet them. + +"Yes," was the answer from the lieutenant. "Which of you is Joseph +Moore?" + +"I am." + +"I am glad to know you, Moore. Your brother, the captain, and I are +great friends. I am Lieutenant Richard Carrol." + +"Oh, I've heard of you," answered Joe, smiling. "Will has often +mentioned his chum, Dick Carrol, in his letters. This is my cousin, +Darry Germain. Did old Benson reach the fort last night?" + +"He did," answered Lieutenant Carrol, as he shook hands with both boys. +"And your brother and a detachment of Company A have gone out to look +for Matt Gilroy and his gang. Benson went with them, and I was asked to +come down here and escort you to the fort." + +"If my brother wants to round up Gilroy's gang he should have come +here," said Joe. "The rascals were here last night and stole our three +horses." + +"Is it possible! And where is Hank Leeson?" + +"He went after them on his horse, the only one they didn't get. We are +looking for his return at any moment. We promised to watch the cabin +until he got back." + +"I see." The lieutenant turned to the privates. "Men, you may dismount +and tie up the horses for the present. We won't be going back just yet." + +Lieutenant Carrol leaped to the ground, and one of the privates took +charge of his steed. The young officer was a handsome fellow, with a +smiling face, and both Joe and Darry took to him at once. + +"Yes, Captain Moore and I are great friends," he said. "You see, we went +through West Point together, and we have been more or less together ever +since. He has often told me about you two fellows, so I feel as if I've +known you for a long while." He looked at Joe. "You must have had quite +an adventure with those desperadoes at the cave." + +"I did have," answered Joe. "I hope my brother and the others round them +up. Do you know if they came anywhere near here?" + +"No, they struck off on another trail--the one the quartermaster is +expected to use. You see, he is to come in to-morrow with that money." + +"To-morrow! Then they'll have time to warn him." + +"That depends upon circumstances. The quartermaster is an odd sort of a +fellow, and sometimes changes his mind about routes. He may come in the +way we expect, and he may take some entirely different trail." + +"We can't say when Leeson will be back," put in Darry. "But it seems to +me it is our duty to stay here until he returns; don't you think so, +Joe?" + +"I do, Darry. But he will probably be back before long." + +It was only a few minutes later when one of the privates came forward +with the information that a man was coming through the underbrush +skirting the timber. It was Hank Leeson, and he held his mare to a walk, +for Nancy was all but exhausted. + +"Mornin', lieutenant!" he called out, as he drew closer and saluted. +"Come for them boys, I reckon." + +"I did, Leeson. They tell me you've been after the gang. What luck?" + +Hank Leeson shook his head dubiously. "Reckon I didn't have any luck, +lieutenant. Got one shot, but if I hit it didn't count much. They had +the best o' me in the timber, and they got away, not only with the +hosses belonging to the boys an' Benson, but likewise with their own, +which they had tethered in a hollow not far away." + +"Then our horses are gone!" cried Darry, his face falling. + +"Thet's it, lad. I'm sorry, but I did my best." + +"Oh, I don't blame you, Leeson. But--but if we haven't any horses, how +are we to get to the fort?" + +"We'll take turns at carrying you," replied Lieutenant Carrol. + +Hank Leeson was as worn out as his mare, and while one of the soldiers +cared for Nancy the old trapper sank down on his doorstep and told his +story. He had followed the desperadoes up hill and down for fifteen +miles, and gotten one shot at Fetter, which, he believed, had struck the +rascal in the arm. But the party had turned on the trail while passing +through a wide patch of timberland, and on coming out at the other side +he had been unable to locate them again. Then, as it was almost morning, +he had thought best to return to his cabin, to ascertain how the boys +were faring. + +"Which road were they near when you saw them last?" asked Lieutenant +Carrol. + +"Over at Hunkwater's Rock," answered Leeson. "Moving toward the Knob." + +"Humph! Then I am afraid Captain Moore won't round them up very +quickly." + +"My brother didn't go near that trail?" questioned Joe. + +"No, he's on a trail three miles further north. Still, the desperadoes +may turn north." + +"That's so," said Leeson. + +As there was nothing to keep them at the cabin, the boys were now +anxious to move on to the fort, and a short while later Lieutenant +Carrol set off. One private carried Joe and the other Darry; and, as the +horses were powerful beasts, good progress was made. + +"Hurrah! The fort!" cried Joe, as he caught sight of a large flag waving +in the distance. He was right; and soon they could see the tall stockade +quite plainly. It was three hundred feet long by two hundred feet wide, +and surrounded by a ditch twelve feet deep. Inside of the stockade were +the fort proper and a dozen other buildings, including the officers' +quarters, the men's quarters, the messroom, hospital, and the gymnasium, +and also a good-sized stable. + +"Why, it's a regular town in itself!" murmured Darry, when they got +inside. + +"That's right, a town of exactly two hundred and seventy-five people," +answered the lieutenant. "And of that number two hundred and sixty are +soldiers belonging to three companies, three are officers' wives, two +are Indian scouts, and the rest are cooks and other helpers." + +Colonel Fairfield, a tall, dignified old officer, had been told of +their approach, and now came from the officers' quarters to meet them. + +"I am glad to see you, boys," he said, as he shook hands warmly. "If the +story Benson told is true you have had quite a few adventures in +reaching here. I am sorry your brother is not here to meet you, Joseph; +but he was anxious to go after the Gilroy gang, and I let him have his +way." + +"You haven't heard about all of our adventures, colonel," said Darry, +and told of the stolen horses. + +"Worse and worse!" returned the colonel, stroking his mustache +thoughtfully. "That proves that the gang--or what is left of it--is as +desperate as ever. Those fellows will never give up until they are +either arrested or shot down." + +"I hope my brother doesn't get into trouble with them," said Joe +anxiously. + +"Well, a soldier has to take some risks, my boy. But Captain Moore is as +shrewd as he is brave, so you need not fear for his safety. Come right +in; Mrs. Fairfield will be glad to see you. She wants to hear from all +the folks at home." + +The boys followed the old officer into the quarters, and here received +an equally warm greeting from Mrs. Fairfield, whom they had met in +Chicago. Dinner was soon served, and while the lads were satisfying the +inner man they had to tell their whole story over again, and also tell +all the news from home. + +"While you are here, boys, you must make yourselves perfectly at ease," +said the colonel. "I know your fathers will expect me to be a father to +you. As for Captain Moore, I will allow him to be with you as much as +military discipline permits." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE RESULT OF A SWIM. + + +To the boys, who had never visited a military quarters before, the fort +proved of great interest, and they were glad, after the meal was over, +to have Lieutenant Carrol take them around. This occupied some time, and +when they had finished it was time for the evening parade. + +This was quite an affair, and the two lads joined the ladies of the +place to witness it. Everybody turned out, in uniform as clean as +possible, on inspection. The drums rolled, the fifers struck up a lively +air, and the three companies, headed by a major, marched around the +stockade several times and then to the parade-ground in front of the +gates. Here the command went through the manual of arms and through a +number of fancy evolutions. + +"It's splendid!" murmured Joe. "Everything moves like clockwork." + +"It makes me almost wish to be a soldier," answered Darry. "But if a +fellow had this day in and day out I am afraid he would grow tired of +it." + +"You are right, Darry," said Mrs. Fairfield. "The colonel has to think +up a great number of things whereby to interest his men. They get up all +sorts of contests, and concerts and theatricals, and go hunting when +they can get the chance--anything to keep them from growing too dull." + +"Have they had any real military duty to do lately?" asked Joe. + +"Not for over a year. Then the Modoc Indians got up a sun-dance, and +they had to march over to Kedahmina and stop it. Two Indians were killed +and one soldier was badly wounded. Since that time the Indians have been +quiet." + +"But the Indians may rise again." + +"Probably they will--one is never sure of them. As one old general has +said, 'The only safe Indian is the dead Indian.'" + +The boys were assigned to a small room next to that occupied by Captain +Moore and Lieutenant Carrol. The apartment was neatly furnished with +iron cots, an iron washstand, and a small wardrobe for extra clothing. +Fortunately the extra clothing they had carried had not been stolen, so +they were not as bad off as they would otherwise have been. + +Joe was anxious to hear from his brother Will, but had to be patient. +Yet he was not greatly worried, for he was almost certain that the +soldiers would fail to fall in with the desperadoes, each having taken a +different trail. + +The day following their arrival the boys fell in with several soldiers +who were going fishing up a mountain stream not far away, having +obtained special leave of absence for that purpose. The soldiers, who +were named Biggs, Ferry, and Lambert, were glad enough to have the boys +for company. + +"We'll show you some good sport," said Lambert, who proved to be +something of a leader. "No better fish in these parts than those you can +catch in Rocky Pass River." + +The boys had no fishing-tackle, but Lieutenant Carrol fitted them out, +and soon the party was on the way. The soldiers were to be gone but four +hours, and so struck out at a gait that taxed Joe and Darry to the +utmost to keep up with them. + +"It's the air does it," explained Biggs, when Darry spoke about the +speed. "After you've been out here a while you'll eat like a horse and +feel like walking ten miles every morning before breakfast. I tell you, +the air is wonderful." + +"It certainly is bracing," answered Darry. "I noticed that as soon as we +began to climb the foothills." + +A walk of half an hour brought them to Rocky Pass River, and they +journeyed along the bank until they came to a favorite fishing-hole. + +"Here we are," said Lambert. "Now for the first fish!" + +"Ten cents to whoever catches it!" cried Joe, and placed a shining dime +on a nearby tree stump. At this the three soldiers laughed. + +"That dime is mine," declared Ferry, who was the first to throw in. + +"Perhaps," answered Biggs. "But I reckon I've got just as good a chance +now." + +"Here I come," put in Lambert, and threw over his friends' heads. Hardly +had his bait gone down than he felt a tug and whipped in a little fish +not over six inches long. + +"Mine!" he cried. + +"It isn't worth ten cents!" cried Biggs and Ferry; nevertheless Lambert +pocketed the coin, amid a general laughing. + +The boys now went to a spot a little above where the soldiers were +fishing, and set to work on their own lines. Just as Ferry announced a +fine haul, they threw in, and soon everybody in the party was busy, +bringing in several kinds of fish, big and little, including some fine +trout of a variety the boys had not before seen. + +Inside of an hour everybody had all the fish he wanted, and then the +soldiers said they were going to take a swim. The boys were willing, and +soon the whole crowd were in the water, calling out and laughing and +having a good time generally. + +"Don't go too far down the stream," cautioned Lambert. "The falls are +below, and you might get caught in the rapids." + +"All right, we'll surely remember," answered Joe. + +"I'll race you across the river and back," said Darry, a little later. + +"Done!" cried Joe. "To what point?" + +"To that willow hanging down near the big rock." + +So it was agreed, and in a minute both boys were off. They were good +swimmers, and the race interested the soldiers, so that they gave up +sporting around to watch the result. + +At this point the stream widened out to nearly two hundred feet, so the +race was not a particularly short one. The water ran quite swiftly, and +they soon found they had to swim partly up stream to prevent being +carried below the willow. + +Darry made the mark first, and, touching the willow, started on the +return. Joe was close behind, and now it became a neck-and-neck race +between them. + +"Go it, boys!" shouted Lambert. "Do your best!" + +"I bet on Joe," said Ferry. + +"I bet on Darry," added Biggs. + +Hardly had the wager been made when Joe shot ahead. Slowly but surely he +drew away from his cousin. + +While the sport was going on nobody had noticed a large tree that was +drifting rapidly down the middle of the river. Now, however, Lambert saw +the danger. + +"Look out!" he cried wildly. "Look out! A tree is coming down upon you!" + +Joe heard the cry, and looking up the stream managed to get out of the +way of the big piece of driftwood. But Darry was not so fortunate, and +in a twinkling the youth was struck and carried out of sight. + +This accident came so quickly that for the moment nobody knew what to +do. + +"Darry! Darry!" cried Joe. "Where are you?" + +"He went under!" shouted Lambert. "The tree branches struck him on the +head." + +"He'll be drowned!" gasped Biggs. "What shall we do?" + +By this time the tree had drifted past the point where the soldiers were +stationed. Joe had now struck bottom with his feet, and at once went +ashore. + +"We must do something!" he panted. "We can't let Darry be drowned!" + +"He must be caught under the branches," said Lambert. "As the tree hit +him it turned partly over. Perhaps----There is his foot!" + +He pointed to the tree--and there, sure enough, was Darry's left foot, +kicking wildly above the surface of the river. Then the boy's head came +up, but only for a moment. + +"Save me!" he spluttered, and immediately disappeared. + +"This is awful!" groaned Joe. "Can't we throw a fishing-line over the +tree and haul it ashore?" + +"A good idea!" answered Lambert. "We'll take two lines." + +He caught up the fishing-tackle, and lines in hand ran along the river +bank until he was below the tree. The others followed, and helped him to +get the lines into shape. Then a quick cast was made, but the lines fell +short. + +"Too bad!" came from Joe. "Quick, try once more!" + +"The tree is turning over again!" shouted Biggs, and he was right. As +some other branches came into view, they beheld Darry, caught in a +crotch and held there as if in a vise. + +Another cast was made, and then a third, but all in vain. Then the tree, +with its helpless victim, moved forward more rapidly than ever, in the +direction of the roaring falls, which were but a short distance off. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +SOMETHING ABOUT DRILLING. + + +"Darry is lost! Nothing can save him now!" + +Such was the agonizing thought which rushed through Joe's brain as he +watched the progress of the drifting tree as it moved swiftly toward the +falls of Rocky Pass River. + +He knew the falls to be over thirty feet high. At the bottom was a +boiling pool which sent up a continual shower of spray. Nobody entering +that pool could survive. + +Darry, too, realized his peril, and continued to call for help. Had he +been able to loosen himself he would have leaped into the water, but he +was weak and helpless, and his voice could scarcely be heard above the +rushing of the rapids. + +Joe and the three soldiers continued to run along the river bank, over +rough rocks that cut their feet and through bushes which scratched them +in scores of places. At last they came out on a point directly above the +falls. + +The tree still spun on, and Joe closed his eyes to shut out the sight of +what was to follow. + +Suddenly Lambert let out a shout: + +"The tree is caught! It has stopped moving!" + +Again Joe looked, and he saw that what the soldier said was true. The +under branches of the drifting tree had hit some sharp rocks below the +river's surface, and one branch had wedged itself fast. + +This catching of the driftwood bent down the limb that held Darry, and +soon they saw that the imperiled boy was free from the grip which had +held him. But what to do next the lad did not know. To swim to the shore +was out of the question. + +"I--I can't make it," he told himself, as he panted for breath. He was +so exhausted that he felt very much like fainting away. But he knew he +must keep his senses, or all would be over with him. + +"Darry! Darry! Are you much hurt?" called out Joe. + +"Not much, but I--I can't--swim--ashore!" was the gasped out answer. + +"I'll try the fishing lines again," said Lambert, and prepared them once +more. A first cast did not reach Darry, but a second did, and he caught +the sinkers to the lines with a good deal of satisfaction. + +"Will they hold?" questioned Joe. + +"I hope so," answered Lambert. "Anyway, it's the best we can do." + +Letting the lines run out as far as possible, the soldiers and Joe moved +up the bank of the stream to where there was a series of rocks +projecting into the water a distance of several yards. + +"Now brace me, and I will haul in," said Lambert. Then he called to +Darry to help them by swimming as well as he was able, with the lines +caught around him, under the arms. + +"All right, I'm ready!" cried the boy, and dropped into the stream, +taking care to steer clear of the tree. + +Lambert hauled in slowly but steadily. The line straightened out and +became taut, and looked as if it might snap at any instant. Joe's heart +came up into his throat, and he breathed a silent prayer that his cousin +might be saved. + +"Here he comes!" muttered Lambert at length, and they could see that +Darry's feet at last rested on the sandy bottom of the river. They +continued to haul in, and soon he was safe. When on shore he pitched +himself on the grass, completely exhausted. + +"Oh, how glad I am!" cried Joe, as he knelt beside his cousin. "I was +almost certain you'd be drowned!" + +"It was a narrow escape!" answered Dairy, when he could speak. "When the +tree first struck me I was almost stunned, and when I realized what had +happened I found myself fast and hardly able to budge. Just look there!" +And he showed a deep scratch on one side of his body and a heavy red +mark on the other. "But never mind," he went on. "I am thankful my life +was spared!" + +It was a sober-minded party that dressed and journeyed back to the fort, +Joe carrying both his own fish and those his cousin had caught. + +"I am afraid that will end fishing and swimming for a while," said +Biggs. "The soldiers never go near the falls, for they all know the +danger, but Colonel Fairfield is too strict to run any chances." + +"Don't say anything about the adventure on the tree," said Darry. + +"Will you keep mum?" + +"I will, and so will you, won't you, Joe?" + +"Yes." + +So it was arranged that nothing should be said, that the soldiers' +little recreation might not be interfered with, for both boys saw that +they had little pleasure at the best. + +"A fine haul for you boys!" said Lieutenant Carrol, as he surveyed the +catch. "I must go myself and try my luck. I haven't been fishing this +summer." + +"It's a splendid place for bites," said Joe. + +"I know it. But you have to be careful up there. There's a nasty fall in +the river. If you went over that you'd never come out alive." + +"Yes, we saw the fall," answered Darry, and gave a shudder in spite of +himself. + +Again at sunset there was a parade, similar to that of the day before. +After it was over the boys procured guns and had Lambert put them +through their "paces," as he called it. + +"First we'll drill a bit without guns," said the old soldier, for +Lambert had seen sixteen years of service. "Toe this line, heads up, +chest out, and little fingers on the seams of your trousers. That's all +right. Now then, Eyes Right! When I say that turn your eyes to the +right, but don't move your faces. Now, Eyes Front! That's good. Eyes +Left! Eyes Front! That's first-rate." + +"But we're not moving," said Darry. + +"Now we'll move. Watch me. Right Face! Do you see how it's done? Balance +on the heel, this way, and swing around. Now then, Right Face!" + +The two boys came around like well-trained old soldiers. + +"Good, boys, good. Now then, Front Face! Good. Left Face! That's not so +well. Front Face! Now here's another, About Face!" + +So the drilling went on, until the boys could move as Lambert wished +them to. Then they began to march and to wheel right and left. At last +he put the guns in their hands and let them march with the pieces, and +then showed them the manual of arms. + +[Illustration: "AT LAST HE PUT THE GUNS IN THEIR HANDS AND LET THEM +MARCH WITH THE PIECES."] + +"You'll learn in no time," said the old soldier, when his off time came +to an end. "You've crowded a dozen lessons into one." + +"And I feel it," said Darry. "I'm going in to rest." And he went, +followed by Joe. All told, the boys had enjoyed the drill very much. + +Joe was somewhat worried when bedtime came and still nothing had been +heard of his brother. Yet Colonel Fairfield told him not to mind the +prolonged absence. + +"But should not your quartermaster be here?" asked the boy. + +"He may come in to-morrow morning," answered the colonel. + +The next day dawned cloudy, and by noon a steady rain was falling. The +boys hardly knew what to do, and, after watching a drill and some +performances in the gymnasium, went back to the living quarters. They +had hardly entered when there came a shout from the guard at the +stockade. + +"Captain Moore is coming, with the quartermaster!" was the cry. + +"Hurrah, it's Will!" shouted Joe, and ran out despite the rain to +welcome his brother. + +Soon the soldiers came up, mud-stained and tired. They embraced half of +Company A, and in their midst was the quartermaster of the regiment, +with two attendants. Each of these three carried heavy saddle-bags, +filled with government money for the soldiers, for payday was now due. + +"Joe!" cried Captain Moore, as he dismounted and caught his brother by +the hand. "I am glad to see you safe and sound." + +"And I am glad to see you," answered Joe. + +"I will be with you soon--I must first report to Colonel Fairfield," +went on the young officer, and lost no time in seeking the commandant. + +His story was soon told, and it speedily spread to all parts of the +fort. Along with his men and old Benson he had looked in vain for the +Gilroy gang for a whole day. Then he had come upon them just as they +were preparing for an attack upon the quartermaster and his escort. The +gang had numbered eight, and in the fight which had followed two of the +crowd had been wounded, although all had made their escape by swimming +their steeds over a dangerous mountain torrent. Of the soldiers three +had been wounded, one man quite seriously. The young captain had +received a bullet through his hat. + +"It was Matt Gilroy himself who fired that shot," said Captain Moore. +"And I won't forget it when next we meet." + +Old Benson had been in the thickest of the fight from beginning to end, +and it was he who had wounded one of the desperadoes while the fellow +was in the act of carrying off one of the money-bags. The rascals had +fought hard over that money-bag, but in the end had been compelled to +drop everything and ride to save their lives. + +As soon as Captain Moore had made his report, another detachment was +sent out, to follow the desperadoes, if they could be found. This +detachment was fifty strong and under the leadership of Lieutenant +Carrol. The lieutenant was a man who had met numerous desperadoes in his +time, and it was felt that he could do the work much better than the +average soldier. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +DEER HUNTING. + + +With his brother at hand, Joe felt much more at home than formerly, and +the captain's presence also made a difference to his cousin. Old Benson +remained at the fort for the time being, and did what he could to please +the boys. + +He took an especial interest in their shooting, and would often set up a +target on the prairie for them to practice on. + +"You'll do first-rate in a little while," he said. "And as Lambert says +you take to drilling, it won't be long afore you're both out-and-out +soldiers." + +"I don't know as I care to be a regular soldier," answered Darry. "I +wouldn't mind it for a while, but to enlist for five years--why, that's +another thing." + +"Lambert has enlisted four times. When his time is out he'll be in +service twenty years." + +"And yet he is only a private," put in Joe. + +"He is content, and doesn't want to go any higher. He likes the life, +and he told me not long ago that he wouldn't know what to do with +himself if he was out of Uncle Sam's employ." + +One day after another passed, until the boys had been at the fort a +little over a week. They now knew the drills and the "time-card" as well +as anybody, and often practiced on the apparatus in the gymnasium. + +"It's not so bad, after you once get used to it," said Joe. "The men are +a good deal of company for each other." + +"It's odd to see so many men and so few women," returned Darry. + +"Some of the men don't want any women around, so I've been told. They +are like some of the old-time miners who used to move out of camp as +soon as a dress-skirt showed itself." + +One day Captain Moore and old Benson got permission to go off on a hunt, +and took the boys along. All of the party were mounted, and each carried +a saddle-bag with part of the necessary camping outfit. + +"If it's possible to do so, I'll show you some big game," announced the +old scout. "Although I'll allow big game is mighty scarce, even in these +parts." + +"Have the hunters shot down everything?" asked Joe. + +"A good bit, lad. You see, many used to come out here just to shoot for +the sake of killing. I've known a party of six men to kill twenty or +thirty buffalo and then leave the carcasses to the wolves. That was a +shame." + +"So it was!" cried Darry. "One or two buffalo would have been enough." + +"Some hunters never know when to stop," put in Captain Moore. "They +shoot as long as anything shows itself. If it wasn't for that these +hills would be filled with buffalo, deer, bears, and all other kind of +game." + +The morning was clear and cool, and everybody in the party was in the +best of spirits. The course was down into a broad valley, in the middle +of which flowed the Rocky Pass River, and then up a series of hills +leading to Tom Long Mountain--a favorite resort in this territory for +sportsmen. + +"Do you think we'll see or hear anything of those desperadoes?" asked +Joe of his brother, as they rode along side by side. + +"It's not likely," answered the young captain. "As soon as they learn +that the soldiers are after them they'll take to their heels in +double-quick order. They haven't any taste for meeting our regulars." + +"It's queer that this Matt Gilroy should go in for this sort of life--if +he is as well educated as you say." + +"Some men don't like anything better, Joe--they wouldn't earn their +living honestly if they could. It's queer that this is so, but it's a +fact. Those men have no regular homes, although many often talk of +settling down. Generally they die with their boots on, as the saying +goes." + +By noon the party had covered fifteen miles and were well into the +hills. They came to a rest beside a fine spring which flowed from a +split in the rocks. Near at hand was some dense brushwood, and old +Benson rightfully guessed that it would not be difficult to beat up some +birds. + +"You can now try your luck at aiming," he said to the boys, and led the +way into the dense growth. Soon a flock of birds arose directly before +them, and both Darry and Joe took a quick shot, bringing down seven of +the quarry. Then the scout fired, and five other birds dropped. + +"Pretty good for a starter!" cried old Benson, as they stalked around +picking up the game. "That target practice has made you both pretty +steady. Just a round dozen, all told. That's a-plenty for dinner, I +reckon." + +Captain Moore was also pleased when told of what his brother and his +cousin had accomplished. "You'll make great hunters in time," he said. +"The main thing is to keep your nerve when big game confronts you. You +know you have the best of a bird or squirrel, or anything like that. +But when it comes to a buffalo, or a bear----" + +"I know all about bears," interrupted Joe, and at this there was a +general laugh. "If I ever meet another bear I want to be well prepared +for him," he continued. + +"Generally a wild animal won't fight," went on the young captain. "But +when one is cornered he is apt to get very ugly; eh, Benson?" + +"Right you are, captain. I was once cornered by a buffalo, and had all I +could do to save myself." + +The old scout calculated that they would strike some game that +afternoon, and he was not mistaken. About two o'clock they sighted +several deer far up the hillside. + +"Fine, plump animals," said Benson. "If we get a couple of them we can +be well satisfied." + +It was decided that they should move around in a semicircle, so as to +get to leeward of the herd. + +"If we don't do that, the deer will scent us and be off in no time," +explained Captain Moore. + +Their horses were tethered in the brush, near some trees, and the party +of four started out on foot. The way was rough, but the boys did not +mind this. Their sole thought was upon the deer, and each resolved to +bring down one of the game, no matter at what cost. + +It was no light task to reach a spot from which to shoot. They had to +cross several depressions on the hillside, and here the undergrowth was +so heavy that progress at times seemed impossible. Once Darry went into +a hole up to his waist, and came out with several rents in his coat, +where the thorns had clung to him. + +"Oh!" he muttered. "Oh!" + +"Are you hurt?" questioned Joe quickly. + +"Not much, but I reckon I'm a good deal scratched up," answered Darry, +with a wry face. + +At last they gained a point well to leeward of the quarry, and Benson +brought the party to a halt. + +"We'll creep in as far as we can," he said. "But keep your guns ready +for use, and as soon as one fires the others had best fire too, for the +deer won't wait after one shot. Which will you take, captain?" + +"I'll take the one near the big rock," answered Captain Moore. "Joe, you +had better take the one on the knoll." + +"I will." + +"I'll take the one rubbing his side with his prong," put in Darry. + +"And I'll take the one coming through the brush," finished old Benson. +"Now then, forward. Make no noise, and be sure your gun doesn't go off +and hit somebody else instead of the deer." + +Rifles in hand, they crept through the underbrush and down toward the +glade in which the deer were feeding. + +The animals did not become suspicious until they were less than a +hundred yards away. Then, of a sudden, the leader threw up his head and +began to sniff the air. + +"Now fire," said Benson in a low tone. + +At once the four rifles came up, and each hunter took steady aim. Darry +and Joe fired at the same instant, and the young captain and Benson +discharged their pieces immediately after. + +The aim of the two older hunters was true, and two deer fell dead after +going less than six steps. But the other game was only wounded, Joe's +deer in the side and Darry's in the flank, and they bounded away up the +hillside. + +"Missed!" groaned Joe, and slipped another cartridge into his firearm. +Darry did the same, and both fired a second time. Then, seeing how badly +the deer were wounded, they ran after the animals. + +The course of the deer was straight for the timber down the +mountain-side, and through the brush crashed quarry and boys until +another hundred yards were covered. Then, coming to a rocky cliff, and +being unable to leap to the top, the deer came to a halt. + +"Do you see 'em?" panted Darry, almost out of breath with running. + +"Yes--there they are!" returned Joe. "See?" + +"I do. They can't get up the rocks. Joe, we've got 'em after all. We +must shoot----Gracious!" + +The boy broke off short, and with good reason. The deer had spotted +them, and now without warning turned and ran straight for both, as if to +gore them to death! + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +A FISH AND A SNAKE. + + +"Look out, Darry, or he'll kill you!" + +"Look out for yourself, Joe!" + +These cries were followed by two shots, as both the young hunters +discharged their weapons. But in their haste the aim of each was poor, +and the bullets flew wide of the mark. Then the maddened deer came +closer, and both boys took to their heels, running as they had never run +before. + +"Hi! what's up?" came in old Benson's voice. + +"The deer are after us!" yelled Joe. "Shoot 'em quick!" + +Hardly had the lad spoken when he felt one of the deer close behind him. +He leaped to one side, and the animal charged past with great vigor, +considering how badly he was wounded. But that charge was his last, for +Benson's rifle spoke up, and the animal fell lifeless where he stood. + +In the meantime Darry was having his hands full with the second deer. +The youth had been unable to reload, and now he found himself in a +thicket, with the deer fairly on top of him. He caught his firearm by +the barrel and hit the animal a resounding blow on the head. This made +the deer stagger back and pause. + +"Help! help!" yelled the boy. "Somebody shoot this beast!" + +"I'm coming!" came in Captain Moore's voice. "Where are you?" + +"Here, in the bush! Quick, or he'll stick me to death!" + +The deer was now charging with lowered head. He was in a fearful rage. +As he came on there was a sharp report, and the young captain burst into +view, his rifle barrel still smoking. Then the deer gave one last leap +into the air, and came down upon Darry. The fall knocked the boy +senseless. + +While Captain Moore was removing the weight from Darry's body, the old +scout came up, followed by Joe. + +"Hullo, he got it, did he?" said Benson. "Is he badly hurt?" + +"I hope not," answered the young captain. "You see, the deer didn't +touch him until I fired. Then he leaped up and knocked my cousin down." + +"Hope there aint any bones broken." + +The deer was removed, and Benson went off to get some water. When he +came back Captain Moore and Joe were rubbing Darry's wrists. The water +was dashed into the unconscious youth's face, and soon he gave a gasp +and opened his eyes. + +"The deer?" were his first words. + +"You are safe," said the captain reassuringly. "The deer is dead." + +"Oh!" Darry uttered a sigh of relief. "I was thinking he was goring me +to pieces." + +"You had a narrow escape," put in old Benson. "If it hadn't been for the +captain he would have mauled you for certain. Didn't you hear me yell to +be careful?" + +"I thought it would be an easy matter to bring him down, after he was +wounded," said Darry, still gasping for breath. + +"Any bones broken?" questioned Captain Moore. + +"I--I guess not." Darry gave a sigh and sat up. "How did Joe make out?" + +"I am all right," answered that individual. "Benson did the trick for me +though. Benson, I owe you a good deal." + +"And I owe you a good deal," said Darry, turning to his cousin. + +"I'm glad I came up, Darry," answered the young captain. "After this +both you and Joe must be more careful. If either of you had been killed +I would never have forgiven myself for bringing you out on the hunt." + +"I want to give you both a bit of advice, and I want you to remember it +too," came from the old scout. "Never get too close to big game until +you are certain of what you are doing, and be extry careful of big game +that is wounded and cornered. Even a sneaking fox will turn on you if he +sees there is no other way out of his difficulty." + +"I'll remember that," answered both Joe and Darry, and they did +remember, and thus was one peril of big-game hunting abolished. + +Darry felt too weak for the time being to do much, so Joe led him back +to where they had left the horses, while Captain Moore and old Benson +took upon themselves the task of bringing in the four deer. Each was a +beautiful prize, and the quartet made an imposing sight when hung up on +a couple of tree branches. + +"The colonel will like this haul," said the young captain. "It will mean +prime venison for some days to come. Benson, I wish we could get some of +it back to the fort without delay--so we can put it on ice and keep it +nice." + +"I'll take 'em all to the fort to-night, if you say so," answered the +scout. "I can take one on my horse, and load the other three on one of +the other animals." + +"Then do that, and while at the fort ask the colonel if he will give me +permission to remain out until Saturday. Tell him we think we can bring +in something for all hands to enjoy." + +"I'll do it," said the old scout. + +Soon the deer were packed on the horses, old Benson having first cut +some steaks from the smallest of the game, to leave behind. + +"Take good care of yourselves while I am gone," he said on departing. +"And you, Joe and Darry, mind what I told you about getting cornered." +Then he was off, and a turn in the mountain trail soon hid him from +view. + +"A fine old fellow," was Joe's comment, when Benson was gone. + +"He is that," answered the young captain. "I liked him from the first +time I saw him, and I have never had cause to regret it. He is a good +hunter, an excellent scout, and has done us many a good turn." + +"What shall we do while he is absent?" questioned Darry. + +"Oh, we can try our hand at small game and we can fish!" answered the +young captain. "As it is, I reckon both of you would just as lief take +it easy until morning." + +"I would. That deer on me has made me feel sore all over." + +They were soon in camp again, and while the boys rested Captain Moore +stirred around and showed them how the soldiers prepared their meals. He +cooked the steaks to a turn, and boiled a pot of coffee, and these, with +some crackers they had brought along, made a most excellent meal. Being +in no hurry, they took their time over the repast, and it was dark long +before they finished. + +"It's going to be a fine night, so we can sleep under the trees without +fear," said the young captain. + +"Don't you think some wild animals will attack us?" + +"Not if we keep our camp-fire burning." + +The boys brought in plenty of brush and some heavier wood, and arranged +it so that it would burn for a long while, doing this by forming the +stuff into something of a circle. Then the horses were looked after, and +each retired, with his blanket rolled around him to keep off the +mountain dew, which was already showing itself. + +When the boys awoke the sun was shining brightly into their faces. For a +moment each stared at the other. + +"Gracious, I never slept so soundly in my life!" cried Joe. "I couldn't +have done better in a bed at home." + +"Nor I," returned his cousin. "I can tell you, sleeping in the open air +when it doesn't rain is all right." + +But when Darry got up on his feet he changed his tune. The fall of the +day previous, combined with the night air, had made him woefully stiff, +and it was a good half-hour before he became limbered up. + +They found Captain Moore already stirring, and the kettle over the fire +was boiling merrily. The captain himself was trying his luck at a brook +not a great distance off. + +"I saw some fish in here some weeks ago," he explained. "I thought I +might get a couple for breakfast. But you lads will have to wait until I +strike luck." + +"I'm willing to wait," said Joe. "There is nothing to do, is there, +until Benson gets back?" + +"Nothing that I know of, unless you want to fish or go after some small +game. I want to hear what he has to say. If the colonel won't let me +stay out, I'll have to return to the fort to-night." + +It did not take long for Captain Moore to land several good-sized +specimens of the finny tribe, and these the boys took turns at preparing +for eating, while the captain continued to fish. The balance of the +morning was passed at the brook, and, strange to say, the captain and +Joe were both quite successful, while Darry hardly got a bite. + +"I'm going to try my luck further up the stream," announced the boy. "I +believe we are all fishing too closely together." + +"That doesn't seem to hurt my luck," said Joe. + +Darry was soon climbing the rocks leading up the brook. The way was +rough, but he was growing used to this life in the open air and he +enjoyed even the hardship, if such it can be called. + +"That ought to make a good fishing-hole," he said to himself, as he +reached a point where several big rocks hung over the water's edge. +"It's dark down there, and that's what some fish like." + +He prepared his bait with care, and then dropped his line into the hole. +Almost immediately he felt a nibble, and, giving a jerk, found he had +caught something that was both large and powerful. + +"Gracious, it must be a whopper!" he muttered, as the fish darted hither +and thither. Then he braced back on the rock, to play the game, for +bringing in the catch at once seemed out of the question. The pole bent +greatly, and he was afraid it would snap on him. + +He could not stand on the slippery rock very well, and so stepped behind +it, on a number of loose stones. Hardly had he done so when he heard a +strange hissing. Looking down, he saw a snake glide from under the rock. +In a moment more the angry reptile faced him. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +OVER THE MOUNTAIN TOP. + + +Darry was much alarmed, and with good reason. Never before had he faced +such a snake, and the reptile looked ready to spring upon him at any +instant. + +What to do the boy did not know, yet instinctively he leaped back to the +top of the rock. Then the fish gave a jerk which almost took him from +his feet. + +"Joe! Will!" he shouted. "Come this way! I'm in a pickle!" + +"What's the matter?" shouted Captain Moore, and soon he and his brother +were coming forward as quickly as they could. + +In the meantime Darry was having his hands full, for the big fish was +bound to get away. At the bottom of the rock lay the snake, with head +raised and mouth wide open. Its eyes shone like diamonds. + +"A snake! Kill it!" shrieked Darry. + +"A snake?" echoed Joe. "Where?" + +"At the bottom of this big rock. Oh, my, he's going to come up!" + +"I see him," put in Captain Moore. + +As he spoke the snake made a leap for the top of the rock. As the +reptile went up, Darry went down, and ran along the brook's edge, still +with his fishing-pole in his hand. + +Catching up a sharp stone, Captain Moore flung it at the snake, hitting +the reptile in the tail. At once the thing whirled around, and now +forgetting Darry it turned on its assailant. + +"He's coming for you!" ejaculated Joe. "Run, Will, or you'll be bitten +sure!" + +"I'm not running from a snake," answered the young officer, and in a +trice he whipped out his pistol. As the snake came on he let drive. His +aim was true, and the snake dropped with its head half severed from its +body. + +"Good for you!" said Joe, and now he picked up a stone as large as his +hand. This he dropped directly on the quivering head, and thus ended the +battle, although the body of the snake continued to wriggle for a long +while afterward. + +With white face and set teeth, Darry continued to play his catch and he +was still at it when Joe and his brother came rushing up. + +"Did the snake bite you?" questioned the young captain. "Why didn't you +pull in?" + +"I've got something big on," answered Darry. "I didn't want to miss it." + +"Well, I never!" gasped Captain Moore. "And you didn't let go even with +that snake at your heels? Well, you like a fish better than I do, I can +tell you that." + +Again the pole bent and threatened to break, but Darry knew what he was +doing, and promptly let the fish have more line. Then he wound in, and +as the fish unexpectedly came close to shore he gave a sudden strong, +steady sweep, and up came the prize on the rocks, flapping and flopping +violently. + +"My, what a whopper!" cried Joe. "He must weigh at least seven or eight +pounds!" + +"He felt as if he weighed about forty when he was in the water," +returned Darry, a little crest-fallen that the catch was not larger. + +"That's the biggest fish I've ever seen taken out of this stream," said +the young captain. "You can be proud of it, Darry. But to hold on when +that snake was behind you----" He shook his head. + +"Oh, I knew you'd come up and take care of that, Cousin Will." + +"But I might have been too late." + +"Was it a poisonous one?" + +"Some claim they are poisonous, but the surgeon up at the fort says not. +Still I wouldn't want to risk a bite." + +"Perhaps there are more around," suggested Joe. + +"No, the peculiarity of this variety of snakes is that they always +travel alone. If they meet they fight until one or the other is dead." + +"Did you ever see such a fight, Will?" + +"I did, when I first came to these parts. I was riding over a rocky +trail when my horse suddenly stopped, nearly throwing me. On looking +ahead to find out what had frightened my animal, I discovered two of +these snakes. They were facing each other, with mouths wide open and +fangs showing. Each was so interested in the other that neither noticed +me or the horse. They faced each other for fully a minute, and during +that time began to hiss louder and louder. Suddenly they sprang at each +other, and one snake was stung in the eye. He curled himself around the +other snake's neck, and in an instant both were in a tight ball. They +rolled around and around among the rocks. Once in a while a head would +show itself, and then there would be more hissing. After ten minutes the +ball fell gradually apart, and then one snake crawled slowly away, more +dead than alive. The other snake proved to be dead, with both eyes torn +from its head." + +"Didn't you kill the other snake?" asked Darry. + +"I did. That's the first and only battle I ever saw between snakes, and +it was terrible while it lasted, I can tell you that." + +Fishing over, they went into camp, and here rested until old Benson came +back. + +"The colonel was tickled to death to receive so much deer meat," said +the old scout. "And he says you can stay until Saturday night if you +wish. His lady said she had been wanting some venison for several +weeks." + +Captain Moore felt glad to think he could be out four days more. + +"We'll have a grand time now," he said. "Benson, we can go right over +yonder mountain, can't we?" + +"To be sure," answered the scout. + +"Is the hunting good over there?" asked Joe. + +"Yes, lad. There used to be some buffalo there." + +"Good! Let us get a buffalo by all means!" cried Darry. + +"You go slow about tackling a buffalo, especially a bull," said the +young captain. "If we do sight a buffalo you let Benson manage the whole +affair." + +It was not long before the party were off once more, up a trail which +led directly to the mountain top. Here traveling was difficult, and both +riders and horses were glad to rest at frequent intervals. + +When the top was gained the sun was just sinking in the far west. The +sight on every side was a glorious one, and as the captain had a small +field-glass with him, they could see for miles. + +"There is the fort," said Joe, after looking through the glass. "I can +see the flag quite plainly." + +In the west were more mountains, and between these the valley for which +they were bound. Timber and underbrush were dense in spots, while at +other points the mountain sides were covered with bold, blackish rocks, +with here and there luxuriant moss of several hues. Springs and brooks +were numerous, so there was no danger of a water famine. + +"I can make out some game over yonder," said Darry, when he had the +glass adjusted to his sight. + +"What is it?" + +"I can't see very plainly." + +"Hand over the glass," said old Benson, and took a careful look. But the +setting sun now cast a deep shadow between the mountains, and he was +unable to tell what it was. + +"Mountain deer, most likely," he said. "We'll find out to-morrow--if +the good weather holds out." + +"Do you think we'll have a storm?" asked Joe quickly. + +"We'll have something; don't you think so, captain?" + +"I think we'll have more wind than rain," returned Captain Moore. + +"If we have a high wind, will it be safe right on the mountain top?" +questioned Joe. + +"We won't stay here," said old Benson. "I know of a much better +camping-place. Come, while it is still a little light." And they set off +once more. + +The place the old scout had in mind was close beside a cliff. The wall +of rocks was twice as high as their heads, and on either side was a +growth of heavy timber. There was a spring at hand and a grassy patch +which promised them an easy bed, providing it did not rain. + +"If it storms we can seek the shelter of the cliff," said old Benson. +"It won't be as comfortable as a house or cabin, but it will be a good +deal better than being right in the open." + +The boys were glad enough to rest after the wearisome ride over the top +of the mountain, and hungry for the meal the old scout took upon himself +to prepare. + +When the fire was lit it burned up lively, blowing the sparks in several +directions. As soon as he finished cooking the meal Benson put out the +blaze. + +"Too much wind," he said, in reply to a question from Joe. "I don't want +to set the whole mountain side on fire." + +Benson was right about the wind, which was now sweeping strongly through +the tops of the tall trees. Presently it came lower, and shook up the +brushwood. The night birds began to fly around, uttering their shrill +cries. The old scout listened to the birds with some concern. + +"It's going to be a big blow," he said to Darry. + +"You are sure?" + +"Yes. The birds are afraid of it. See how they flutter around? That's a +sure sign." + +"Birds must know a good deal, Benson." + +"They do, lad--a heap sight more than folks gives 'em credit for. We +could learn a good deal from them, if we'd only set our minds to it." + +They took their time about eating, having nothing else to do. Then +Benson cared for the horses, putting them in the shelter of the brush, +but away from the big trees. + +At last it began to blow in earnest, and presently they heard a tree +limb here and there snap with a loud report. Then the wind became so +furious they were glad enough to huddle under the cliff for shelter. + +"It's coming now!" shouted old Benson suddenly. "Hold fast to your hats, +boys, or you'll never see them again. And sit down on the traps!" + +And in a moment more the fury of the wind storm was upon them. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +THE RESULT OF A HURRICANE. + + +Both Joe and Darry had witnessed many a blow, but nothing to compare to +that which now swept through the valley and up the mountain side. The +velocity of the wind was simply terrific, and it was well that old +Benson had cautioned them to hold on to their hats and sit on their +traps, otherwise all would have been blown away to parts unknown. + +"Say, but this is fierce!" gasped Darry, after several minutes had +passed. + +"It's a regular hurricane," said Captain Moore. "I've been out in them +before. Fortunately they do not last over a quarter or half an hour. +Down on the prairies of Kansas they would call it a cyclone. Here, +however, it can't get the sweep that it can on the level." + +"Hark! what is that?" put in Joe, as a tremendous crashing reached their +ears. + +"That's a tree in the forest going down," answered old Benson. + +"There goes another," said Darry, as more crashing was heard. "I am +glad we didn't go into the timber. It's more dangerous than lightning." + +"So it is!" shouted Benson. It was with difficulty that he made himself +heard. "Here comes the worse of it!" he added. + +A strange humming now filled the air, followed by twigs and flying +branches. Overhead it was unusually dark, and they could scarcely see +one another. Joe and Darry kept close together and clasped hands. +Captain Moore was on one side of them and old Benson on the other. + +As the wind struck the cliff it sent a shower of loose stones in all +directions. Then it tore through the undergrowth where the horses were +tethered. Next it seemed to hit the trees fronting the cliff. One tall +monarch of the forest was twisted completely from its roots and began to +topple. + +"See, the tree is coming on top of us!" shrieked Joe. + +His words were drowned out in the fury of the wind and the crashing of +the tree. The next moment the monarch of the forest came down on the +cliff with a bang, cracking the stone in several places. The bottom +limbs caught those under the cliff and pinned them fast. + +To both boys it seemed as if the end of the world had come. They rolled +over, one on top of the other, and for several seconds lay dazed. Then +they tried to get up, but found themselves unable to do so. + +"Get off of my chest!" gasped Joe, who was underneath. + +"I can't--I'm pinned down!" panted Darry. + +"Boys, are you safe?" came from old Benson, who was also caught. + +"I--I guess so!" answered Joe. "But it's a tight squeeze." Then the +youth called out to his brother, but no answer came back. + +"Will must be hurt!" he exclaimed, his heart rising in his throat. +"Will! Will! Where are you?" he continued. + +Still there was no answer, or if so the fury of the wind drowned it out +completely. The boys tried their best to move, but could only budge a +few inches. + +In five minutes the fury of the blow spent itself and the last of the +wind sent the fallen tree rolling along the cliff a distance of several +rods. This released Joe and Darry, and they arose to their feet dazed +and bewildered and scarcely knowing what to do next. It was now raining +and darker than ever. + +"Benson!" called out Joe, "where is my brother?" + +"The captain must still be under the tree," replied the old scout. "He +was next to you when the tree came down, wasn't he?" + +"He was, but I believe the wind carried his hat off, and he made a dive +for it. That's the last I saw of him." + +Staggering to his feet, Joe looked around, trying to pierce the +darkness. Darry followed him, and old Benson also got up. The scout had +received a nasty cut on the shoulder, from which the blood was flowing. + +In a few minutes Joe found his brother. The captain lay on the rocks +unconscious, a big lump on his forehead, where the largest of the tree's +branches had struck him. Kneeling at his brother's side, the boy made a +hasty examination. + +"He's alive!" he said. "But he must have been struck a terrible crack." + +There was little to do excepting to bathe the unconscious officer's +head, and this was done. In the meantime Darry assisted old Benson at +binding up the wounded shoulder. + +"Take the tree off!" Such were the first words Captain Moore uttered +when he returned to consciousness. It was some time before he could sit +up. + +"You are all right, Will--the tree is not on you," said Joe soothingly. + +"But it came down right on top of me." + +"Yes, it came down on all of us." + +"Anybody killed?" + +"No. Benson has a cut on the shoulder, and you were knocked out. Feel +the lump on your head." + +The young captain did so. + +"Phew! But that's a regular goose-egg, isn't it?" he muttered. "I +suppose I can be thankful that I am alive." + +"We can all be thankful for that, Will." + +"It was the greatest blow I ever experienced--in more ways than one," +said the captain. "I see it is raining. We had better go back to the +cliff for protection." + +"Don't do it!" cried old Benson, from out of the darkness. "The tree +struck the cliff a heavy blow, and we don't want that down on our heads +next." + +"No, let us give the cliff a wide berth," said Darry. "I'd rather remain +right out in the open and get soaked than take any more risks." + +"The rain won't amount to much," said Benson. "It never does after such +a hurricane." + +The scout was right, and in less than half an hour after it had begun +the downpour was over and the stars were struggling forth in the sky. +Without delay a camp-fire was lit, and the blaze did much toward making +them comfortable. It was found that Benson's wound was by far the worst, +yet the old scout said it would not interfere with his outing. + +"I've had lots of 'em in my time," was the way he expressed himself. +"Lots, and I aint dead yet. 'Pears to me I'm about as tough as a +pine-knot." + +It was found that the horses had not suffered in the least from the +storm, although they had been much frightened. Soon they calmed down, +and by midnight all was as quiet as if nothing out of the ordinary had +occurred. But Captain Moore and old Benson carried the marks of the +adventure for many days after. + +On the following morning no one felt much in the humor for hunting, and +half a day was lost in "bumming around," as Joe expressed it. This gave +all a good rest and put the horses in fine fettle, and when they started +out after the midday meal all were once again in high spirits. + +That night found them on the edge of what old Benson called the buffalo +ground, a broad valley where the grass was thick and of a peculiar +richness. On the way they had shot a number of birds and also a few +small animals, but nothing of importance. Once some deer had been +sighted, but the game was too far off to be pursued. + +As they expected to remain at this point until ready to return home, the +old scout proceeded to put up a shelter of brush, which, when completed, +was almost as comfortable as a cabin. On the bottom were strewn pine +boughs, which gave the shelter a peculiar odor. + +"Best thing in the world for colds and weak lungs, that smell," said +Benson. "I've never known it to fail." The boys declared that the odor +made them sleep "like logs." + +"It's queer we haven't seen any Indians," remarked Darry. "I thought +these mountains were full of them." + +"They were full, before the fort was established," answered Benson. "But +the kind that are in this neighborhood don't like white men very much, +and they only come around the fort when it's necessary. But we may meet +some after buffalo. An Injun will do a heap to get a critter like that." + +The old scout said it would be useless to go out in a body to look for +buffalo, and so it was arranged that he should first go over the ground +alone, leaving the captain and the two boys to look for smaller game. + +This settled, Benson soon set off, and a little later Captain Moore, +Joe, and Darry took their way along some bushes skirting a small +water-course. They went on foot, leaving their horses tethered near the +shelter. + +"I will go up one side of the stream, and you can go up the other," said +the captain. "By doing that we'll be sure to stir up anything within a +hundred yards of the water." + +The boys agreed, and soon each member of the party was hard at work, on +the hunt for any small game the vicinity might afford. + +It was not long before they gained a spot where the underbrush along the +brook was thick. Here the stream divided into two branches, and, without +knowing it, the captain and the boys became gradually more and more +separated, the brush and small trees hiding each from the other. + +"I don't see much," said Joe, after half a mile had been covered. "Those +little birds aren't worth wasting powder and shot on." + +"It looks to me as if somebody had gone over this ground," returned +Darry. "See here, aren't those fresh footprints?" + +"I believe they are. And see, here are the prints of several horses' +hoofs. Benson didn't come this way, did he?" + +"I don't think he did." + +"Then there must be other hunters not far off." + +They continued on their way, coming to a halt where the branch of the +brook entered a small, rocky canyon. + +"No use of going further," said Joe. "Let us retrace our steps." + +"Where can your brother be? I haven't heard him for some time." + +Joe set up a yell, and both listened attentively. No answer came back. +Then both called in concert. Still the silence continued. + +"It's mighty queer," was Joe's comment "Let us go back. Perhaps he's in +trouble." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +CAPTAIN MOORE'S ADVENTURE. + + +In the meanwhile, never dreaming of the danger at hand, Captain Moore +pursued his way up the other branch of the water-course. Here the +underbrush was even more dense than where the boys were, and +consequently he did not think it strange that he heard nothing of his +brother and his cousin. + +The fact that he stirred up no game nettled him, and he pushed on, +determined to bring down something before he went back. + +Suddenly he espied something moving in the patch of wood ahead of him. +Rifle in hand, he moved cautiously in the direction. + +As he did this, a man glided out from the bushes to his right and +followed him as silently as a shadow. + +The man was Gus Fetter. The desperado was fully armed, and his face was +black with hatred of the young army officer. + +As the wood was gained, Captain Moore paused to locate the object he had +seen. + +But before he could do this, he was caught from behind and his rifle was +wrenched from his grasp. + +"Fetter!" he ejaculated, as he caught sight of the desperado. + +"Up with your hands, Captain Moore!" growled the rascal savagely. "Up, I +say! I've got the drop on you!" + +Fetter had thrown the captain's rifle to the ground, and now stood upon +it. In his hands he held his own weapon, and the muzzle was aimed at the +young officer's head. + +Realizing that discretion was the better part of valor, Captain Moore +threw up his hands promptly, at which the desperado grinned wickedly. + +"Where did you come from, Fetter?" demanded the captain. + +"From not far away, captain." + +"What do you mean by treating a United States army officer in this +fashion?" + +"I've got a score to settle with you, captain. Don't forget that." + +"Are the rest of the gang around?" + +"They are." + +Following his last words, Gus Fetter gave a long, clear whistle, +followed by two shorter ones. At once an answer came back from the +woods, and in a few seconds Matt Gilroy appeared. + +"Hullo, so you've got him," sang out the leader of the desperadoes. "A +good haul. How are you, Captain Moore? Delighted to see me, I suppose." + +"Not at all glad to meet you--considering the circumstances," answered +the young officer, trying to keep cool, although he realized that he was +in a dangerous situation. + +"Well, you're honest about it, anyway," said Gilroy with a brutal laugh. + +"Have you been following our party?" + +"You had better not ask too many questions, captain." + +By this time Potts and two other men were coming up. One of the latter +carried his left arm in a sling. Captain Moore's recognized him as a +fellow who had been wounded in the raid on the quartermaster's party. + +The desperadoes consulted among themselves for a few minutes, and then +Captain Moore was ordered to march on. + +"To where?" he asked. + +"You'll see when you get there," answered Fetter. "Now move, or, by the +boots, I shoot you down where you stand!" + +Seeing it would be worse than useless to resist, the young officer did +as ordered, and the whole party moved away from the water-course and +took to a trail leading back to the side of the mountain. + +Presently they came upon a number of horses, and here they mounted. +There were two steeds without riders, and Captain Moore was ordered to +the back of one of these. All rode off in a bunch, the prisoner being +kept in the center of the party. He had been searched and his pistol +taken from him, also his pocket-knife, field-glass, and his money and +jewelry. + +In less than quarter of an hour a split in the mountain side was gained. +To the rear was something of a cave, the entrance overgrown with brush +and vines. At the mouth of the cave the party came to a halt, and were +met by several other desperadoes. + +"Now you can get down," said Gilroy. "Fetter, I guess we had better bind +his hands behind him." + +"You are going to bind me?" queried Captain Moore. + +"And why not? You are such a nice chap, captain, we don't want to part +with you just yet." + +"Why are you going to keep me a prisoner?" + +"Well, don't forget that we hold you responsible for that little mix-up +when we were after the quartermaster's money-bags." + +"I only did my duty, Gilroy." + +"Perhaps; but if it hadn't been for you and your men our gang would have +been about twenty thousand dollars richer than we are to-day." + +"And I wouldn't have this lame arm," growled the fellow who had been +wounded. + +"As I said before, I only did my duty," repeated the captain calmly. +"Even if I hadn't arrived, don't you suppose the quartermaster would +have done all he could to defend himself?" + +"Certainly; but his party numbered only three. However, we won't talk +now. We have other things to do. Get into that cave. And don't try to +escape, or it will be the worse for you." + +With a downcast heart the young officer entered the cave, which was an +old rendezvous of the desperadoes. Inside were a rude table and a couple +of benches, and he threw himself down on one of the latter. One of the +gang, Potts, put himself on guard outside, rifle in hand. The others +separated into two parties, and went off again. + +"Can they be going after Joe and Darry, or after Benson?" was the +question the captain asked himself. + +He waited until the hoofbeats outside had entirely ceased, then called +to Potts. + +"Where are they going?" he asked. + +"That's Captain Gilroy's business," was the answer. + +"Oh, so you call Gilroy captain now?" + +"We do." + +"How many men is he captain of?" + +"About thirty, if you're anxious to know." + +"Thirty! There are not that number of desperadoes within three hundred +miles of this place." + +"All right, if you know better than I do." + +"Has the captain gone off for the rest of my party?" + +"Perhaps he has." + +"It won't do him any good to make them prisoners." + +"I reckon he knows his own business best, Captain Moore." + +"And what will you get out of this affair, Potts?" + +"Me? I'll get my share when we make another haul." + +"Do you expect to make another haul soon?" + +"As I said afore, better ask the captain. We're organized into a regular +company now, and all the privates like me have to do is to obey orders. +You know how it is in the regular army." + +"A company of desperadoes," mused Captain Moore. "That's something we +haven't had out here in years." + +Potts would talk no more after this, but sat down on a rock to smoke +his pipe and continue his guard duty. + +The young captain had had his hands bound tightly behind him, and, try +his best, he found himself unable to either break or slip his bonds. + +He was anxious concerning himself, but he was even more upset concerning +his brother and his cousin. + +"If they kick up a fuss, more than likely Gilroy and the others will +shoot them down!" he groaned. "It's too bad! I thought we would have a +splendid time hunting, and here we are, falling into all sorts of +difficulties." + +As impatient as he was, he could do nothing but stalk around the cave. +The place was five yards wide by over a hundred feet long. To the rear +was a rude fireplace, the smoke drifting through some wide cracks +overhead. A small fire was burning, and he kicked a fresh log on the +blaze, which soon gave him more light. Then he sat down again. + +As he rested, his eyes roamed around the rocky apartment, and presently +fell upon a sheet of paper lying under the table. Curious to know what +it might contain, he bent down backwards, and by an effort secured the +paper and placed it upon the table. Then, by the flickering flames, he +tried to make out the writing it contained. + +The letter--for such the sheet proved to be--was a communication which +had been sent to Matt Gilroy by a writer who signed himself Mose. It ran +as follows: + + "The plan will work perfectly, and all we must do is to wait until + the money is at the fort. I am sure the soldiers will leave as + requested, and the defense will amount to little or nothing. Will + see to it that Colonel Fairfield is drugged, and will treat Captain + Moore and the other officers the same way, if I can get the + chance." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THREE PRISONERS. + + +It did not take Joe and Darry long to retrace their steps at the +water-course. They continued to call to the young captain, and once Joe +shot off his rifle as a signal, but, as we know, no answer came back. + +"I can't understand this at all," said Joe, when they halted near the +shelter. "I didn't hear him do any firing, did you?" + +"Not a shot," answered Darry. "He must have gone away from the brook +instead of along the bank." + +The two boys hung around the shelter for some time, and then decided to +follow up the trail left by the young officer. + +This was easy for part of the distance, but soon the footprints became +so indistinct that they came to another halt. + +"Stumped!" muttered Joe. "We might as well go back to the shelter and +wait till he returns. One thing is certain, he hasn't found any game, or +we would have heard the firing." + +Tired by their long tramp the boys sat down in the shelter, thinking +that Captain Moore would return at any moment. + +Thus an hour was passed. It was now noon, and Joe and Darry set to work +to prepare dinner for themselves. + +The repast was just finished when Joe let out a cry of alarm. + +"Matt Gilroy!" + +He was right. The captain of the desperadoes had appeared, followed by +several others. + +The boys were taken completely off their guard. Darry made a clutch for +his rifle, but on the instant Gilroy had him covered. + +"Leave the gun alone!" cried the rascal. "Leave it alone, or it will be +the worse for you." + +"What do you want?" questioned Joe. + +"We want you to behave yourselves," answered Fetter, who was in the +crowd. + +"You played us a nice trick that time you escaped from the cave," +growled Gilroy, eying Joe darkly. + +"Do you blame me for wanting to get away?" + +"Hardly. But I'll warrant you won't get away again." + +"Then you consider me your prisoner?" + +"I do." + +"Oh, Joe, do you think they met Will----" began Darry, and then stopped +short. + +"Yes, your brother is waiting to meet you," said Fetter, addressing Joe. + +"Then he is also a prisoner?" + +"Yes." + +Joe's heart sank within him. + +"If old Benson was only here!" he muttered. + +Still guarding the boys, the desperadoes took their guns and also a +pistol the young captain had loaned his brother. + +"Now get on your horses," commanded Gilroy. "And mind, if you try to +play us foul both of you will get shot." + +"Are you going to take us to Captain Moore?" asked Darry. + +"Perhaps." + +The desperadoes would answer no more questions, and in a few minutes the +whole party was off for the cave. Both Darry and Joe wished to leave +behind some sort of message which Benson might pick up, but they were +watched so closely they could do nothing. + +When the cave was gained the boys were told to go inside and keep quiet. + +"Joe! and you too, Darry!" cried Captain Moore. "I was afraid of this." + +"No wonder we couldn't find you!" said Joe, and told of the hunt he and +his cousin had made. + +"These rascals are up to some deep game," whispered the young captain. +"I just picked up a message which Gilroy must have dropped," and he told +what the sheet contained. + +"If I were you I'd burn the paper," said Darry. "Then he won't know you +have seen it." + +"No, I would like to keep the sheet----to show to Colonel Fairfield if I +can manage to get away." + +"Who wrote the message?" + +"I have no idea. There used to be a half-breed around here whom the +soldiers called Mose, but I thought he was dead. He was thick with the +Modoc Indians." + +"Then if he was the writer that would show that the Indians are going to +help the desperadoes, wouldn't it?" asked Joe. + +Before his brother could answer, Matt Gilroy stalked into the cave. + +"I told you not to talk," he growled, as he cast his eye on the table +and then around the rocky floor. "You can't get away, so it won't do you +any good to plot against me and my men." + +He was evidently looking for the sheet of paper, for presently he lit a +torch and went over the whole cave carefully. + +"See anything of a bit of paper around here?" he asked presently. + +"What kind of a paper?" questioned Darry. + +"Something with writing on it." + +"I haven't seen anything." + +"What was the writing about, Gilroy?" asked Captain Moore. + +"That's my business. Then you haven't seen the paper? All right," and +the desperado stalked from the cave again. + +"That was a close shave," whispered the young captain. "And it proves +that the paper is valuable and that he is worried about it." + +Slowly the balance of the day wore along, and at nightfall one of the +men brought them a scanty supply of food. + +They ate sparingly, fearing the food might be drugged, but no evil +effects followed the meal. + +At the mouth of the cave sat two of the desperadoes on guard, each with +his rifle across his knees. + +"A dash into the darkness might save us," suggested Darry, but the +captain shook his head. + +"No, those fellows are too good shots," he said. "We will have to remain +as we are until something turns up in our favor." + +Our friends wondered if the desperadoes would remain about the cave all +night. The other party which had gone off when Gilroy went for Joe and +Darry had not yet returned, and the leader of the gang seemed to grow +anxious concerning them. + +"Something has happened to them," he said to Fetter. "Perhaps we had +better send somebody off on the trail to find out what's up." + +So it was agreed, and Fetter was the man chosen for the mission. + +As may have been surmised by some of my readers, the other party had +gone off to watch for old Benson and make him a prisoner. The crowd +numbered three, and were desperadoes well acquainted with that +territory. + +The old scout had spent several hours in a vain endeavor to locate some +buffalo, when, on resting in the crotch of a tree, he saw the +desperadoes approaching. + +The rascals were tired out with their search for the scout, and came to +a halt directly under the tree. + +"It's a fool errand," old Benson heard one of the men say. "Matt Gilroy +ought to have been satisfied with corraling Captain Moore and those +boys." + +"The captain wants to make a grand round-up," answered another of the +men. "He told me that if we missed Benson the scout might make trouble." + +Benson listened to this conversation with intense interest, and soon +learned the truth--that Captain Moore was already a prisoner, and that +another party had gone off to bring in Joe and Darry. + +"This is a nice state of affairs," he thought. "These rascals mean +mischief. I wish I could get the drop on them. I'd soon teach them a +thing or two." + +He watched the men as a cat watches mice, and, when the party of three +moved on, stole after them like an Indian on the warpath. + +The desperadoes skirted the brushwood, but did not go out on the grassy +slope of the valley, fearing that the old scout might be near by in +hiding and see them. + +They were a shiftless lot, and soon came to another halt, under some +small trees. Here they threw themselves on the ground, and while two of +them smoked their pipes the third indulged in a nap. + +Not a great distance off was a spring of pure cold water, and presently +one of the men got up and walked over to this to get a drink. + +"My chance for number one!" muttered old Benson, and crawled after the +desperado. As the man turned the corner of a number of rocks, he came up +behind, clapped his hands over the fellow's mouth, and bore him to the +earth. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +BENSON PUTS SOME MEN IN A HOLE. + + +The man whom old Benson had attacked was taken completely by surprise, +and he went to the ground easily. But, once down, he struggled fiercely +to release himself, and at the same time did his best to cry out for +assistance. + +"Silence!" commanded the scout in a whisper. "If you yell, it will go +hard with you." + +The desperado now saw who had attacked him, and his face changed color. +But he continued to struggle, and was on the point of breaking away when +the old scout hit him a heavy blow on the ear, which bowled him over and +rendered him partly unconscious. + +"Hi! did you call?" came from the other man who had been smoking. + +Old Benson looked at the man before him, and saw that the fellow would +be unable to do anything for several minutes to come. + +"Yes," he answered, in a rough voice. "Here's something funny to look +at. Come quick." + +At once the second man leaped up, and without stopping to pick up his +rifle came to the spring. Old Benson quickly stepped behind a bush, out +of sight. + +"Hullo, Riley, what's the trouble?" cried the second man when he beheld +his prostrate companion. + +He bent over Riley, and while he was making an examination old Benson +came behind him and threw him as he had thrown the first desperado. + +But the second man was "game," and the struggle lasted for several +minutes. At one time it looked as if the old scout would get the worst +of the encounter, but in the end he triumphed and the rascal was +disarmed. + +All the time the struggle was going on Benson had been afraid the third +man would rouse up, especially as the second called several times for +help. But the rascal had now fallen into a heavy sleep, and heard +nothing. + +What to do with the two desperadoes before him the old scout did not +know, until he suddenly thought of a big cave-like hole he had +discovered that very morning, while hunting for buffalo tracks. The hole +was fifteen to twenty feet in diameter and twice as deep, and once at +the bottom he felt certain the desperadoes would have considerable +trouble in getting to the top. + +"Come with me," he said to the second fellow. "And no monkey shines, if +you know when you are well off." + +"Wot yer goin' to do wid me?" growled the desperado. + +"You'll see. Your blood is so hot it needs cooling off," answered the +old scout. + +He forced the man along, and soon the big hole was reached. Much against +his will, the rascal was forced to drop to the bottom. + +"Now, if you try to climb up I'll shoot you," said Benson, and ran back +swiftly to where the second rascal was just getting out of his +unconscious state. + +Before the other desperado could realize what was coming he, too, was +down in the big hole. Old Benson made certain that each of the men was +relieved of all his weapons. + +"Now, I'm going to keep watch on you," he said, as a warning. "Be +careful of what you try to do." + +"Don't leave us here!" pleaded Riley. "A buffalo or a bear might fall in +on us." + +"You've got to take your chances on that," answered Benson. + +The next movement of the old scout was to go back to where the third man +was sleeping. It was an easy matter to secure all the weapons belonging +to this fellow. Then Benson procured a rope from their outfit, and bound +his feet together and then his hands. During the latter operation the +rascal awoke. + +"Wot yer doin'?" he demanded sleepily, and then, seeing the old scout, +stared in open-mouthed astonishment. "Let go o' me! Wot did yer tie me +up fer?" + +"You keep quiet," said Benson, with a broad smile over the trick he had +played. + +"Whar's Riley an' Nason?" + +"Not far off." + +"Did they go ter sleep too?" + +"You can ask them when you see them, Anderson." + +"So you know me, do yer?" + +"I do, and I haven't forgotten that affair at Mountain Meadow," went on +old Benson, referring to a shooting in which Anderson had been the +guilty party. + +At these words the desperado winced. + +"Well, now ye have got me fast, wot yer goin' to do with me?" he +questioned. + +"I'm going to ask you a few questions, Anderson, and I want you to +answer me straight, too. If I learn you've given it to me crooked, I'll +fix you for it, remember that." + +"Wot do yer want to know?" + +"Where are Gilroy and the rest of your crowd stopping?" + +"Wot do yer want to know that fur?" + +"Answer the question--and tell me the truth," and old Benson looked +sternly at his prisoner. + +"At a cave near Bald Top," returned Anderson sulkily. "But I don't know +how long they were goin' ter stay there." + +"Where were they going to take Captain Moore?" + +This question came as a surprise to the desperado. + +"Wot do yer know about dat?" he cried. + +"Answer the question." + +"Goin' ter take him to dat same cave, first." + +"And then?" + +"Dey was bound fer Lone Creek, up to where old Cimber onct had a claim." + +"You are telling me the truth? Remember, if you put me on the wrong +trail----" + +"It's the truth, Benson. But, say, don't be rough on me. I aint such a +bad egg. Dat shootin'----" + +"I know all about you, Anderson. Now come with me." + +Reaching down, the old scout untied the rascal's feet, that he might +walk, and then forced Anderson to journey to the big hole. + +Here they found the other two desperadoes sitting at the bottom, +growling over their luck and speculating upon what old Benson intended +to do next. + +"If you leave us here we'll die of hunger and thirst," said one. + +"No, you won't," answered the old scout. "You've got your hands to work +with, and if you aint lazy you can dig your way to the top inside of +twenty-four hours." + +"And our hosses?" + +"I'll take care of them, Riley. If you want 'em again you can get 'em by +applying at the fort." + +"At the fort!" + +"Exactly, and in the meantime we'll keep them in exchange for the +animals Matt Gilroy stole, when I and my friends were stopping at Hank +Leeson's cabin." + +With the desperadoes safe for the time being at the bottom of the hole, +old Benson set off without delay for the cave near Bald Top Mountain, as +it was called for years by Rocky Mountain pioneers. He rode his own +horse, leading the others by his lariat, which he always carried with +him. + +He fully realized that there was danger ahead, and that if he wanted to +assist his friends he must move with caution. He knew that Captain Moore +had been made a prisoner, but whether or not Joe and Darry had been +captured also was still a question. + +Coming in sight of the spot where the cave was located, he dismounted +and tied all the horses in the woods at the foot of a slope. Then he +crawled forward until he was within a hundred feet of the entrance to +the cave. + +He was just in time to see Fetter depart on his mission. The desperado +passed within fifty yards of where the horses were stationed, and for +several minutes Benson was fearful that the animals would be discovered. +But Fetter was looking in another direction, and so saw nothing of the +steeds. + +As darkness had come on, the desperadoes had lit a camp-fire near the +entrance to the cave. + +Two men still remained on guard. The others took it easy, and did very +much as they pleased. All waited for Riley and the others to return with +Fetter, bringing in old Benson as a prisoner. + +As the scout heard the talk about himself he chuckled grimly and grasped +his rifle tighter than ever. + +"Reckon you'd be surprised to know I was so close," he muttered. "Well, +if it comes to a mix-up, I'll try to hold up my end, just you see if I +don't!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +ESCAPING IN THE DARKNESS. + + +It was after midnight when the camp settled down to rest. Fetter had not +returned, and Matt Gilroy was much worried in consequence. Yet he was +tired out, having lost a good portion of the night previous in +traveling, and he lay down with the others. + +The guards at the entrance to the cave had been changed. Those now there +were two young men, recruits to the desperadoes' organization. + +Inside of the cave Captain Moore, Joe, and Darry, having untied each +other's bonds, held a long consultation, the upshot of which was that +they intended to escape if the deed could be accomplished. + +"There is no use in telling you that we will run a big risk," said the +captain. "But as for myself, these rascals are plotting against Colonel +Fairfield and the soldiers at the fort, and I feel it my duty to do my +best toward getting away and warning my commander." + +"Whatever you do, Will, I will back you up, so far as I am able," was +his brother's answer. + +"And I will back you up, too," came from Darry. "But we must be +cautious, for these desperadoes will not hesitate to shoot, and shoot to +kill." And the boy shivered in spite of himself, for no matter how brave +a person may be he seldom cares to run the risk of losing his life. + +The prisoners had been ordered to keep to the back of the cave, but +after all but the guards had retired Captain Moore made bold enough to +walk carefully to the mouth of the place. + +"Hi, you want to keep back there," growled one of the guards, promptly +raising his rifle. + +"Don't be hard on us," pleaded the captain. "Let me get a little fresh +air. It's vile in the back of the cave." + +"Orders were to keep you out of sight," growled the second guard. + +"All right, I'll go back as soon as I've cleaned out my lungs." + +While the captain was speaking he was peering around sharply, trying to +locate the other desperadoes and ascertain what the chances of escape +really were. + +As he gazed first to one side and then the other, he caught sight of a +hand waving in the air. A second later he made out the head and +shoulders of old Benson, as the scout rose to his feet behind some +brushwood. + +The thought that the scout was at hand to assist them cheered the young +officer wonderfully, and he drew a deep breath of satisfaction. + +"Are you going back soon?" growled one of the guards. + +"Yes," answered the captain. "But I say," he went on, "why can't we come +to terms?" + +"Don't want to make any terms with you," growled the other guard. + +"It might be better for you to do so." + +"We know our own business best, captain. You just go back as you was +ordered to do. If you don't----" + +"I don't feel safe in the cave, men, to tell the truth. What is that +pounding overhead?" + +"Pounding overhead?" + +"Yes." + +"Don't know of any pounding. Do you, Ike?" + +"Nary a bit," replied the other guard. + +By this time Joe and Darry were just behind the young officer. + +"Watch out," whispered Captain Moore. "Old Benson is outside, in the +bushes on the left." + +"Good for him!" whispered Joe joyfully. + +"What are you talking about?" demanded one of the guards. + +"I want to know about that pounding overhead," said Captain Moore. "I +don't want the roof to cave in on us." + +He spoke so decidedly that both of the guards were deceived. + +"Nobody is up there," said one of the two. "It must be some wild +animal." + +"Can't one of you go up and look?" asked the young officer. + +"You want the chance to get away," was the suspicious answer. + +"How can we get away, when we are unarmed and you have that rifle," went +on the captain, speaking loudly, for old Benson's benefit. "It won't +take you a minute to look." + +The men, however, refused to budge. + +"We'll stay right here," said one, and the other nodded affirmatively. + +In the meantime old Benson had crawled closer, until he was directly +behind the pair. + +Now of a sudden he leaped between them, and as quick as a flash caught +their rifles and twisted the weapons from their grasp. + +[Illustration: "HE LEAPED BETWEEN THEM AND CAUGHT THEIR RIFLES."] + +As the old scout did this, the young captain also leaped in, followed by +Joe and Darry. + +The guards struggled, but with four against them could do little or +nothing. One, however, had a powerful pair of lungs, and before he could +be stopped, set up a loud cry of alarm. + +"Come with me!" cried old Benson. "Be quick, or it will be too late!" + +He led the way to the wood where the horses were tethered, and the +captain, Joe, and Darry came close behind him. + +Hardly had they gotten away from the guards when the whole camp was in +alarm. + +"What's the trouble?" demanded Matt Gilroy, leaping to his feet and +catching up his rifle. + +"The prisoners have escaped!" answered one of the guards. "We were +attacked by some men from behind. There they go!" + +"Stop!" roared the leader of the desperadoes, and raised his rifle. But +before he could take aim our friends were behind the shelter of the +trees. + +It took but a few seconds to loosen the horses, and as the captain and +the two boys had long since relieved themselves of their bonds they were +soon in the saddle and following the old scout, who seemed to know the +way perfectly, despite the darkness. + +"It was lucky you came up, Benson!" cried Joe, as they dashed along. + +"Wait, we are not yet out of this trouble," answered Benson. "Hark! they +are following!" + +He was right. Gilroy and several of his men had rushed to their horses, +and were now coming along the forest trail at a good rate of speed. + +But their horses were no better than the animals our friends rode, so +the desperadoes did not succeed in cutting down the distance between the +two parties, and at last gave up the chase. + +"It has been a most stirring adventure from start to finish," said +Captain Moore after each had told his story. "And it brings to an end +this outing. I must now get to the fort without delay." + +"And I am perfectly willing to go along," said Darry. "There is no fun +in hunting in a country where the desperadoes are so thick." + +"This will open Colonel Fairfield's eyes," went on the young officer. "I +shouldn't be surprised if he organized another expedition against +Gilroy's gang and didn't let up on them until they were all either in +prison or shot down." + +"It's what they deserve," came from old Benson. "I'll go on such a hunt +with pleasure." + +Our friends continued in the saddle all night and until ten o'clock the +next morning. Then, tired and hot, they went into camp by a cooling +stream. Here they went fishing, and soon caught enough fish for dinner, +after which they took a nap lasting several hours. + +"And now for the fort!" cried Captain Moore; "and the sooner we get +there the better." + +The nap had done the boys a world of good, and as they rode along their +spirits rose so high that Darry proposed a race. Joe was willing, and +away they went, along the well-defined trail, before either the young +officer or the old scout could stop them. + +"They are full of life," said Joe's brother. "Let them go. We'll make +the fort to-night, even if they do tire the horses a bit." + +"It's all right if they don't get into trouble," answered Benson. + +On and on went the two lads, down something of a slope and then along a +level stretch. The bushes grew thick upon both sides, and here and there +were numerous wild flowers. At last they reached a glade rich with green +grass. + +Joe was slightly ahead when he came to a sudden halt. + +"Back, Darry!" he cried. "Get back behind the bushes." + +"What's up?" queried his cousin, as he brought his steed to a +standstill. + +"Buffaloes!" + +"Buffaloes! Where?" + +"Right around the cliff on our right. See, they are coming this way! +Here's luck." + +Joe was right; they had come most unexpectedly upon a herd of seven +buffaloes. The shaggy beasts were all large and powerful-looking. They +were not in the least alarmed, and came toward the boys at a slow but +steady walk. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +SOMETHING ABOUT WHITE OX. + + +"What shall we do, Joe; wait until your brother and old Benson come up?" +asked Darry, as they surveyed the approaching animals. + +"I suppose we ought to wait," answered Joe. "But if they take alarm, +they'll be off in double-quick order, I am afraid." + +Each of the boys brought around his rifle, which had been picked up on +leaving the desperadoes' rendezvous, and saw that it was ready for use. + +"If we could only signal to the others!" suggested Darry impatiently. + +"One of us might go back," began Joe, when he gave a sudden start. "They +see us! See, they are turning away!" he cried. + +Hardly had he spoken when Darry fired, aiming at the largest of the +buffaloes. Joe followed, with a second shot, aimed at the same beast. +Both bullets reached their mark, and the animal was hit in the breast +and in the right foreleg. + +"We hit him!" ejaculated Darry. "Let us fire at him again!" And he +started to reload with all speed. + +When struck the buffalo uttered a bellow of pain and went down on his +knees. But he quickly arose, and now came straight for the boys, his +head down, as if to gore them to death. + +Crack! It was Darry's rifle which spoke up, and the buffalo staggered, +hit on the head, a glancing blow, however, which did little damage. + +By this time Joe had reloaded, but he did not fire at once, hoping to +get a closer shot at the beast. In the meantime the others of the herd +had disappeared completely. + +Soon the buffalo was less than fifty yards off, and not daring to wait +longer Joe took steady aim and let drive. His rifle-barrel had been +pointed at one of those gleaming, bloodshot eyes, and the bullet sped +true, entering the brain of the beast. With a roar and a grunt the +buffalo went down, tearing up a great patch of grass in his fall. + +"Hi! what's all the shooting about?" The cry came from Benson, as he +rode down the trail at a breakneck speed, rifle ready for use. + +"A buffalo!" cried Darry. + +"A buffalo? Look out for yourselves." + +"Yes, take care," came from Captain Moore, who was behind the old scout. + +"We've fixed him," said Joe, not without a good deal of pardonable +pride. + +"Fixed him?" Old Benson looked out upon the glade. "By the great +Jehosophat!" he roared. "Gone and shot a buffalo all by your lone +selves! Or maybe he was dead when you got here?" he added suspiciously. + +"You wouldn't think he was dead, if you could have seen him come toward +us," said Darry. + +"But who shot him? I heard four shots." + +"And every one of 'em went into the buffalo," answered Joe. "Two for +Darry and two for myself." + +"But Joe finished him, with a shot in the eye," said Darry quickly. + +"But Darry hit him in the leg, and that lamed him," said Joe, just as +quickly. "I guess honors are even." + +"Certainly remarkable shooting," was Captain Moore's comment. "Old +hunters couldn't do better, could they, Benson?" + +"Not much better, captain. I never would have dreamed of it, boys. And +to think I couldn't get a smell of 'em when I was out looking 'em up," +Benson said, shaking his head dubiously. + +"This buffalo wasn't alone," said Darry. "The others went in that +direction. You might follow them up." + +"It wouldn't be any use now, lad. They are gone, and that's the end of +it." + +"We mustn't lose too much time," put in the young captain. "I must make +the fort to-night, no matter what comes." + +"But, Will, we can't leave this magnificent buffalo behind," pleaded his +brother. "Darry and I will want the skin, and we'll want to mount the +head and horns, eh, Darry?" + +"To be sure." + +"How long will it take to skin the beast, Benson?" + +"An hour and over, if I want to make a good job of it," was the slow +reply. "It's too nice a hide to ruin by quick cutting." + +"Supposing I ride ahead then, and you follow with the boys as soon as +you are ready?" + +This was agreed to, and in a minute the young officer was off once more, +urging his horse forward at the animal's best speed. + +"Now I can take my time," declared old Benson. "Sorry I aint got my +hunting-knife." + +"Where is it?" + +"It was lost in the shuffle with those desperadoes I put in the hole." +The old scout chuckled. "My! my! how they must love me for putting 'em +down there!" + +"They'll have it in for you when they get out," remarked Darry. + +"Oh, I'm not afraid, lad." + +The buffalo had fallen into something of a heap, and it took their +combined efforts to turn the huge carcass over. Then old Benson got out +his clasp-knife, sharpened the blade upon the leather of his boot, and +set to work, the boys assisting him as much as possible, which was not +much, since the process was entirely new to them. + +"That will be a load," said Joe, when they had the skin and a part of +the head free. "How much do they weigh, Benson?" + +"Close on to a hundred pounds." + +"And how shall we carry that load?" + +"We'll tie it up into something of a long bundle and take turns at +toting it behind our saddles. Of course we won't be able to move along +as fast as before, but that won't be necessary, now the captain has gone +ahead to break the news." + +The trail now led toward the river where Darry had almost lost his life +by being hit with the drifting tree. The path was uncertain in spots, +and they had to be careful for fear of getting into some boggy hole. + +"What a splendid place for a ranch home!" suggested Darry. "Benson, I am +surprised that there are so few cabins in this neighborhood." + +"There used to be quite a number through here, lad; but the Modoc and +other Indians burnt them all down. I suppose new settlers will come in, +now the Indians are behaving themselves." + +"But are they behaving themselves?" questioned Joe. + +"They are doing a good deal better than formerly, Joe. There is only one +old chief in this neighborhood who seems to want to cause trouble." + +"And who is that?" + +"White Ox. He is some sort of a relative to Sitting Bull, so I've been +told, and he won't give in that the white man is master of the +situation. He has tried to get his warriors to rise against us several +times, but so far he hasn't accomplished much." + +"Where is White Ox now?" + +"Over behind yonder mountain to the north. He is chief of a band that +numbers between a hundred and a hundred and fifty people. He himself is +one of the best Indian shots in the West." + +"It's a pity they can't become citizens as well as other folks," +remarked Darry. + +"That's the whole trouble, lad. The United States didn't treat them +right in the first place, and we are bound to suffer in consequence. But +in the end the Injun will be wiped out completely." + +As night came on, countless stars shone in the sky, making the trail +fairly light. Old Benson rode in advance, with Darry next and Joe +bringing up the rear. + +Presently the old hunter drew rein, and motioned the others to do the +same. + +"Somebody ahead," he said in a low voice. "Four or five men on hossback. +If I aint mistaken they're Injuns, too." + +"Indians!" exclaimed Joe. "Do they come this way often?" + +"No, lad. Fact is, they haven't any right over here, so close to the +fort. It's against Colonel Fairfield's rules." + +"Then what can they be doing here?" + +"That's for us to find out." + +Old Benson led the way to a side trail, and then into the shelter of a +number of trees. + +He quickly passed the pelt over to Darry. + +"Both of you stay here until I get back," he said. "I'm going to find +out what those redskins are up to." + +"You won't be gone long, will you?" asked Joe. + +"Don't expect to be gone over an hour at the most. If I aint back in two +hours, make up your mind something has happened. Then you'll have to get +back to the fort the best way you can," concluded the old scout. + +A moment later the darkness of the night hid him from their view, and +they were left alone in the bit of timberland. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +A TRICK OF THE ENEMY. + + +"I must say I don't fancy this much," observed Joe, after the sounds of +Benson's departure had lost themselves in the distance. + +"Nor do I like it, Joe," came from Darry, with a long-drawn sigh. "But I +guess we'll have to make the best of it." + +"With what was on that message my brother found in the cave, and what +Benson said about this Indian chief, it looks as if the folks at the +fort might have trouble in the near future." + +"That's true, too. I hope Will got through in safety." + +Dismounting, the two boys sat down under the trees to wait in the +darkness. The horses were glad enough of the rest, and fell to cropping +the short grass which showed itself in spots in the vicinity. + +Thus half an hour passed. The silence was oppressive, broken only by the +occasional note of a night bird or the dismal croaking of a frog in some +hollow and the answering squeak of a lizard. + +"Somebody is coming!" cried Joe at last, and both of the boys stood on +the defensive, rifles in hand. The party came closer and closer, and at +last they made out the form of the old scout. He was riding at the top +of his speed. + +"Quick! follow me!" he exclaimed, as he dashed up. "There is not a +moment to lose!" + +The boys needed no second bidding, and in a trice they were in the +saddle once more and riding after old Benson, who now took to another +trail leading somewhat to the south of that formerly pursued. + +"You saw the Indians?" questioned Joe, as they dashed on. + +"I did. White Ox is ahead, with sixty or seventy of his best warriors. +From what I could learn he and Lieutenant Carrol have had a fight, and +half a dozen of the soldiers were either killed or wounded. Now White Ox +is marching for the fort." + +"To attack it?" + +"I can't say about that, but I think he is going to hide in the +vicinity, to wait for the coming of the desperadoes." + +"And what of my brother?" questioned Joe anxiously. "Did he get through +all right?" + +"Nothing was said about the captain, lad. I suppose he got through." + +It was hard to talk while riding at such a rate of speed, and soon the +conversation came to an end. The horses now showed plain evidence of +their long journey, but each rider kept his steed at his best. + +It was after two o'clock in the morning when the fort came into view, +dark and silent in the midst of the plain surrounding it. Benson now +rode in advance. + +"Halt!" came the sudden command, while the scout was still a hundred +yards from the stockade. The command was loud and clear, but the speaker +was invisible. + +"It's all right, friend," answered the old scout. "It's me, Sam Benson. +Let me in, quick, I've news for the colonel." + +"All right, Benson," was the answer. "But who is that behind you?" + +"Joe Moore and Darry Germain. Is the colonel sleeping?" + +"The colonel is very sick." + +"Sick?" + +"Yes." + +"What's the trouble?" + +"The surgeon can't make out exactly. He's in a sort of stupor, and they +can't rouse him." + +By this time the stockade gate was open, and all three of our friends +lost no time in entering the yard. Then the gate was closed and barred +again. + +"Has Captain Moore returned?" asked Joe, as soon as he could get the +guard's attention. + +"I haven't seen him." + +"How long have you been on duty?" + +"Came on about an hour ago." + +"Has Lieutenant Carrol come in?" came from Benson. + +"Not that I know of; reckon not," answered the guard. + +"Worse and worse!" groaned the old scout. "Who is in command here?" + +"Captain Lee. But he's about half sick, too." + +"It's a trick of the enemy!" cried Darry. + +"A trick?" queried the guard with interest. + +"Yes, a trick," put in Joe. "Benson, hadn't they better sound the +alarm?" + +"Yes, and I'll interview Captain Lee." + +No more was said, and, while the sentinel called the corporal of the +guard, the old scout hurried off to find the captain in command. With +him went Joe and Darry. Joe's heart was like a lump of lead, for he was +much concerned over the non-appearance of his brother. Had the captain +met the Indians and been killed or taken prisoner? + +Captain Lee was in a sound sleep, but quickly roused up when told that +an important message awaited him. He met the party in one of the living +rooms of the fort. His head was tied up in a wet towel, and his eyes +showed that he was suffering. + +"This is certainly a deep-laid plot," he said, when all had told their +story. "The desperadoes and Indians intend to combine in an attack on +the fort. Mose is undoubtedly that wily old half-breed who is still +alive and who is very thick with White Ox. But I didn't know he could +write." + +"But what about this money at the fort?" asked Joe. + +"The money is here, in a chest that is hidden away. It amounts to forty +thousand dollars in gold, and is the property of the Nevell Mining +Company. It was left for safe-keeping until Mr. Nevell could have it +transported to Denver. You see, Nevell is a brother-in-law to Colonel +Fairfield." + +"The colonel must be drugged," said Benson. "That's the reason he acts +so queerly." + +"I suppose so, and that is what has affected me, I presume," answered +Captain Lee. "Last night my head ached as if it would split open. We +must tell the surgeon of this. Perhaps he can then do something to +relieve Colonel Fairfield." + +The captain lost no time in issuing the necessary orders, and in a few +minutes the whole place was in alarm and the soldiers were on the watch +for the first appearance of the Indians. + +"My poor husband drugged!" cried Mrs. Fairfield, when she heard the +news. "What villains those Indians and desperadoes are! Doctor, can you +do nothing?" + +"I think I can, madam," answered the surgeon. "Much depends upon what +drugs were administered and how much the colonel has taken. Rest assured +I will do my best for him." + +Upon examination it was found that out of all the officers at the fort +only four were fit for duty, all the others being sick, either through +being drugged or otherwise. Of the privates not more than sixty-five +were in a condition to fight should an attack come. + +"And the worst of it is, the men won't know what to eat or drink after +this," said Captain Lee to Benson. "Who can tell what has been drugged? +Perhaps it's in the very bread we eat and the water we drink." + +Strict orders were given to the men to touch nothing until the surgeon +had passed upon it. Then the doctor got out his medicines to counteract +the drugs, and set to work to bring the colonel and the other sufferers +out of their stupor. + +Hour after hour went slowly by, and still Captain Moore did not return. +What had become of his brother, Joe could not imagine. He feared the +worst, and when morning came it was all he could do to keep back the +tears. + +"Don't take it so to heart, Joe," said Darry sympathetically. "It may be +all right." + +"But he said he was going to ride straight here--you heard him, Darry." + +"So I did, but he may have seen the Indians or met Lieutenant Carrol, +and that might have changed his plans. Anyway, I wouldn't worry too much +just yet." + +With the coming of daylight Captain Lee brought out his long-distance +glass and swept the surroundings of the fort with extreme care. + +"Some camp-fires are burning to the northward," he announced. + +"Any Injuns?" questioned old Benson laconically. He had been told to +come along to the top of the fort for consultation. + +"Nobody in sight, Benson." + +"Humph! Well, I don't calculate they are far off." + +"Nor I, from what you and the boys told me. How long will it take those +desperadoes to reach here?" + +"They ought to arrive this morning, if they are not with the Injuns +already." + +"All told, we have about seventy officers and men available for duty," +went on the captain thoughtfully. "What is worse, they must know how +greatly our garrison is reduced, since they have had that skunk of a +Mose do the drugging for them." + +"The Injuns number over sixty, and if there are thirty desperadoes, that +will give them a force of almost a hundred, or twice as many as we have, +captain. But then, we hold the fort. They can't come anywhere near us +without being cut down--if we set out to do it." + +"Of course. But White Ox may send off for more Indians--when he hears +how small the available garrison is." + +"Does he know much of affairs here?" + +"I am afraid he does. There were two Indians here yesterday, to lodge a +complaint against a miner who had stolen a horse from them. I think, +now, that the complaint was a blind, and the Indians were here merely to +size up the situation," concluded Captain Lee. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY. + + +Little dreaming of all the adventures in store for him, Captain Moore +left the scene of the buffalo shooting and rode forth swiftly in the +direction of Fort Carson. + +He felt that he carried news of great importance and the sooner he +gained the fort the better. Should anything happen to Colonel Fairfield +the command of the post would fall upon himself, as next in rank. + +As he dashed along the trail, over hill and valley, he reviewed the +situation with care, and the more he thought of it, the more worried did +he become. + +"Something is going to happen--I can feel it in the air," he muttered. + +The thought had scarcely crossed his mind when something did happen, but +not exactly what he anticipated. + +A shadow fell across his path, and as he drew rein he found himself +confronted by several Indians. + +"White officer, stop!" cried the leader of the red men sternly. + +"Hullo! what do you want?" demanded the captain. The meeting was a +complete surprise. + +"Want to have a talk." + +"Who are you?" + +"Me Red Wolf, belong to White Ox tribe," returned the Indian with a +scowl. + +"And what are you doing out here at this time of night, Red Wolf?" + +"Indians on a big hunt. See buffalo yesterday." + +"Yes, I saw one of the buffaloes myself." Captain Moore paused, not +knowing how to go on. "You are pretty close to the fort." + +"Red Wolf and warriors get on the wrong trail," was the slow reply. "But +want to talk now. Come along." + +As the Indian concluded he caught the captain's steed by the bridle. + +"Let go the horse." + +"Want to talk to white officer." + +"You haven't any right to touch my horse." + +Hardly had the words been spoken when two Indians rushed up behind the +captain and dragged him to the ground. + +The fellows were large and powerful, and they disarmed him before he +could even fire a shot. + +Without further ado Captain Moore was forced to march along, between two +of the red men, while a third led his horse. + +A route around the rocks was taken, and presently they came to a dense +bit of timberland. In the midst of this was a clearing, and here was the +camp of some ten or a dozen Indians. + +The Indians at hand were a guard over several white soldiers, and to his +intense surprise the young captain recognized some of Lieutenant +Carrol's men. + +"What are you doing here?" he asked. + +"Had a mix-up and came off second best----" began one of the soldiers, +when an Indian guard clapped a dirty hand over his mouth and ordered him +to be silent, under penalty of death. + +Then the captain was taken to another part of the glade, and here he was +made a close prisoner by being bound, hands and feet, to the trunk of a +blasted tree. + +Red Wolf wished to know what the captain had been doing away from the +fort. + +"I've been on a hunting expedition." + +"Alone?" + +"No." + +"Where are the others?" + +"Safe, by this time. What do you intend to do with me, Red Wolf?" + +"White Ox shall decide that," grunted the red man. + +"Then he is on this hunt, too?" + +"He is." + +"When will he be here?" + +"Soon." + +"Don't you know that I am an army officer, and that you are laying up a +good deal of trouble for yourself by making me a prisoner?" + +"The white man has not treated the Indians right." + +"This is no way to redress wrongs, Red Wolf. Why don't you go to Colonel +Fairfield and make a complaint? He will send the story to the Great +Father at Washington." + +"The Great Father will not listen. We have sent many complaints--as the +white captain knows." + +"He will listen--if the complaint is a just one. The trouble is, the +Indians will not obey Colonel Fairfield's orders." + +"And why should they obey the white man? Is not White Ox their chief?" + +"That is true. But the land is now the white man's, and the Indians must +obey the Great Father at Washington, or in the end it will go hard with +them." + +"Not so!" cried Red Wolf savagely. "In the end the white man will be +driven eastward, where he belongs. No one shall rule in these mountains +but the red man. White Ox and the other great chiefs have spoken." + +"What! you are going on the warpath?" + +"The hatchet may be dug up, if the white man will not listen to the red +man." + +"I know what the trouble is, Red Wolf. Matt Gilroy and that scoundrelly +half-breed, Mose, have set you up to this. They have filled your ears +with false stories about our cruelty and about much money at the fort." + +By the look on the Indian's face the young officer saw that he had +struck the truth, at least in part. + +But the red man would talk no more, fearing he had already said too +much, and he stalked off, warning a guard to be careful and not let the +captain escape. + +When left to himself, Captain Moore's reflections were very bitter. + +"If the redskins are out in force they'll probably fall in with Benson +and the boys," he told himself. "And if they do there will surely be +trouble. Benson won't allow them to take him alive, and that will mean a +good deal of shooting all around." + +He listened attentively for shots in the distance, but none came, and +this caused him to be more perplexed than ever. + +Just before daybreak several additional Indians came in, and the young +officer and the soldiers were told to march. Their feet were unfastened, +but their hands were not, and they were forced to move with the red men +on all sides of them, and each of the enemy fully armed and ready to +shoot them down at the first show of resistance or escape. + +From one of the privates Captain Moore learned that Lieutenant Carrol +and the other soldiers had escaped, but what had become of them nobody +knew. + +The little body of whites and Indians marched over a mountain trail for +fully four hours. The step was a lively one, and when the party came to +a halt even the soldiers used to a hard march were tired out. + +"Those redskins can walk the legs off of anything I know of," was the +way one old soldier expressed himself. "They are like some of these wiry +mustangs who don't know the meaning of rest." + +"This region is strange to me, Peck. Do you recognize it?" + +"I do, Captain Moore. Yonder is Henebeck Fall, and this trail leads to +Silver Gulch." + +"Then we are about six miles from nowhere in particular." + +"You've struck it, captain. Why they brought us to such a forsaken spot +is more than I can guess--unless they are going to shoot us down like +dogs and leave us for the wolves to feed on. The wolves are thick around +here, so Leeson told me." + +"I don't believe they'll shoot us down. They are not desperate enough +yet. But they may do it, if they attack the fort and lose heavily. That +will open their eyes, and make them as mad as hornets." + +A little later Silver Gulch, a wide opening in the rocks of the +mountain, was gained, and here the soldiers were again made fast to +several trees. Then the Indians prepared their midday meal. They took +their time about eating, and did not offer the white men anything until +they had finished. + +"They don't intend to treat us any too good," was Peck's comment. +"Captain, can't we fix it to get away?" + +"I intend to escape if I can manage it," returned the young officer. +"But we must be careful, for they are fully armed, and they watch us +like so many foxes." + +Slowly the afternoon wore away, and with the coming of night it grew +darker than usual, as though a storm was brewing. + +"A storm ought to help us," said the captain. + +Some of the Indians had departed, so that now the guard consisted of but +four warriors. These red men walked around each prisoner, seeing to it +that all the bonds were tight. + +As the men passed Peck the old soldier watched his chance, and, unknown +to the red men, caught a hunting-knife from the belt of one of the +number. + +This knife was concealed up his sleeve, and then the soldier waited for +his chance to use the blade, which was as sharp as a razor. + +The Indians decided that two of their number should sleep, while the +other two remained on guard. Soon those to retire turned in, while the +others sat down to smoke their pipes. + +This was Peck's opportunity, and with a slash of the hunting-knife he +released his hands. A moment later the lariat around his ankles was +likewise severed. + +Watching his chance, Peck passed the knife to Captain Moore, and then +went back to his position by the tree as if still fastened. + +Thus the knife was passed from soldier to soldier until all were +liberated. + +All told, the party numbered six, and nobody was armed, excepting Peck, +to whom the hunting-knife had been returned. + +Motioning to the others to keep quiet, Captain Moore picked up a stick +of wood lying near and threw it in some bushes a distance away. + +This made considerable noise, and instantly the two guards gazed in the +direction. + +"A wolf, perhaps," said one of the Indians, in his native tongue, and +walked over to the bushes. His companion started to follow, when Captain +Moore leaped upon him and bore him to the earth. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +A PANTHER IN CAMP. + + +As Captain Moore fell upon one of the Indians, Peck the private stole +after the guard who had walked toward the bushes. The other soldiers +jumped to where the remaining Indians were sleeping, to gain possession +of the firearms. + +The Indian the captain had tackled was a young but powerful brave, and +he put up a hard fight to release himself. But he had been taken +unawares, and after he was on the ground the captain saw to it that he +did not get up. + +In the meantime the Indian near the bushes turned just in time to see +Peck raise the hunting-knife. Crack! went the red man's rifle, and the +bullet clipped the soldier's ear. The shot was so close that to the day +of his death Peck carried in his face some traces of the burnt powder. + +The shot was the last the Indian ever fired, for in the midst of the +smoke Peck hurled himself at the warrior, and a second later down came +the hunting-knife, piercing the red man's back and entering his right +lung. The stroke was a fatal one, and before the fighting in the glade +came to an end the Indian had breathed his last. + +When the sleeping Indians awoke they could not for the moment realize +what was going on. In his bewilderment one leaped up and rushed at a +soldier, who promptly laid him low by a heavy blow from a rifle stock, +which almost cracked the warrior's skull. Seeing this, the other brave +became frightened and ran for the bushes. + +"Don't let him escape!" cried Captain Moore, who was still holding his +man down. + +At once two of the soldiers ran after the fleeing Indian, and presently +two rifle shots rang out, followed by a scream from the red man. + +"He's done for," said one of the soldiers, after the smoke had cleared +away. "He has gone to his happy hunting-ground." + +After this turn of affairs it did not take the soldiers long to make +prisoners of the two Indians who remained alive. These fellows were in +truth much frightened, but tried their best to suppress their feelings. + +From one of the Indians, Captain Moore learned that more Indians were +expected early the next morning. + +"That's all right," said he. "They will come in time to release you and +save you from starvation." + +"Going to tie 'em up, captain?" asked Peck. + +"Yes. There is nothing else to do." + +"Better shoot 'em." + +"I can't shoot them in cold blood, Peck. That would not be human." + +"The wretches don't deserve to live, captain. The Indians and those +desperadoes are plotting to wipe out everybody left at the fort." + +"I know that. Still, I cannot bring myself to take their lives--and we +can't stop to take them along as prisoners. The sooner we get back to +the fort the better." + +"If we can get back," put in another soldier. + +"I don't believe the fort is surrounded just yet," returned the young +officer. + +"But if it is?" + +"Then, perhaps, it will be better for us to be out than in." + +"You wouldn't desert the crowd at the fort, would you?" + +"You know me better than that, Gorman. We might be able to ride to the +next fort and obtain re-enforcements." + +"That's so, captain! I didn't think of that." + +Leaving the dead Indians in the bushes and the others tied to the trees, +the captain and his companions now lost no time in striking out for the +fort. + +Fortunately, Peck was well acquainted with every foot of the territory +to be covered, and he led the way by a route which was fairly easy and +as direct as could be expected, considering the wild region to be +covered. + +As he hurried along, the young captain's thoughts were busy. Where were +Joe, Darry, and Benson, and how were things going at the fort? + +"The Indians are not so much to be blamed as the desperadoes," he said. +"They have some wrongs, although they are more fancied than real. But +the desperadoes ought all to be either shot down or placed under +arrest." + +"Right you are," returned Gorman. "This district will never prosper +until the desperadoes are cleaned out." + +It was not long before the party began to grow hungry, and they had to +halt for an hour, to prepare some birds which one of the number had +brought down with a gun. + +All the time they were eating, one of the soldiers remained on guard, +for they were fearful a band of Indians might come up unawares to +surprise them. But not a red man or desperado showed himself. + +Nightfall found them still sixteen miles from the fort, and unable to +walk further. + +"We will camp out where we are," said Captain Moore. "It is useless to +think of covering the distance in the dark. Besides, we might fall into +some trap." + +A storm had been threatening, but now the clouds passed and the night +proved clear and pleasant. It was decided that two men should remain on +guard at a time, each taking a turn of three hours. + +The young captain slept from nine o'clock until three in the morning. +Then he awoke with the feeling that further sleep was out of the +question. Getting up, he walked to a nearby brook, intending to wash up +and obtain a needed drink. + +While Captain Moore was in the vicinity of the brook something stirring +in the bushes attracted his attention. + +"Carwell, did you see that?" he asked, of the guard who was nearest to +him. + +"See what, captain?" + +"That thing in yonder bushes." + +"I see nothing, sir." + +"Something is moving there. Come here and look." + +The private did as commanded, and both gazed steadily into the bushes. + +"By Jove!" exclaimed the young officer at length, "Do you see what it is +now, Carwell?" + +"I do not, captain." + +"It's a panther, unless I am greatly mistaken." + +"Where?" + +"Lying on the fallen tree, behind that tall bush," and Captain Moore +pointed with his hand. + +As he did this the panther arose suddenly, then crouched down as if to +make a leap at them. + +"Shoot!" ordered the captain, and as quickly as the private could raise +his rifle he fired. But his aim was poor, and the bullet flew a foot +over the panther's head. + +"Missed, hang the luck!" muttered Carwell. + +Scarcely had the words left his lips, when the panther made a fierce +leap and landed directly at the feet of the astonished pair. The beast +was evidently very hungry, or it would not have attacked human beings in +this semi-light of the early dawn. + +Full of fear, Carwell staggered back, with his smoking rifle still in +his hand. + +The panther growled and switched its tail from side to side. The rifle +shot had filled it with wonder, and it did not know what to do next. + +"Be careful--he is going to take another leap!" cried the young captain. + +He was right; the panther was now preparing for another spring. Before +Carwell could get out of the way, the beast came on, pinning the +private to the earth. + +As Carwell went down the whole camp roused up, and the second guard came +up on the double quick. + +"What's up, captain?" he sang out. + +"Shoot the panther!" answered the young officer. "Quick, or you'll be +too late. Don't hit Carwell." + +Crack! the rifle spoke up, and the beast was hit fairly and squarely in +the side. At this it let out a blood-curdling scream of pain. It had +caught Carwell by the arm, but now it released its hold. + +"A panther!" roared one of the old soldiers. "And a big one. Git your +guns, boys! He aint no beast to fool with, I can tell you that!" + +Those who had guns ran for them. But in the meantime the panther turned +around, as if to retreat. + +Then, of a sudden, it seemed to catch sight of Captain Moore, and with a +snarl of rage it threw itself upon the young officer, and both went over +with a loud splash into the brook. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +THE SKIRMISH IN THE BRUSH. + + +Up to the time the panther had turned upon him, the young officer had +thought but little of his own safety, being concerned chiefly about +Carwell, who was flat on his back, and who looked as if he as going to +be chewed up by this wild, lean, and hungry beast of the forest. + +But now Captain Moore found himself attacked, and as he went over into +the brook he realized that he was in the most perilous position he had +yet encountered. Facing Indians and desperadoes was nothing compared to +facing this beast, that seemed bent upon his destruction. + +The spot where the young officer struck the brook was five or six feet +deep, and as the panther came down on top of him he went straight to the +bottom. + +The beast was also submerged, but not for long. Panthers, although they +can swim, do not like the water, and this one lost no time in coming to +the surface to get air. Then it let out another scream of pain, while +the bullet wound in its side dyed the brook red. + +As the panther came up the young captain tried to do the same. But the +first thing he encountered was the beast's fierce claws, and he received +a deep and painful scratch in his left shoulder. Then he went down +again, and tried to come up further down the stream. But unfortunately +the panther moved in the same direction. + +In the meantime the other soldiers came up to the edge of the brook. +They realized their captain's peril, and as soon as the panther showed +itself two of them blazed away, one hitting the beast in the back and +the other landing a bullet in the panther's neck. + +The fury of the animal was now intense, and whirling around it lashed +the water of the brook into a perfect foam. Then it leaped for the +opposite shore, and made a break for the underbrush. Before anybody +could fire again it was gone. + +When Captain Moore regained the surface of the brook willing hands +helped him out. + +"Hurt?" questioned Peck anxiously. + +"A little--on the shoulder," was the answer, with a gasp. "Where is the +beast?" + +"Got away in yonder bushes, sir. That's a nasty dig. You had better let +me bind it up." + +"Carwell, how are you?" + +"The beast nipped me in the arm," answered the private, trying to +suppress a groan. "By George, but he was an ugly one!" + +"That's right," put in another soldier. "You can be thankful you wasn't +chewed up." + +A brief search revealed the fact that the panther had left the vicinity, +and then the others set to work to bind up the wounds the captain and +Carwell had sustained. + +"We had better move on now," said the young officer, when the hurts had +been attended to. "If there are Indians or desperadoes around they must +certainly have heard those shots, and they will be wondering what they +mean." + +They marched on in the gloom, and did not halt until the sun was showing +itself over the hills to the eastward. They had now gained a rise of +ground from which with a field-glass the fort might have been seen. But +the young captain's glass was gone--confiscated, as already told, by +those who had first attacked him. + +"We will draw closer with caution," said the young officer. "We don't +want to walk into any trap." + +Less than a mile was covered, when Peck, who had been sent out in +advance, came back and called for silence. + +"Some Indians are ahead," he said. + +"How many of them?" questioned Captain Moore. + +"Not less than a dozen or fifteen, captain. I counted eleven, and heard +some talking that I couldn't see." + +"Where are they?" + +"Down behind where the brook flows over those sawtooth rocks. We were +out there fishing last summer." + +"I know the spot you mean. What are the redskins doing?" + +"Nothing in particular. I overheard one say to another that he expected +White Ox along before sundown." + +"They must be an advance guard of the tribe, then," returned the young +officer thoughtfully. "Did any of them see you?" + +"I don't think they did." + +But in this Peck was mistaken, for scarcely had the soldiers started to +walk around the spot where the Indians were encamped, when a savage +war-whoop rang out, followed by half a dozen shots. + +The first round was a deadly one, killing two of the men and wounding +Peck in the side. A bullet likewise grazed Captain Moore's shoulder. + +"To cover!" shouted the young officer, as soon as he could speak. "The +Indians are on us!" + +He had a gun in his hand, and as he gave the command he leveled it at +the leader of the party, he who had killed one of the soldiers. Captain +Moore's aim was true, and the Indian fell lifeless over the very body of +the man he had slain. + +By this time the other Indians were coming up, and all the soldiers +could do was to take to the nearest cover, as the captain had ordered. +The warwhoops continued, and shots were fired from several directions. + +Scarcely knowing whether he was hit or not, Captain Moore dashed into +the midst of some brushwood, and not far away from him came Peck. The +latter had broken his rifle over the head of one of the red men, and now +advanced with the hunting-knife which was still in his possession. The +young captain held a rifle, but just now had no time in which to reload +the weapon. + +"They are after us hot-like!" cried Peck, after several hundred feet had +been covered. + +The private's breath came short and sharp, and now for the first Captain +Moore saw how he was suffering. + +"You are wounded, Peck." + +"That's right, captain." + +"You can't run any more." + +"I've got to run," muttered Peck, between his set teeth. "They'll be +on--oh!--on us in another minute." + +"Give me your arm--I'll help you along." + +The private held out his hand, then gave a pitch, and, before the young +officer could catch him, sank on the grass insensible. + +Captain Moore's heart leaped into his throat, for he had known Peck for +years, and the two were very friendly. He listened, and heard a distant +shot. Evidently the Indians were not yet coming in that direction. They +would first hunt down the others, providing they were not already slain. + +Bending down, the young officer took Peck in his strong arms and threw +the private over his shoulder. The weight was considerable, and made him +stagger. + +"I've got to carry him, somehow!" he muttered. "Heaven give me strength +to do it!" + +The brushwood was thick ahead, but there was a sort of trail, made by +wild animals, and he pursued this until he came to a brook. Then to keep +the Indians from following them, should they come in that direction, he +followed the brook for a hundred yards or more. At last he reached a +point where the banks of the brook were rocky, and here he came out, and +crawled over the rocks. Not far off was an opening between two large +bowlders, and here he sank down, too exhausted to take another step. + +It was half an hour before Peck came to his senses. In the meantime the +captain had obtained some water, washed the private's wound and bound it +up in bandages torn from his shirt. The loss of blood had made Peck +light-headed. + +"Keep them off!" he murmured. "Keep them off! They want to bore a hole +in my side. Keep them off!" + +"Be quiet, Peck, you are safe," answered the young captain soothingly. +"You've been wounded, that's the trouble," but the private continued to +rave for some time, when he relaxed into a stupor. + +With strained ears Captain Moore waited for the appearance of friends or +enemies, but nobody came up the brook. Once he heard two shots far to +the northward, but whether fired by the soldiers or the Indians he could +not tell. + +"I'm afraid it's been a regular slaughter," he mused sadly. "And our +getting away was a miracle," and this surmise proved correct, for, as +was afterward proven, all the others of the party were slain within an +hour after the surprise occurred. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +A LUCKY MEETING. + + +"Captain, where am I?" + +"In the woods with me, Peck." + +"What has happened?" + +"Don't you remember? The Indians surprised us, and you were shot in the +side." + +The brow of the wounded soldier contracted for a moment, and then he +drew a long and painful breath. + +"Ah, yes, I remember now. Are we alone?" + +"Yes." + +"And what of the others, captain?" + +"I am afraid they have either been shot down or taken prisoners. Poor +Carwell and Leeds I know are dead." + +"It was a nasty surprise, wasn't it? I was sure they hadn't seen me." + +"Those Indians are sly, Peck. They never let on until they are fully +ready. We can be thankful that we escaped." + +"How long have we been here?" + +"The best part of the day. I carried you along the brook and to here, +and I haven't dared to go any further. Those Indians can't be far off." + +"It was good of you to do that for me, captain," said the private +gratefully. + +"I know you would have done as much for me, Peck. What I am worried +about is what we are to do next." + +"Perhaps you had better wait till dark, and then sneak to the fort." + +"How do you feel?" + +"Weak, captain, weak as a rag." + +"I shan't leave you, Peck." + +"But you ought to try to save yourself." + +"We can both try to do that, when you are stronger." + +Slowly the day wore along until night was once more on the pair. Peck +had tried to stand up, but the effort had proved a dismal failure. + +"It's no use," he murmured. "I reckon I'm a fit subject for the +hospital," and he gave a sickly grin. + +The night was one Captain Moore never forgot. He was hungry, but there +was nothing at hand with which to satisfy the cravings of the inner man. +Peck's mind began to ramble again, and once he struggled violently, +thinking he was fighting with an Indian, who was trying to tear out his +side. + +With the coming of dawn the young officer felt that matters were growing +desperate and that he must do something. He determined to go on a short +exploring tour, leaving the soldier where he lay. + +"I'll be back inside of half an hour," he said. "Make yourself as +comfortable as possible while I am gone." + +"Don't desert me!" groaned Peck. "Promise to come back, +captain--promise!" he pleaded, and the young officer promised. + +On the opposite side of the brook was a series of rocks leading to the +top of rather a high hill, and Captain Moore had an idea that from this +eminence he could obtain a faint view of the fort and its surroundings. + +Half of the rocks were passed when he came to a sudden halt. A low groan +ahead had reached his ears. As he stopped and listened the groan was +repeated. + +"That sounds familiar," he thought. "I've heard that before. But where?" + +At last he made up his mind that the sounds came from some wild animal +that was wounded, and plucking up courage he moved forward again, but +with his rifle before him, ready to shoot at the slightest provocation. + +"The panther--and dying!" + +The young officer was right. There on a shelf of rocks lay the wounded +beast, its breath coming short and heavy, and its eyes letting out a +glassy stare that caused the captain to shiver in spite of himself. + +At the sight of a human being the panther tried to rise. But the effort +was too much for it, and it sank down, groaning with pain, in a pool of +blood which had formed. + +At first Captain Moore thought to finish by putting a bullet through its +head, but then he remembered that ammunition was scarce and lowered his +rifle. + +"He'll be dead by the time I get back," he thought, and continued on his +way up the mountain side. + +At last the top was gained, and he looked around eagerly. At first only +the plain far below met his view, but presently he made out a spot which +he knew must be the fort. But all was in a blue haze, and no details +could be distinguished. + +Having spent quarter of an hour on the mountain top he picked his way +back to where he had left the panther. The creature had now breathed its +last, and lay stiffened out on the rocky ledge. + +"I must have something to eat, and so must Peck," he said to himself. +"Panther steaks may be tough, but they will be better than nothing. +I'll go back for the hunting-knife and cut off as much meat as we'll be +likely to need for a couple of days." + +When he reached Peck's side he found the soldier sleeping quietly, and +did not disturb him. Going back, he cut off a generous slice of the +panther meat, leaving the rest to the wild beasts. + +The captain hated to build a fire, fearing it would attract the +attention of the enemy, but he did not wish to eat the meat raw, and +presently, having no matches, shot his gun into the midst of some dry +leaves. By this means he soon had a blaze, which he fed with the driest +wood he could find, thus avoiding a great cloud of smoke. Over the blaze +he cooked the steak, which was soon done to a turn. + +When Peck awoke he felt stronger, and readily partook of the meal +brought to him, washing down the meat with some water from the brook. + +"What do you calculate to do now, captain?" he asked. + +"From the top of yonder hill I can see the fort in the distance," +answered the young officer. "But how to get to it is a question. It +would be a hard enough journey as it is, without having to be on guard +against Indians and desperadoes." + +"Better leave me here, and go it alone." + +"No, I shan't desert you, Peck. We'll see the thing through together." + +"But the Indians might come down on us." + +"We've got to run that risk. The question is, can you walk at all?" + +For reply Peck got up on his feet. At first he swayed around a little, +but presently steadied himself. + +"I'm good for a little distance, captain, but I don't reckon to go into +any walking match just yet." + +"Then we'll go ahead. As soon as you feel played out, don't hesitate to +say so." + +Captain Moore carried the rifle, hunting-knife, and what was left of the +meat, and also insisted upon having the private lean on his arm. In this +fashion two miles were covered by noon, when they came to a rest under +the shade of a big tree. Peck was pale, and showed plainly that the +exertion had done him no good. + +"Hardest walking I ever did," he admitted, as he stretched himself at +full length. It was his will-power alone that had kept him up. + +"Well, we are gaining," said Captain Moore cheerfully. "Three miles more +will see us through." + +"If the enemy don't gobble us in the meantime." + +"The Indians are nowhere in sight." + +"They won't be showing themselves if they can help it. They spring on +us----Hark!" + +Peck broke off short, and both listened. + +"Somebody is coming this way!" whispered the young officer. "Come, we +must get out of sight!" + +He took the wounded soldier by the hand, and with all speed the pair +crept into some brushwood behind the big tree. In the meantime the +foot-steps of the unknown party came closer. + +As the man came into view, Captain Moore let out a shout which was full +of joy. + +"Hank Leeson! How glad I am to see you!" + +The old hunter started around and drew up his gun. Then the weapon +dropped, and he ran forward. + +"Captain Moore!" he ejaculated. "Hang me ef I aint glad to set eyes on +ye! Who is that with you?" + +"Private Peck of Company B. We've had a fight with the Indians, and a +number of the soldiers were killed." + +"The Injuns are on the warpath, along with the desperadoes under Matt +Gilroy," returned Leeson. "I got the word from Sam Benson early this +mornin'." + +"And where was Benson?" + +"Out among the hills, a-lookin' fer you." + +"And what of my brother, and my cousin? Have you heard anything of +them?" + +"They are safe at the fort." + +"Thank Heaven for that!" + +"I see ye'er both of ye wounded," went on Leeson, as he came closer. + +"My wound is not much. But Peck's is bad. I hardly knew how I was going +to get him to the fort. Are the Indians or desperadoes around?" + +"They are, captain--but whar is jest now the conundrum. Captain +Lee--he's in command now--thinks there's a big plot on foot ter wipe out +the fort." + +"He is right. But Colonel Fairfield--what of him? Did they drug him?" + +"They did, captain. But it's queer you know of all this." + +"Then Joe didn't tell you I was with him at the cave?" + +"I didn't have time to hear the whole story. Benson was coming out, and +I came with him. Now, as you're found, I reckon I had better go back +with you," went on Hank Leeson. + +"By all means, for we'll have to take turns in supporting Peck." + +A few minutes later the march for the fort was taken up. It was a +tedious journey, and there were times when the young captain felt as if +it would never come to an end. But at last they came within sight of the +stockade and the big flag floating so proudly to the breeze, and then +several came rushing out to meet them, and their hard-ships, for the +time being, came to an end. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +THE ENEMIES WITHIN THE FORT. + + +"Oh, I'm so glad to see you again, Will!" was the greeting which Joe +gave his brother. "We were almost certain either the Indians or +desperadoes had fallen upon you and killed you." + +"Well, we did have some hot work," answered the young captain modestly. +"Are you all right?" + +"I am." + +"And you, Darry?" + +"I'm first-class," answered the cousin. "But I can tell you, Will, there +is trouble ahead." + +"I know that, Darry. I must see Colonel Fairfield at once." + +"He is very ill. The surgeon can do hardly anything for him. He says he +has not the right drugs to reach such a dose as the colonel has +swallowed." + +"That's too bad." + +By this time Captain Lee was at hand, and the two officers exchanged +reports. Nothing had been heard concerning Lieutenant Carrol. The +command of the fort now fell upon Captain Moore. + +As soon as possible the young commander went in to see his superior. He +found Colonel Fairfield very weak and in no condition to talk upon +military matters. He took the young captain's hand, and said feebly: + +"You must do your best, captain, do your best. Defend the place to the +last." + +"I will, Colonel Fairfield," answered the young officer. "And I trust +you recover soon." + +That day and the next passed without incident of a special nature. Sick +and wounded were cared for by the surgeon, and a detachment went out, +accompanied by Sam Benson and Hank Leeson, to look for any of the +soldiers who had been attacked by the Indians or desperadoes and who +might still be alive. + +When this party returned they brought in the bodies of two soldiers that +had fallen. + +"The Indians are gathering in force," said old Benson, who had been +right among them in the darkness. "There are now over a hundred and +twenty of them." + +"And what of the desperadoes?" asked Captain Moore. + +"The desperadoes number twenty-six," answered Hank Leeson. "I counted +noses myself. Matt Gilroy is a reg'lar captain over 'em an' has 'em +drilled like a company o' sharpshooters--an' I reckon thet's wot they +are, consarn 'em!" + +"Then the enemy, all told, numbers about a hundred and fifty," mused the +young captain. + +"How many men here fit for duty to-day, captain?" came from the old +scout. + +"Not over forty, including the cooks and stable help, Benson. All the +others are on the sick list--and some of them are pretty bad." + +"Perhaps the crowd outside are a-waitin' till ye all git sick," +suggested Leeson with a scowl. "'Taint fair fightin', is it? They ought +all to be hung!" + +"I must do my best," said Captain Moore gravely. "I can do no more." + +As the day wore along and two additional soldiers were taken sick, he +decided to send a messenger to Fort Prescott, a hundred and sixty miles +away, for assistance. + +Hank Leeson knew every foot of the territory, and was chosen for the +mission. Benson was more than willing to go, but Captain Moore told him +to remain where he was. + +"If the enemy attack us you'll have to be our right-hand man, Benson," +he said. Then he added: "I want to talk to you after Leeson is gone." + +Since coming to the fort Captain Moore had been watching two old +soldiers very closely. + +These soldiers were named Moses Bicker and Jack Drossdell. Their +reputations were not of the best, and the black marks against them were +numerous. + +Some time before, the young captain had heard that Bicker came of a +family of Colorado desperadoes and that he had joined the army during a +spasm of reformation. + +The actions of the pair did not suit Captain Moore in the least, and +that night he took it upon himself to watch them more closely than ever. + +In the darkness he saw Bicker make his way to the stable, and to that +spot, a little later, Drossdell followed. + +"Something is in the wind, and I'm going to find out what it is," he +mused, and watching his opportunity he passed into the stable +unobserved. + +At first he could hear nothing but the movements of the horses, but +presently came a low murmur from one corner of the loft. + +Cautiously the young officer climbed the ladder and stepped into the +hay. + +Here he could hear the conversation between Bicker and Drossdell quite +plainly. + +"They never suspected the butter," he heard Bicker say. "It tastes a +little strong, but they would rather have it that way than have none, +and the same way with the condensed milk." + +"When shall we give the signal to the boys?" came from Drossdell. + +"Not yet. There will be more of them sick by to-morrow night," replied +Bicker. + +More of the same sort of talk followed, until the young captain became +fully convinced that Bicker and Drossdell were in league with the +desperadoes, and that they had been using some drugs in the butter, +milk, and other articles consumed at the fort, in order to make the +soldiers sick. + +As soon as he realized the importance of his discovery Captain Moore +went below. + +A corporal's guard was called out and sent over to the stable, and when +Bicker and Drossdell came below they were placed under arrest. + +"What's this for?" demanded Bicker, putting on a bold front. Drossdell +had nothing to say, and trembled so he could scarcely stand. + +"You know well enough, Bicker," answered Captain Moore sternly. + +"No, I don't. I haven't done anything wrong, captain." + +"March them to the guardhouse," was all the young commander said, and +the two were promptly marched away. + +As may be surmised, the moment the evildoers were alone each accused the +other of having done something to bring on exposure. + +Captain Moore knew his men well, and presently he sent for Drossdell and +interviewed the soldier in private. + +"I am sorry to see you in such trouble as this, Drossdell," he said. "I +thought you were a better soldier." + +"I haven't done anything, captain." + +"It is useless for you to deny it. Do you know what my men would do to +you and Bicker if they learned the truth? They would rebel and hang you +on the spot--and you would deserve it, too." + +"Oh, captain, for the love of Heaven, don't put us in the hands of the +boys!" pleaded Drossdell, turning a ghostly white. + +"You and Bicker plotted to get us all sick and then let the Indians and +Gilroy's gang in on us." + +"I--I----" + +"It is useless for you to deny it, for I heard your talk myself, and saw +a letter written by Bicker to Gilroy." + +"Bicker formed the plans!" cried Drossdell, breaking down completely. +"He--he forced me to help him." + +"Forced you?" + +"Yes, captain, forced me. I stood out a long while, but he--he----Well, +I might as well make a clean breast of it, sir. He had me in his power, +on account of something I did in Denver years ago. He said he would +expose me if I didn't help him." + +"This is the strict truth?" + +"Yes, captain, and I will swear to it if you want me to," answered the +prisoner. + +"You were going to signal the gang when all was in readiness for an +attack," went on Captain Moore. + +"Bicker was going to do that." + +"What was the signal to be?" + +"Three white handkerchiefs stuck on the ends of a cross made of sticks +six feet long. He was going to show these at ten in the morning or four +in the afternoon, from the southwest corner of the stockade, behind the +mess hall." + +"And what was the signal to be if you wanted the enemy to hold off for a +while?" + +"A red shirt if he wanted them to hold off for one day and a red and a +blue shirt if they were to hold off for two days." + +"You are certain about these signals? Remember, if you are telling a lie +it will all come back on your own head." + +"I am telling the strict truth," answered Drossdell. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +SIGNALS AND WHAT FOLLOWED. + + +The interview over, Captain Moore lost no time in summoning Hank Leeson. + +"You must depart for Fort Prescott without delay," he said. + +"I'm ready now, captain," replied the old hunter. + +"You must ride night and day till you get there." + +"I'll do thet too." + +"I have received important news. At the longest our enemies will hold +off two days. I will try to make them hold off a day longer if I can. +That will give you three days. I will write a letter to Major Hardie at +once." + +This was early in the morning, and inside of half an hour the letter was +written and the old hunter was off, on the back of the freshest and most +enduring horse the fort possessed. He went fully armed, for he knew that +he carried his life in his hands. + +As soon as Leeson had gone the young captain summoned the surgeon and +told that individual about the drugged butter and condensed milk. + +Dr. Nestor was incredulous, but on an examination said that all were +drugged. A cat that had drunk of the diluted condensed milk was found in +a stupor from which she could not be aroused. + +"It's awful," said the surgeon. + +A trustworthy cook was called in, and all the butter and condensed milk +which were open, or which showed signs of having been tampered with, +were thrown away. + +This put the soldiers on short rations so far as these commodities went, +but nobody complained. Some suspected Bicker and Drossdell, and there +was talk of a demand on the captain to have the traitors shot, but it +came to nothing. + +"What does this mean?" asked Joe, when he caught his brother in a quiet +spot. + +In a few words the young captain explained. + +"You and Darry must say nothing," he concluded. "We will have our hands +full as it is. The Indians are in this, but the drugging was not done by +Mose the half-breed." + +"When will you signal to the enemy?" asked Darry. + +"This afternoon at four. That will give us at least two whole days--and +a lot may happen in that time." + +"If only the surgeon can bring some of the men out of their stupor," +remarked Joe. + +"He hopes to do so--now he knows more about the drugs used against +them." + +"If you hadn't caught Bicker and Drossdell what do you suppose would +have happened?" questioned Darry. + +"More than likely every one of us would have been sick," answered the +young captain with a shudder. "Then the Indians and the desperadoes +could have walked in here without a struggle." + +"Even if help does not come, you'll fight them, won't you, Will?" + +"To be sure--to the bitter end." + +"By the way, are you certain the ammunition hasn't been tampered with?" +came from Joe. + +"I was thinking of that and was going to have an examination made when +you stopped me," said Captain Moore, and hurried on. + +An examination showed that some of the powder on the place had been +hidden. Drossdell said this was under the barn flooring, and his words +proved true. + +Promptly at four o'clock Captain Moore appeared at the southwest corner +of the stockade with a red shirt in one hand and a blue shirt in the +other. + +Fortunately he was built like Bicker, and donning a private's hat and +coat made him look a good deal like that individual from a distance. + +Slowly he waved the coats to and fro for five minutes. + +Then an answering signal came back from some brushwood on the top of a +distant hill--the answer being similar to the signal itself, showing the +message was seen and understood. + +It is likely that the Indians and desperadoes were much chagrined to +think that they would have to hold off for two days, but if so they made +no sign. + +The next day proved unusually warm. There was nothing for the boys to do +in the fort, and they wandered around from place to place. At drill but +thirty-eight soldiers presented themselves, all the others being on the +sick list. + +"I must say I don't feel very well myself," remarked Darry. "I can +hardly keep my eyes open." + +"Gracious! don't say that you're going to get sick too!" cried Joe. + +"I won't get sick if I can help it," replied Darry. "But I feel awfully +queer." + +Joe did what he could for his cousin. But, with the limited means at +hand, this was not much, and by sundown Darry was flat on his back, +although the attack he sustained was not as severe as that of many +around him. + +"I feel as if I was in something of a dream," he told Joe. "That drug +must have opium in it." + +"It's something like opium--I heard the surgeon say so," answered his +cousin. + +At night a strict watch was kept, and twice old Benson went out to +reconnoiter. + +"The Indians and desperadoes have surrounded us on all sides," he +announced. "But it don't look as if they meant to attack us just yet." + +With the coming of morning it began to rain, but this cleared away by +noon, and then the sun boiled down as fiercely as ever. The sunny spots +within the stockade were suffocating, and the boys were glad enough to +stay within the cool walls of the stone fort. + +As far as he was able Captain Moore had prepared the place to resist an +attack. A weak spot in the stockade was strengthened and the cannon of +the fort were put in the best possible condition. The soldiers were told +where to go in case of a sudden alarm, and were cautioned not to waste +any ammunition, for the supply was limited. + +Thanks to the surgeon's efforts Colonel Fairfield was now somewhat +better. Yet he was too weak by far to get up or to manage affairs, so +the command still remained in Captain Moore's hands. Even Captain Lee +was now down, and it was a question whether he would live or die. + +"You must do your best, Captain Moore," said the colonel feebly. "I know +I can trust you. You are brave, and your training has been a judicious +one." + +Early that night there came a sudden alarm, followed by two rifle shots +in quick succession. At once there was a commotion, and everybody sprang +to his post. + +"The Indians and desperadoes must be coming!" cried Joe, and ran for the +rifle with which he had been armed. + +The cause of the alarm, however, was not from without, but from within. +Bicker had forced his way out of the guardhouse, and at the risk of +breaking his neck had climbed to the roof of the barn and leaped over +the stockade into the ditch outside. + +A guard had seen the leap and had fired on the man, hitting him, it was +thought, in the shoulder. Then a second guard had discharged his weapon, +but by this time the fleeing prisoner had been swallowed up in the +gathering darkness. + +"He must not get away!" cried the young captain. "If he does, they will +attack us at once. After him, Benson, and you, too, Forshew and +Donaldson. I will follow with some horses!" + +Without delay the old scout climbed the stockade and scrambled over the +ditch. The others ran around to the gate, and soon several additional +soldiers followed. On second thought Captain Moore sent the horses out +by a lieutenant, thinking it best that he remain where he was, that +being primarily his post of duty. + +"Can we go?" asked Joe. + +"No, Joe, stay where you are," said his brother. "If that rascal gets to +his friends there will be work enough here, never fear." + +The pursuit of Bicker lasted for over an hour, and brought on a smart +skirmish between the men from the fort and the desperadoes, in which one +person on each side was slightly wounded. But the rascal managed to gain +the enemy's camp in safety, and then those from the fort came back as +fast as possible to report. + +"Now the deception is up," said Captain Moore, with a serious look. "I +wouldn't be surprised to see them attack us before morning." + +"Right you are, captain," replied old Benson, "and my opinion is, that +the desperadoes and Indians will fight hard, when once they get going," +he concluded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +THE DEMANDS OF THE ENEMY. + + +It was an hour later, when the excitement had cooled down a little, that +Captain Moore sent for Benson again. Wondering what was to follow, the +old scout hurried to the room in which the young commander was +transacting his business. + +"I want a little talk with you in private, Benson," said the young +officer. + +"Yes, captain." + +"I know you've been wondering why I didn't send you to Fort Prescott +instead of sending Hank Leeson." + +"You had a right to do as you pleased, captain." + +"The truth of the matter is, Benson, I wanted you here. You brought Joe +and Darry to the fort, and those two boys need looking after. We are +going to have a fight, sooner or later. We may win, and if we do, all +right. But if we don't----" + +"You want me to stand by the boys to the last?" put in the old scout +quickly. + +"I do, Benson; and, no matter what comes, I want you to promise to do +your level best to save them, and see them safe back to the East. If the +worst comes I am willing to die fighting, but Joe must get out of it +somehow. If he doesn't it will break my mother's heart. And you must do +as well by Darry, for he is an only child." + +The eyes of the old scout and the young captain met. Then Benson put out +his hand, which Captain Moore quickly grasped. + +"I understand, captain. I'll do my best, and if those lads don't get +away it will be because Sam Benson aint alive to take 'em." + +"As you are not a soldier you have a right to leave the fort as quickly +as you please," went on the young captain. "Therefore, if you see the +tide of battle turning against us, don't wait, but get the boys away as +speedily and as secretly as you can." + +"I will, captain; but yourself----" + +"Never mind me. Get the boys to a place of safety, and I know our family +and Darry's family will reward you well." + +"I won't want any reward. I took to the lads from the start, and I'll +stand by 'em through thick and thin," said old Benson. + +There was but little sleeping done in the fort that night. The majority +of the soldiers slept on their arms, expecting an alarm at any moment. +Yet it did not come, and the sun rose on a scene of perfect peace and +quiet. + +But at eight o'clock a sentinel announced a horseman approaching, +bearing a white flag. + +"So they want to talk, eh?" said the young captain. "All right, anything +to gain time." + +The flag of truce was promptly answered, and as the horseman came closer +many recognized Matt Gilroy. The young captain went out himself to meet +the leader of the desperadoes. + +"Good-morning, Captain Moore," began the desperado, with a regular +military salute. + +"What brings you?" demanded the captain abruptly. + +"Well, I thought we had best come to terms--that's what brought me." + +"Terms about what, Gilroy?" + +"Terms about surrendering the fort and all of its contents." + +"Surrendering? To whom?" + +"You know well enough, Captain Moore. It will be only a waste of time to +beat about the bush. Our crowd and the Indians now number over three +hundred, and we are bound to get possession of the fort and all that is +in it." + +"Do you speak for the Indians as well as for yourself?" + +"I do." + +"So far as I know the Indians are not on the warpath, Gilroy. I must +have a talk with one of their chiefs before I do anything." + +"You know they are on the warpath. Didn't you have a mix-up with them?" + +"There are always some Indians who are ugly and willing to make +trouble." + +"Well, all the Indians are standing in with us on this deal," went on +Gilroy, his face darkening. "And you have got to surrender or take the +consequences." + +"What will the consequences be?" + +"If you won't surrender we'll attack the fort immediately. We know just +how weak you are, and let me tell you that we have a dozen or more +dynamite bombs on hand with which we can blow the fort sky-high if we +wish." + +"What good will it do you to capture the fort?" + +"We know all about the money that is stored here, and we want every +dollar of it." + +"And if we surrender?" + +"If you surrender you will be allowed to march from the place +unmolested, taking all of your sick with you, or leaving them here, in +care of a doctor, if you prefer. If you know where your head is level +you will surrender," went on the desperado earnestly. + +"But if I am compelled to surrender, don't you know that our army will +be after you, Gilroy?" + +"Never mind, we'll take care of that part of it," was the answer, with a +sickly grin. "Then you agree to surrender?" + +"I can't do it until I have spoken with one of the leading Indian +chiefs." + +At this the desperado's face fell. + +"Will White Ox do?" he asked, after an awkward pause. + +"Yes." + +"All right; I'll bring him along in about half an hour." + +This ended the interview, and turning his horse Matt Gilroy rode off and +Captain Moore walked back to the fort. + +"A little time gained, at least," was the young officer's comment. + +It was fully an hour before Gilroy reappeared, accompanied by White Ox +and an under-chief known as Little Wildcat. + +"Want to talk," grunted White Ox, coming to a halt at a safe distance. + +"Have you dug up the hatchet, White Ox?" demanded the captain. "If not, +let us smoke the pipe of peace together." + +"The pipe of peace is broken," answered the old Indian. "The white man +is not the red man's friend. He makes promises only to break them. The +Indian must fight for what is his own." + +"Do you consider this fort your own?" + +"The land is the red man's--the white man has stolen it from him. The +white man must go and leave the red man to his own." + +"If you want the white man to go why don't you drive Gilroy and his gang +away too?" + +"They have promised to leave--after they have had their share of what is +here." + +"Oh, so that's the bargain!" + +"You see how matters stand, Captain Moore," broke in the leader of the +desperadoes. "If you know when you are well off, you'll submit as +gracefully as possible." + +"If we leave will you promise to let all go in peace," went on the young +captain to the Indian chief, "you will not molest the women or any of +the young people?" + +"Yes, all the women and young people can go," said White Ox, but the +look in his face was not one to be trusted. + +"And if we refuse when do you expect to attack us?" + +"At once." + +The reply came from Matt Gilroy, and White Ox nodded in the affirmative. + +"I must consult Colonel Fairfield first," said the captain slowly, +wondering how he was to gain more time. + +"I thought you were in command," remarked Gilroy. + +"I was--but the colonel is getting better. Meet me here in another hour, +and I will give you his reply and my own." + +This did not suit Gilroy and White Ox, but the captain was firm, and at +last they went off, promising to be back exactly at the end of the hour. + +"And then it must be surrender or fight," said the leader of the +desperadoes sharply. "No more dilly-dallying." + +It must be confessed that Captain Moore returned to the fort in a +thoughtful mood. He had an awful responsibility upon his shoulders. He +called several of the other officers in consultation. + +"For myself, I believe in fighting," he said. "But we must consider +those who are sick and must consider the women." + +"The colonel's wife wishes us to fight to the end," replied another +officer. "She is not willing to trust White Ox or any of the other +redskins." + +"I don't believe in surrendering," put in another. "Let us see if we +can't hold off until we hear from Leeson and Fort Prescott." + +And so it was arranged. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +OPENING OF THE BATTLE. + + +Promptly on the minute Gilroy and White Ox appeared again, with the +white flag of truce flying between them. + +This time Captain Moore took with him one of his lieutenants, Bacon by +name. + +The interview was shorter than the captain had anticipated. + +"Well, is it surrender or not?" asked Matt Gilroy. + +"We must have more time," answered Captain Moore. "Cannot you wait until +to-morrow morning?" + +"Not another minute," was the angry reply. "Is it surrender or not? +Answer yes or no." + +"We will not surrender--at least not yet," came from the young captain +firmly. + +"Then your time is up, and we shall attack at once," returned the leader +of the desperadoes. "Am I not right, White Ox?" + +"You have spoken truly," came from the Indian chief. "Soon the blood of +the white soldiers will flow freely." + +Without another word White Ox galloped away, and Matt Gilroy went after +him. + +"We are up against a battle now!" exclaimed Lieutenant Bacon. + +"I have done my best to delay the contest--I can do no more," said +Captain Moore. + +When he returned inside of the stockade he was immediately surrounded. + +"Boys, we must fight," he said in a loud, clear voice. "They will wait +no longer. But re-enforcements must be on the way by this time. Can I +depend upon your standing by me?" + +"Yes! yes!" was the cry. + +"We know how to do our duty to Uncle Sam and the flag!" + +"Let the desperadoes and the Indians come on! We'll give them as hot a +reception as they ever got!" + +While the soldiers were taking their way to the several defenses of the +fort there was the beating of Indian drums at a distance, followed by +the blowing of a bugle in the camp of the desperadoes. + +Soon the beating and blowing came from half a dozen directions. + +"They are gathering, sure enough!" exclaimed Joe. "I wonder how long it +will be before they fire the first shot?" + +"They'll not be rash--be sure of that," answered Darry. "They must know +that the fort is a strong place." + +A little later one of the guards announced that bodies of Indians were +marching from the south of the fort to the westward. + +Here there was a fringe of trees at a distance of not over a hundred +yards from the stockade. + +Colonel Fairfield had often thought to have the belt of timberland cut +down, but had never put the plan into execution. + +"They mean to get as close as possible before they expose themselves," +said the captain. "Dilberry, have the four-pounder trained on that +spot." + +"I will, Captain Moore," said the head gunner, and saluted. + +Quarter of an hour went by, and the drumming and bugle calling had +ceased. + +Suddenly a shout went up from behind the belt of timberland, and a small +cannon spoke up, sending a shell into the ditch outside the stockade. + +"Hullo, they have a cannon after all," thought Captain Moore. He called +Dilberry to him. "Can you get the range of that piece?" he asked. + +"I can try, sir." + +"Then do it, and if you can disable the piece so much the better." + +At once the head gunner ran off and sighted one of the cannon of the +fort with care. + +A few seconds later the cannon spoke up with a report that rang in the +boys' ears for long after. The ball sped straight into the timberland +and cut down a heavy sapling growing beside the piece the enemy were +reloading. One desperado was killed instantly and another badly injured. + +"A fair shot!" said the young captain. "Try it again," but before +Dilberry could do so the cannon was withdrawn from sight. + +After this came another lull, as if desperadoes and Indians were +considering what to do next. + +"It's a wonder they don't make a rush," said Joe, "if they have so many +in their command." + +"Nobody cares to risk an advance in the open, Joe," said old Benson. +"More than likely they won't try to do much until dark." + +Again the Indian drums were rolling, coupled with shrill warwhoops. + +Then, with a wild yelling and a brandishing of rifles, about a hundred +and fifty red men burst from cover and ran toward the stockade. + +"They are coming!" was the cry. + +"Stand firm, men, don't waste your ammunition!" Captain Moore cried. He +turned to the gunner. "Let them have it, Dilberry!" + +Bang! the cannon boomed out again, and the shot tore through the +advancing horde of Indians, laying four of them low. + +Then came a volley from the red men, followed by the discharge of the +piece in the hands of the desperadoes. The splinters flew in several +directions around the stockade and one soldier was seriously wounded. +The cannon ball grazed the flagstaff, and presently it was seen to +totter. + +"Look out!" roared old Benson to Joe, and as he spoke down came the +Stars and Stripes on the heads of Joe and Darry, and a section of the +flagstaff with it. + +"The flag is down!" A score of voices took up the cry, and a yell of +triumph came from the Indians and desperadoes. + +"It's not going to remain down!" cried old Benson, and began to climb +what remained of the pole. He carried the halyard with him, and soon, +with the aid of the two boys, he had the glorious Stars and Stripes once +more in position. + +In the meantime the soldiers under Captain Moore were busy. The Indians +were now at the ditch, and one had advanced as far as the stockade +itself. They were yelling like demons, and now the desperadoes began to +show themselves, confident that the fort would soon be taken. + +"They haven't got a corporal's guard to defend it!" cried Matt Gilroy. +"Nearly everyone of those inside is sick. Come on!" + +The noise was now deafening, for soldiers and Indians were discharging +their weapons as rapidly as possible. The red men had brought with them +a long board, to which cross-pieces were nailed. This board was now set +slantingly against the stockade, and a dozen warriors rushed upon it. + +"Down with them!" shouted Captain Moore. "Heave the plank off!" + +A dozen soldiers started to do his bidding. The first that showed +himself was shot down, and the second shared a similar fate. But others +were more successful, and into the ditch went the board with a loud +splash, carrying the Indians with it. + +The soldiers set up a shout of triumph, and as the red men fell back +those who could gain a point of vantage fired on the enemy. By this +movement three Indians were left in the ditch dead and several others +were wounded. A desperado was also brought down. Those that were +uninjured lost no time in seeking cover; and thus the first advance on +the fort came to an end. + +All told, the attack had lasted nearly an hour, and when it was over it +was found that everybody was hot, dry, and dusty. But, fortunately, +water was to be had in plenty, and a drink refreshed all. The dead and +wounded were carried away, and the latter were made as comfortable as +the limited means of the fort afforded. + +"They won't come back in a hurry," said the young captain. "The Indians +have had their eyes opened." + +"How soon can those re-enforcements come, Will?" asked Joe. + +"I don't think they can get here before to-morrow noon, if as soon. +They'll have a long journey before them, and a body of several hundred +soldiers can't travel as fast as a single person." + +"Of course they'll be cavalry," put in Darry. + +"I hope so--if the cavalry was at Fort Prescott when Leeson got there." + +Colonel Fairfield was much disturbed by the shooting, and he insisted +upon sitting up and hearing the particulars. + +"Good!" he murmured. "Keep them off another twenty-four hours and we +shall be saved," and then he went off in another stupor. + +All was now as quiet as if not an enemy was within a mile of the fort. +But the soldiers remained on guard, and this vigilance was increased as +the sun went down in the west. + +"This night will tell the tale," was old Benson's comment. "Boys, it's +do or die, and don't you forget it!" + +Whether or not the old scout was right we shall soon see. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +SIGNALS IN THE DARK. + + +"Joe, I've got a scheme to outwit the desperadoes and Indians, and I've +a good mind to propose it to Will." + +It was Darry who spoke, as he and Joe were eating an early supper that +night, in one corner of the messroom. + +"If the scheme is good for anything let Will have it by all means," +answered his cousin. "Heaven knows we need all the help we can get!" + +"My scheme is this," went on Darry. "Those Indians and the desperadoes +must know something of our sending off for re-enforcements. Now why +can't Will send out old Benson and a few others, to steal off for +several miles and light camp-fires, blow bugles, and all that, to make +the enemy think the re-enforcements are close at hand?" + +Joe clapped his hands. "That's a grand scheme!" he cried. "Let's speak +to Will about it at once." + +The supper was soon finished, and they sought out the young captain, who +was dividing up his force for guard duty during the night. + +"I was thinking of such a scheme myself," he said, when he had heard +them. "And old Benson suggested it, too. Perhaps I'll do it." + +"If old Benson goes can't I go with him?" asked Joe quickly. + +"And let me go too," put in Darry. "You won't miss us as much as you +would miss two of your regulars." + +At this the young captain grew grave. "Old Benson said he would like to +take you along. Perhaps it would be best, too." He paused. "You see, +they may fall on the fort to-night and wipe us out completely." + +"Oh, Will, do you really believe that?" + +"They will certainly attack us, and the men fit for duty number but +thirty-four. Thirty-four against several hundred is not much of a force, +even in a fort." + +The matter was talked over for half an hour, and old Benson was called +in for consultation. In the end it was decided that the old scout should +head a party consisting of two regulars and the two boys, who were to +carry a drum and a bugle and a good supply of matches for bonfires. + +"If you can pass them without being seen, head straight for Conner's +Hill," said Captain Moore. "Blow the bugle there, and beat the drum, and +then move over to Decker's Falls and light your first camp-fire. After +that you'll have to do what you think is best." + +"I understand, captain," answered the old scout. "And trust me to fool +'em nicely, if the trick can be done at all." + +"It is not going to be an extra-dark night," went on the young officer. +"So you will have your own troubles in getting away from the fort +without being seen." + +"I know a route," answered old Benson. "Trust me for it." But just then +he would say no more. + +The men to go along were named Cass and Bernstein. Cass was a good +drummer and bugler, and Bernstein was noted for his good sight and the +accuracy of his aim. All of the party went fully armed, and took with +them rations for two days. + +"Good-by, Joe," said the captain affectionately, and he took his brother +by the hand. "I hope you pull through in safety." + +"And I hope you do too, Will," answered Joe, and his lip quivered as he +spoke. Perhaps this would be the last time he would see his brother +alive. Never before had the situation appeared so serious as now. Darry +also received an affectionate farewell. + +In absolute silence old Benson led his little party to a far corner of +the stockade, where there was a small gate, fastened with a strong log +bar. This gate was opened just far enough for them to slip through, and +then closed again. Their mission had begun. There was no telling how it +would end. + +Slipping into the ditch, the old scout told the others to lie low, while +he and Bernstein surveyed the situation. It was silent, and from +overhead only a few stars twinkled down upon them. + +Old Benson presently pointed with his bony hand. + +"Clear that way, aint it?" he whispered. + +"Looks so," answered Bernstein, after a searching look lasting several +minutes. "I wouldn't go too close to that patch of underbrush, though." + +The party began crawling along the ditch, until they came to a little +gully which the last heavy rains had formed. Here they progressed on +hands and knees until they reached some low brushwood. Then old Benson, +still crouching close to the ground, set off on a lope, and the others +came after him in Indian file. + +If they had been discovered, neither Indians nor desperadoes gave any +sign, and inside of ten minutes the fort was left out of sight, and +they were standing in a hollow fringed with berry bushes. The boys were +somewhat out of breath, and old Benson gave them a short spell in which +to get back their wind. + +"We were right, they are none of 'em in this vicinity," said the old +scout. "Getting away was easier than I expected." + +"It was no easy matter with the drum," came from Cass. "I came pretty +close to falling and smashing it once." + +The course now led up a small hill and then across a valley to another +hill, a distance of nearly three miles. The trail was by no means +straight and the walking was bad, and Joe and Darry had all they could +do to keep up with the others. + +At the last minute Captain Moore had given the boys half a dozen +rockets, and explained how the fireworks were to be set off. Everything +they could do to puzzle the enemy was to be done. + +At last they gained the top of Conner's Hill--so called because Major +Conner fell there while battling with some stage-robbers early in the +seventies. + +Bringing around his bugle, Cass blew a long blast and then a regular +military call, which echoed and re-echoed throughout the mountains. +This was followed by a long roll on the drum, and then another call on +the bugle. + +After this all waited impatiently, gazing in the direction of the fort, +which was, of course, hidden in the darkness. + +"There they go!" cried Joe, and as he spoke two rockets flared up, dying +out almost instantly. + +The boys had planted two of the fireworks given them, and now these were +touched off and went hissing skyward, leaving a trail of sparks behind. +Two minutes later a single rocket went up from the fort. + +"That's the last," observed old Benson. + +"I'll wager that will set the Indians and the desperadoes to thinking," +said Cass. + +"They'll think some more when they see a camp-fire over Decker's Falls," +put in Bernstein. "They'll imagine that they are being surrounded." + +"Don't be too sure," came from the old scout. "White Ox is no fool. He +has been through too much fighting. If we can only make him hold off a +bit that's as much as we can expect. You can bet he'll have spies up +here in less than an hour from now." + +The march was now for Decker's Falls, a distance three miles to the +westward. Again they advanced in Indian file, Bernstein now leading and +old Benson bringing up the rear. + +A mile had been covered, when the regular in front called a halt. + +"A small camp is ahead," he said. "There, through the trees." + +Without delay old Benson went forward to investigate. + +He found three desperadoes talking earnestly among themselves, while +warming some coffee over a small fire. + +Listening to their talk he learned that they had been out on the trails +leading to Fort Prescott, and had come in with the news that no +re-enforcements for Fort Carson were within forty miles of the latter +place. + +"Gilroy and White Ox will be glad to hear our news," said one of the +crowd. "They've been afraid all along Colonel Fairfield had sent out for +aid." + +Not stopping to hear anything further, old Benson crawled back to the +place where he had left the others. + +"We must capture those men, dead or alive," he said. "If they carry +their news to the enemy there will be another attack on the fort within +an hour." + +Leaving the drum, bugle, and remaining rockets in a safe place, our +friends advanced until all could see the three desperadoes quite +plainly. + +One of the fellows was unknown to Joe, but the others were Gus Fetter +and Nat Potts. + +The desperadoes had placed their rifles against a tree, and old Benson +motioned to the boys to secure the weapons. + +As Joe grabbed up two of the firearms and Darry the third, the +desperadoes leaped to their feet in alarm. + +"Hands up!" sang out old Benson. "Hands up, or you are all dead men!" + +The scout's rifle was raised, and so were the weapons of Cass and +Bernstein, and the desperadoes found themselves at a disadvantage. + +Yet Fetter was game, and he quickly reached for a pistol hanging in his +belt. + +But the movement, quick as it was, was not quick enough for Bernstein, +and as the regular's rifle rang out Fetter fell headlong across the +camp-fire. + +"Do you surrender?" asked old Benson. + +"Yes," came from Potts, sulkily, and his companion said the same. In the +meantime Fetter had rolled from the camp-fire and was breathing his last +at Potts' feet. + +The sight was a thrilling one, and caused Joe and Darry to shudder. + +"Can't I do something for that poor wretch?" asked Joe, of Benson, but +before the old scout could answer Fetter breathed his last. + +In a few minutes more Potts was made a close prisoner. + +While he was being tied up, the third man made a quick leap into the +woods. + +"After him!" cried Benson, and Cass and Bernstein did as commanded. Soon +the desperado and the two regulars were out of sight and hearing. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +BURNING OF THE STOCKADE. + + +"What will you do with him?" asked Joe of Benson, as he pointed to Nat +Potts. + +"Don't be hard on me," pleaded Potts. "I meant you no harm." + +"You ought to be hung," grunted the old scout. "You aint fit to live and +you know it, Potts. You could make an honest living if you wanted to, +but you would rather cheat and steal." + +"It was Matt Gilroy who got me into this," answered Potts. "He----" + +"Don't put it off on to somebody else, Potts!" cried the old scout +wrathfully. "If you aint got backbone enough to be honest, it's your own +fault." + +"Will you let me go, if I promise to leave this Territory?" asked Potts +eagerly. + +"No, sirree!" was Benson's answer. "You shall suffer the full extent of +the law, and don't you forget it!" + +While waiting for the return of Cass and Bernstein, the old scout +searched Potts and the dead body of Fetter, taking away all their +weapons and some papers which Potts carried. + +These papers showed how deep-laid was the plot which the desperadoes had +formed to gain possession of the money stored at Fort Carson, and how +they had duped the Indians under White Ox and other chiefs to assist +them. + +At last Cass and Bernstein came back, all out of breath with running. + +"Did he get away?" questioned Benson quickly. + +"He did and he didn't," answered Cass. "He ran up Cedar Cliff, and +seeing we were after him he tried to jump to the other side of the +canyon. But he missed his footing in the dark, and went down, and that's +the last we seen or heard of him." + +"And that's the last anybody will see or hear of him," answered the old +scout. "That canyon is three hundred feet deep, and nothing but sharp +rocks, sides and bottom. He's done for." + +The march onward was now resumed, the old scout forcing Potts to walk +between himself and the boys, with his hands tied tightly behind him. + +"If you make any noise it will cost you your life," said Benson to the +prisoner, and thereupon Potts became perfectly mute. To tell the truth +the desperado was thoroughly downcast, and his face was filled with +despair. + +They calculated that it was two o'clock in the morning when the heights +above Decker's Falls was gained, a wild spot, from which old Benson had +often viewed the fort, miles below, in the valley. + +The driest possible brush was gathered, and on this were heaped several +good-sized limbs, that the fire might burn an hour or two. Quarter of a +mile away another similar fire was kindled, and at this spot the boys +set off all but one of their remaining rockets. + +"There is the answer from the fort!" said Joe, as two rockets flared up +in the dim distance. "Anyway, Will knows we have gotten this far." + +"But he doesn't know of the adventure we have had on the way," said +Darry. + +As soon as the fires were well under way old Benson began to lead the +way down the mountain side toward a stretch of timber running within +half a mile of the fort. + +While they were in the midst of the forest a distant firing broke upon +their ears. + +"Is that from the fort?" asked Joe quickly. + +"Reckon it is, lad," replied the old scout. + +"Then our signals haven't done any good." + +"Perhaps they have. But it may be that others have been out spying, and +they have brought in the same report that Potts and his crowd were +carrying." + +As they advanced the firing died away for half an hour, but then it was +renewed with vigor. + +Coming to another hilltop, they could see the flashes, of fire as the +rifles and cannon were discharged. + +The Indians and desperadoes had approached Fort Carson in the darkness, +hoping to catch those inside napping. + +But the regulars had opened the firing, and two Indians were killed at +the very outset. + +The red men had brought forward a large quantity of brush, and at the +risk of their lives they heaped this against the wooden stockade. + +When Joe and the others who were with him gained the plains surrounding +the stronghold they saw that the brush was burning at a lively rate. + +"They are firing the fort!" cried Darry. "Heaven have mercy on those +inside!" + +"I see nothing of Indians or desperadoes," said Joe. "Where have they +gone, Benson?" + +"Reckon they didn't like those last signals," answered the old scout. + +From a distance they watched the burning of the brush with interest. +Here and there they saw the stockade take fire, and then saw a blaze on +the stable within the fort yard. + +"The fire has reached inside!" groaned Joe. "The place is doomed!" + +"Come on! There is no use of our staying here longer!" cried Benson, and +led the way across the plain, now lit up by the conflagration beyond. He +forced Potts with him. + +Suddenly several shots rang out, and Joe felt a bullet graze his hand. +Then he saw Cass pitch forward on his face, and heard Potts give a yell +of mortal agony. + +"Poor Cass, he's a goner!" muttered Bernstein. "And the desperado is +dead, too." + +No more was said, for all felt they must run as never before, if they +would save themselves. Soon the gully was reached, and they dropped to +shelter. But no more shots followed, and in a few minutes more they were +close to the burning stockade. + +"Friends!" shouted Benson, to a guard. "Don't shoot! Come out here and +put out the fire!" + +"Is that you?" came from Captain Moore, in the semi-darkness. "Are Joe +and Darry safe?" + +"Yes," came from the boys. + +There was no time to say more, for already the soldiers were forming a +bucket brigade, carrying water with which to put out the flames. Some +had long poles with hooks, and with these they dragged a large part of +the burning brush into the ditch. + +All this while some of the regulars remained on guard, and occasionally +a shot rang out, answered by another from a great distance. + +"They have surely withdrawn," said the young captain. "Benson, the trick +worked after all." + +"That's right, captain. But it won't work many hours, you can depend +upon that." + +"If it only makes them hold off until morning I shall be satisfied," +concluded Captain Moore. + +By the exertion of the soldiers the fire was kept from communicating +with any of the buildings but the stable, and of this structure only a +corner of the roof suffered. But the stockade was greatly damaged, and +by the time the last spark was out it was seen that it had sustained +three openings each eight to twelve feet long. + +"We'll have to repair these," said Captain Moore; and, tired though the +workers were, he made them haul fresh timbers from the woodpile and also +tear up part of the barn floor, that the stockade might present a whole +front to the enemy once more. + +The fighting had greatly agitated the women in the fort, and nobody had +slept for two nights. Yet even now, with the fire out and silence +brooding everywhere, nobody thought of going to bed. All felt that this +was but the lull before the greater storm. + +If only the relief would come! Such was the thought of everyone but +Drossdell, who still remained in the guardhouse, heavily chained, hands +and feet. Drossdell was deeply downcast, and with good reason. + +At last came the welcome signs of dawn in the east, and then a few of +the soldiers, who could stand the strain no longer, threw themselves +down to sleep. The others, pale and haggard, sat around in little groups +wondering what was going to happen next. To each was served extra-strong +coffee and the best rations the fort afforded. + +"It cannot last much longer," said Captain Moore, trying to cheer them +up. "Relief must come sooner or later." + +He had now but a pitiful twenty-eight men left, including old Benson and +Joe and Darry. Twenty-eight! What could such a number do against the +attack of two or three hundred desperadoes and Indians? The situation +was certainly one to make the stoutest heart quail. + +"It was too bad you came out here on a vacation," said the captain +sadly, to his brother and his cousin. "Perhaps you'll never see home +again." + +"Oh, Will, do you really think it's so bad?" came from Darry. + +"It is hard to tell what I think, Darry. I know we are in a mighty tight +box." + +"Let us hope for the best," said Joe. "Leeson must be doing something." + +"If he wasn't caught and shot down, Joe." + +"That is true," and now Joe gave a long sigh that meant a good deal. + +"There is but one thing in our favor now, this daylight. But if no +relief reaches us by sundown----" The captain did not finish, but shook +his head. + +A moment later one of the guards called down that he could see some +Indians to the northwest of the fort. + +A glass was brought into play, and by this a party of seventy-five red +men could be made out marching directly for the fort. Behind the red men +came a dozen or fifteen whites. + +Hardly had this discovery been made when another body of Indians and +whites were seen marching upon the fort from the south. + +"We are to suffer a double attack now!" was Captain Moore's comment. +"Heaven help us and bring us through it in safety!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +RELIEF AT LAST--CONCLUSION. + + +The attack did not come until half an hour later, and during the time of +waiting the nerves of the boys were strained to the utmost. The +seriousness of the situation was depicted upon the faces of all the +soldiers, who felt that the coming contest must decide whether or not +the fort was to stand. + +The firing began on the part of the Indians and desperadoes, who +advanced upon the stronghold from four points of the compass at once. +The enemy had learned the folly of massing their force, and Indians and +whites came on in a wide open skirmish line. + +The soldiers within the stockade fired upon the advancing foe as best +they could. Yet by the time red men and desperadoes were within reach of +the stockade only three of the foe had fallen. + +As before, some of the Indians carried a board with strips nailed across +it for steps, and the desperadoes had a similar contrivance. The two +boards were placed at opposite ends of the stockade, and, while some of +the enemy began to mount them, others came rushing on with a tree trunk, +which they used as a battering-ram against the stockade gate. + +The noise was now terrific, as rifle and cannon shot sounded out, +mingled with the warwhoops of the Indians and the groans and shrieks of +the wounded and dying. + +As for Joe and Darry, the first shock over, each felt as if he was in a +dream--as if this terrible sight presented to their gaze could not be +true. They shot off their rifles mechanically, yet when it was all over +Joe remembered how he had sent one redskin tumbling back into the ditch, +and Darry could tell of a desperado who had dropped his gun because of a +shot through the shoulder. + +"Fight to the last, men!" shouted Captain Moore, as he discharged his +pistol at the leader of the desperadoes. Gilroy had hit him in the +forearm, but the young officer's aim was still more true, and Matt +Gilroy went down never to rise again. + +In the meanwhile old Benson was having a terrific hand-to-hand encounter +with White Ox. Each had fired a shot at the other, and now they closed +in, the Indian chief with his hunting-knife and the old scout with his +clubbed rifle. + +The struggle was as short as it was thrilling. Benson made a pass which +the Indian chief dodged. Then White Ox plunged his knife toward the old +scout's heart, but a quick turn made it catch in Benson's hunting-shirt. +Down came the rifle butt a second time, and the blow, catching White Ox +on the neck, forced him to his knees. Even then he struck at Benson's +legs, but the old scout leaped over his head. Then down came the rifle +butt once more, and the Indian chief gave a groan which was his last. + +Fully sixty Indians and a score of desperadoes were now within the +stockade, and it looked as if all was lost to our friends. A part of the +regulars were fighting at the entrance to the stable, but the majority +were gathered around Captain Moore at the entrance to the officers' +quarters. Behind these were the ladies of the fort and the officers who +were sick. + +"Perhaps we had better surrender," said Colonel Fairfield, when told by +his wife of the condition of affairs. "If we don't----" He could not +finish. + +"Kill the white soldiers!" was the cry from the Indians. "White Ox has +fallen! They must all die! Spare nobody!" + +Captain Moore was now fighting as never before. Beside him stood old +Benson, and not far away were Joe and Darry. Each of the number was +wounded, and hardly any of the regulars were better off. Ammunition was +running low. Still the horrible din continued, and the dust and smoke +were blinding. + +But now, hark, what was that? From a distance sounded out a bugle call. +Then came a shot, followed by another, and then a regular volley. +Captain Moore started, and his eyes lit with pleasure. + +"The relief!" he shouted. "The relief from Fort Prescott! Boys, we are +saved!" + +"Hurrah, the relief!" was the shout which made the fort ring from end to +end. "The relief! We are saved!" + +"Give it to the reds and to the desperadoes!" came from old Benson. +"Teach 'em the lesson so they won't forget it! Don't let a skunk of 'em +escape!" + +Nearer and nearer came the shots from without, and a bugle continued to +blow calls to a detachment still further away. Then up to the fort rode +a troop of dashing cavalry from Fort Prescott, Hank Leeson beside them, +and every horse covered with foam. Crack! crack! crack! spoke up the +firearms of the newcomers, and Indians and desperadoes fell in all +directions. + +"We must retreat!" shouted one of the desperadoes. "The game is up!" + +"Retreat! retreat!" came from the others; and the red men took up the +cry. Soon the enemy were pouring from the fort grounds even more rapidly +than they had entered. + +There was only a pitiful handful that could follow them, the young +captain, Benson, and nine regulars. But there was no need for even that +number, for the blood of the cavalry was up and every desperado and red +man received one or more shots the instant he appeared. Soon the enemy +were flying in all directions. But the cavalry went after them, and in +the end all but four desperadoes and thirty-six Indians were killed, the +others being forced to surrender. + +It was rather a silent party that gathered in and around the fort that +night. Victory had come to our friends, but the cost had been a heavy +one, and the hospital ward of the fort was filled to over-flowing. + +Hank Leeson came in for many a warm hand-shake, and was made to tell his +story over and over again. + +"It was a close shave," said the old hunter. "Twice I got in a close box +with the redskins an' I had to shoot one of 'em down afore I could git +away. Thet's wot kept me so long. I'm glad we wasn't an hour later, fer +then mebbe we'd 'a' been too late." + +All of the principal desperadoes were dead and the same can be said of +the Indians. Among the slain was found the body of Bicker, and, if the +truth must be told, nobody mourned his loss. + +"He is responsible for a great deal of this suffering," said Captain +Moore. "Had he lived it is likely he would have been court-martialed and +shot." + +Both of the boys had been slightly wounded, yet each felt happy when the +fighting was over and they were assured that from henceforth they would +be safe to come and go as they pleased. + +"It was like a regular campaign," said Darry. "Joe, we have become +soldiers after all!" + +"That's so, Darry," replied Joe. "We can call ourselves, after this, the +boys of the fort!" + + * * * * * + +A few words more, and we will bring this story of fort life in the Great +Northwest to a close. + +Two weeks after the events just narrated Joe and Darry returned to their +homes. Here they were received with open arms by their parents, who had +heard all manner of ugly reports and who half expected to see them +coming back wounded and crippled for life. But the lads soon proved that +they were not so bad off as that, and inside of a few months both were +as well as ever. + +At the fort an active campaign was started under Captain Moore and the +commander of the cavalry, and this resulted in the rounding up of six +more desperadoes and thirty Indians. Lieutenant Carrol and four regulars +were found as prisoners of the Indians and were released. + +The desperadoes were turned over to the civil courts, and were dealt +with severely, two being hung and the others being imprisoned for years. + +Drossdell was court-martialed, and after a long trial was sentenced to +imprisonment in a military prison for ten years. He served six years, +after which he was released. To his credit be it said, he turned over a +new leaf, and from the West went to Cuba, where he fought with the +Cubans against Spanish rule. He was with the Cubans at the fall of +Santiago and died a few weeks later of tropical fever. + +As soon as the proper medicines could be obtained and administered, +those who had been drugged at the fort began to recover, and inside of +two weeks Colonel Fairfield, Captain Lee, and our other friends were +around once more, although rather weak. + +The mining company whose money had been saved was exceedingly thankful +to Captain Moore and the others for what had been done, and when, +several years later, the young captain left the regular army, this +company offered him a lucrative position, which he accepted and which +he fills to this day. + +Old Benson and Hank Leeson still continue to roam the Great Northwest, +and are happy. Occasionally they receive a visit from Joe and Darry, and +are never more satisfied than when they have the two young men with them +on a hunting and fishing tour. + +"Takes me back to years ago," says old Benson. "Years ago, when you were +both green as grass." + +"Well, we are not so green now," replies Joe, with a quiet smile. +"Through bitter experience we have learned a thing or two." + +"Now it is over I am glad I didn't miss it," puts in Darry. "We got a +genuine taste of soldier life, didn't we?" + +"That's so," adds Joe. "We were really and truly the Boys of the Fort." + + +THE END. + + + + +BY THE SAME AUTHOR + + + WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS; + Or, A Young Scout among the Indians. + + BOYS OF THE FORT; + Or, A Young Captain's Pluck. + + THE YOUNG BANDMASTER; + Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield. + + WHEN SANTIAGO FELL; + Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums. + + A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY; + Or, Afloat in the Philippines. + + OFF FOR HAWAII; + Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of The Fort, by Ralph Bonehill + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE FORT *** + +***** This file should be named 32057.txt or 32057.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/2/0/5/32057/ + +Produced by David Edwards, Mary Meehan and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/32057.zip b/32057.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..23648b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/32057.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bb15dad --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #32057 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/32057) |
